Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 340

Instruction Manual

SEL ICON
Integrated Communications
Optical Network

Instruction Manual

20140827

*PMICON-01*
! CAUTION ! ATTENTION
Equipment components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge Les composants de cet quipement sont sensibles aux
(ESD). Undetectable permanent damage can result if you do dcharges lectrostatiques (DES). Des dommages permanents
not use proper ESD procedures. Ground yourself, your work non-dcelables peuvent rsulter de labsence de prcautions
surface, and this equipment before removing any cover from contre les DES. Raccordez-vous correctement la terre, ainsi
this equipment. If your facility is not equipped to work with que la surface de travail et lappareil avant den retirer un
these components, contact SEL about returning this device panneau. Si vous ntes pas quips pour travailler avec ce
and related SEL equipment for service. type de composants, contacter SEL afin de retourner lappareil
pour un service en usine.

! DANGER ! DANGER
Disconnect or de-energize all external connections before Dbrancher tous les raccordements externes avant douvrir cet
opening this device. Contact with hazardous voltages and appareil. Tout contact avec des tensions ou courants internes
currents inside this device can cause electrical shock resulting lappareil peut causer un choc lectrique pouvant entraner des
in injury or death. blessures ou la mort.

! DANGER ! DANGER
Contact with instrument terminals can cause electrical shock Tout contact avec les bornes de lappareil peut causer un choc
that can result in injury or death. lectrique pouvant entraner des blessures ou la mort.

! WARNING ! AVERTISSEMENT
Have only qualified personnel service this equipment. If you are Seules des personnes qualifies peuvent travailler sur cet
not qualified to service this equipment, you can injure yourself appareil. Si vous ntes pas qualifis pour ce travail, vous
or others, or cause equipment damage. pourriez vous blesser avec dautres personnes ou endommager
lquipement.

! WARNING ! AVERTISSEMENT
Use of this equipment in a manner other than specified in this L'utilisation de cet appareil suivant des procdures diffrentes
manual can impair operator safety safeguards provided by this de celles indiques dans ce manuel peut dsarmer les
equipment. dispositifs de protection d'oprateur normalement actifs sur
cet quipement.

20112014 by Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.


All brand or product names appearing in this document are the trademark or registered trademark of their respective holders. No SEL
trademarks may be used without written permission. SEL products appearing in this document may be covered by U.S. and Foreign patents.
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc. reserves all rights and benefits afforded under federal and international copyright and patent laws in
its products, including without limitation software, firmware, and documentation.
The information in this document is provided for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Schweitzer Engineering
Laboratories, Inc. has approved only the English language document.
This product is covered by the standard SEL 10-year warranty. For warranty details, visit www.selinc.com or contact your customer service
representative. PMICON-01

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Table of Contents
R.Instruction Manual

List of Tables ........................................................................................................................................................ v


List of Figures .................................................................................................................................................... vii
Section 1: Overview and Specifications
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 1.1
ICON System................................................................................................................................................... 1.1
Applications..................................................................................................................................................... 1.2
ICON Architecture ........................................................................................................................................ 1.10
Access Modules............................................................................................................................................. 1.13
Access Submodules ....................................................................................................................................... 1.14
Line Module SFPs ......................................................................................................................................... 1.15
Dimensions .................................................................................................................................................... 1.17
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 1.19

Section 2: Physical Platforms


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 2.1
ICON Chassis Options .................................................................................................................................... 2.1
ICON HMI....................................................................................................................................................... 2.3
Power Modules ................................................................................................................................................ 2.3
Environmental Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 2.5
Full-Width Chassis Mounting Options............................................................................................................ 2.6
Access Module and Submodule Slot Assignments ......................................................................................... 2.7
Installing and Removing ICON Modules........................................................................................................ 2.9

Section 3: Line Module


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 3.1
Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 3.4
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 3.6
Settings and Status........................................................................................................................................... 3.6
Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 3.25
Network Management Communications ....................................................................................................... 3.41
Firmware Upgrade......................................................................................................................................... 3.42
Line Module Replacement ............................................................................................................................ 3.42

Section 4: Protected Line Module


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 4.1
Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 4.3
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 4.5
Settings and Status........................................................................................................................................... 4.5
Network Management Communications ....................................................................................................... 4.18
Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 4.20

Section 5: Server Module


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.1
Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 5.1
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 5.4
Dry Contact Inputs .......................................................................................................................................... 5.4
Contact Outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 5.5
IRIG-B Input ................................................................................................................................................... 5.5
GPS Input ........................................................................................................................................................ 5.6
GPS Time Distribution .................................................................................................................................... 5.7
IRIG-B Time Distribution ............................................................................................................................... 5.8
Node .............................................................................................................................................................. 5.10

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


ii Table of Contents

Section 6: Nx64F Submodule


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 6.1
Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.1
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 6.3
Settings and Status........................................................................................................................................... 6.3
Monitor ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.7
Testing ............................................................................................................................................................. 6.8
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................. 6.10

Section 7: Async Data Submodule


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 7.1
Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.1
Settings and Status........................................................................................................................................... 7.7
Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 7.13
Testing ........................................................................................................................................................... 7.15
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................. 7.16

Section 8: Transfer Trip Access Module


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 8.1
Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 8.1
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 8.3
Settings and Status........................................................................................................................................... 8.4
Testing ........................................................................................................................................................... 8.11
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................. 8.12

Section 9: 4-Wire Submodule


Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 9.1
Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 9.1
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 9.4
Settings and Status........................................................................................................................................... 9.5
Monitor ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.9
Testing ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.10
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................. 9.11

Section 10: Crypto Module


Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 10.1
Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 10.1
Settings and Status......................................................................................................................................... 10.4
Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 10.8
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................... 10.10

Section 11: FXS VF Submodule


Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 11.1
Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 11.1
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 11.3
Settings and Status......................................................................................................................................... 11.5
Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 11.9
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................... 11.11

Section 12: FXO VF Submodule


Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 12.1
Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 12.1
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 12.4
Settings and Status......................................................................................................................................... 12.5
Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 12.9
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................... 12.11

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Table of Contents iii

Section 13: DS1 Async Submodule


Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 13.1
Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 13.1
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 13.3
Settings and Status......................................................................................................................................... 13.4
Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 13.7
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................... 13.11

Section 14: DS1 Sync Submodule


Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 14.1
Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 14.1
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 14.4
Settings and Status......................................................................................................................................... 14.4
Monitor ........................................................................................................................................................ 14.10
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................... 14.12

Section 15: Ethernet Access Module


Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 15.1
Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 15.2
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 15.3
Settings .......................................................................................................................................................... 15.4
Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 15.7

Appendix A: Firmware and Manual Versions


Firmware......................................................................................................................................................... A.1
Instruction Manual........................................................................................................................................ A.12

Appendix B: Firmware Upgrade Instructions


Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................B.1
Process for Resetting Modules ........................................................................................................................B.5
Factory Assistance...........................................................................................................................................B.6

Appendix C: Configuration Process


Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................C.1
Line Module Configuration .............................................................................................................................C.1
Submodule or Access Module Provisioning Overview...................................................................................C.2
DS1 Async Provisioning Overview.................................................................................................................C.2

Appendix D: Connecting SEL-5051 Network Management System Software to the ICON


Network
Initial NMS Installation.................................................................................................................................. D.1
Changing Administration Password on ICON Network ................................................................................ D.4
Managing Password Changes Without Creating System Alarms................................................................... D.7
Managing Access to Multiple Networks ........................................................................................................ D.7
USB Access .................................................................................................................................................... D.9
Ethernet Access ............................................................................................................................................ D.10
Detecting the Network.................................................................................................................................. D.12
Setting Maximum SNMP Packet Size and TCP Port Number..................................................................... D.13
Creating a Virtual Link between ICONs Connected by Other Vendors SONET Equipment ..................... D.15

Appendix E: SEL-5051 Network Management Software Report Filter


Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................E.1
Event Search Criteria.......................................................................................................................................E.1

Appendix F: Effective Ethernet Throughput


Appendix G: Microsoft Windows OS Workarounds
Overriding Automatic Metrics in Microsoft Windows 7................................................................................ G.1
Enabling Desktop Composition in Windows 7 .............................................................................................. G.2

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


iv Table of Contents

Appendix H: SEL-5051 Network Management Circuit Wizard


Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ H.1
Configuring a Circuit...................................................................................................................................... H.1

Appendix I: Reporting of Time in SEL ICON and SEL-5051 Network Management


System Software
Overview ..........................................................................................................................................................I.1
Adjusting NMS For New Leap Seconds ..........................................................................................................I.2
How Leap Seconds are Displayed in NMS ......................................................................................................I.3

Appendix J: Alarms and Events


Acronyms

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


List of Tables
Table 1.1 Network Management Features ............................................................................................. 1.8
R.Instruction Manual

Table 1.2 Standard Single-Mode SONET SFP .................................................................................... 1.15


Table 1.3 Standard Multimode SONET SFP ....................................................................................... 1.16
Table 1.4 Single-Fiber Single-Mode SONET SFP .............................................................................. 1.16
Table 1.5 Single-Fiber Multimode SONET SFP.................................................................................. 1.16
Table 1.6 Standard Single-Mode Gigabit Ethernet SFP....................................................................... 1.16
Table 1.7 Standard Multimode Gigabit Ethernet SFP.......................................................................... 1.17
Table 2.1 ICON HMI LED Definitions.................................................................................................. 2.3
Table 2.2 Power Module Options........................................................................................................... 2.4
Table 2.3 Power Module LED Status..................................................................................................... 2.4
Table 2.4 Terminal Block/Power Supply Connections .......................................................................... 2.5
Table 2.5 Operating Requirements......................................................................................................... 2.5
Table 2.6 Module and Submodule Slot Assignments ............................................................................ 2.8
Table 3.1 Module Status Indicator LED ................................................................................................ 3.4
Table 3.2 Line Port LED ........................................................................................................................ 3.5
Table 3.3 Ethernet Port LED.................................................................................................................. 3.5
Table 3.4 PoE LED ................................................................................................................................ 3.5
Table 3.5 IRIG-B OUT LED.................................................................................................................. 3.6
Table 3.6 Ingress QTAG Processing .................................................................................................... 3.18
Table 3.7 QTAG Stripping ................................................................................................................... 3.19
Table 3.8 Supported PM Counters ....................................................................................................... 3.41
Table 4.1 Module Status Indicator LED ................................................................................................ 4.4
Table 4.2 Line Port LED (Top) .............................................................................................................. 4.4
Table 4.3 Line Port LED (Bottom) ........................................................................................................ 4.4
Table 4.4 IRIG-B OUT LED.................................................................................................................. 4.5
Table 4.5 Supported PM Counters ....................................................................................................... 4.31
Table 5.1 Status LED ............................................................................................................................. 5.2
Table 5.2 NMS Link/Data LED ............................................................................................................. 5.3
Table 5.3 IRIG-B Input LED ................................................................................................................. 5.6
Table 5.4 IRIG-B Input Requirements ................................................................................................... 5.6
Table 5.5 GPS LED................................................................................................................................ 5.6
Table 5.6 Antenna LED.......................................................................................................................... 5.6
Table 6.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED........................................................................................... 6.2
Table 6.2 Data IN LED .......................................................................................................................... 6.2
Table 6.3 Data OUT LED ...................................................................................................................... 6.2
Table 6.4 Troubleshooting the Nx64F Submodule .............................................................................. 6.10
Table 7.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED........................................................................................... 7.2
Table 7.2 Data IN LED .......................................................................................................................... 7.3
Table 7.3 Data OUT LED ...................................................................................................................... 7.3
Table 7.4 Troubleshooting the Async Submodule ............................................................................... 7.16
Table 8.1 Module Status LED................................................................................................................ 8.2
Table 8.2 Circuit Status LED ................................................................................................................. 8.2
Table 8.3 Command Sent LED .............................................................................................................. 8.3
Table 8.4 Output Active LED ................................................................................................................ 8.3
Table 8.5 Operating Mode...................................................................................................................... 8.4
Table 8.6 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................... 8.12
Table 9.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED........................................................................................... 9.2
Table 9.2 VF IN LED............................................................................................................................. 9.3
Table 9.3 VF OUT LED......................................................................................................................... 9.3
Table 9.4 Troubleshooting the 4W VF Submodule.............................................................................. 9.11
Table 10.1 Module Status Indicator LED .............................................................................................. 10.2
Table 10.2 Line Port LED ...................................................................................................................... 10.3
Table 10.3 Troubleshooting the Crypto Module .................................................................................. 10.10
Table 11.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED......................................................................................... 11.2

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


vi List of Tables

Table 11.2 Port Input LED ..................................................................................................................... 11.3


Table 11.3 Port Output LED .................................................................................................................. 11.3
Table 11.4 Troubleshooting the FXS VF Submodule .......................................................................... 11.11
Table 12.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED......................................................................................... 12.2
Table 12.2 Port Input LED ..................................................................................................................... 12.3
Table 12.3 Port Output LED .................................................................................................................. 12.3
Table 12.4 Troubleshooting the FXO VF Submodule ......................................................................... 12.11
Table 13.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED......................................................................................... 13.2
Table 13.2 Port Input LED ..................................................................................................................... 13.3
Table 13.3 Port Output LED .................................................................................................................. 13.3
Table 13.4 Troubleshooting the DS1 Async Submodule ..................................................................... 13.11
Table 14.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED......................................................................................... 14.2
Table 14.2 Port Input LED ..................................................................................................................... 14.3
Table 14.3 Port Output LED .................................................................................................................. 14.3
Table 14.4 Troubleshooting the DS1 Sync Submodule ....................................................................... 14.12
Table 15.1 Module Status Indicator LED .............................................................................................. 15.3
Table 15.2 PoE LED .............................................................................................................................. 15.3
Table 15.3 Ethernet Port LED................................................................................................................ 15.3
Table A.1 Line Module Firmware Revision History ............................................................................. A.1
Table A.2 Protected Line Module Firmware Revision History ............................................................. A.2
Table A.3 Server Module Firmware Revision History .......................................................................... A.3
Table A.4 Nx64F Submodule Firmware Revision History .................................................................... A.4
Table A.5 Async Submodule Firmware Revision History..................................................................... A.4
Table A.6 Transfer Trip Module 24/48 V Firmware Revision History.................................................. A.5
Table A.7 Transfer Trip Module 125/250 V Firmware Revision History.............................................. A.5
Table A.8 4-Wire VF Submodule Firmware Revision History.............................................................. A.5
Table A.9 Crypto Module Firmware Revision History.......................................................................... A.6
Table A.10 FXS Submodule Firmware Revision History........................................................................ A.6
Table A.11 FXO Submodule Firmware Revision History ....................................................................... A.6
Table A.12 DS1 Async Submodule Firmware Revision History............................................................. A.6
Table A.13 DS1 Sync Submodule Firmware Revision History ............................................................... A.6
Table A.14 Ethernet Access Module Firmware Revision History ........................................................... A.6
Table A.15 SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software Revision History ..................... A.7
Table A.16 Module Firmware Compatibility......................................................................................... A.10
Table A.17 Recommended Latest Firmware Release ............................................................................ A.11
Table A.18 Manual Revision History..................................................................................................... A.12
Table B.1 Firmware Versions That Support Scheduled Upgrades..........................................................B.3
Table F.1 Effective Ethernet Throughput for 10BASE-T....................................................................... F.1
Table F.2 Effective Ethernet Throughput for 100BASE-T..................................................................... F.2
Table F.3 Effective Ethernet Throughput for 1000BASE-FX................................................................ F.2
Table J.1 All Available SEL-5051 Alarms and Events by Affected Module Types ...............................J.1
Table J.2 Alarms and Events, Control Modules .....................................................................................J.4
Table J.3 Alarms and Events, Access Modules ......................................................................................J.7
Table J.4 Alarms and Events, Access Submodules ................................................................................J.8

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


List of Figures
Figure 1.1 Traditional Communications System Versus the ICON......................................................... 1.1
R.Instruction Manual

Figure 1.2 Time-Distribution Network .................................................................................................... 1.2


Figure 1.3 TeleprotectionTransmission Line Protection...................................................................... 1.3
Figure 1.4 Wide-Area Control Using Synchrophasors ............................................................................ 1.4
Figure 1.5 Security Applications ............................................................................................................. 1.5
Figure 1.6 Route Low-Speed DS0 Circuits ............................................................................................. 1.5
Figure 1.7 Distribute and Terminate Two-Wire Analog Circuits ............................................................ 1.6
Figure 1.8 ICON Integrated Communications Network With Network Management ............................ 1.6
Figure 1.9 SEL-5051 Network Management System Network and Topology (Overview Tab).............. 1.7
Figure 1.10 SEL-5051 Device Design (For Configuring and Monitoring Modules) ................................ 1.8
Figure 1.11 19-Inch Rack-Mount Chassis (Front Cable Access Shown) ................................................ 1.10
Figure 1.12 Half-Width Cube Chassis (Front Cable Access Shown) ...................................................... 1.10
Figure 1.13 Line Module ......................................................................................................................... 1.11
Figure 1.14 Protected Line Module ......................................................................................................... 1.12
Figure 1.15 Server Module ...................................................................................................................... 1.13
Figure 1.16 19-Inch ICON Dimension Diagram ..................................................................................... 1.17
Figure 1.17 Half-Width ICON Cube Dimension Diagram...................................................................... 1.18
Figure 2.1 Full-Size 19 Rack-Mount ICON Cable Access and HMI Display Views ............................ 2.2
Figure 2.2 ICON Cube Cable Access and HMI Display Views .............................................................. 2.2
Figure 2.3 ICON HMI Display View....................................................................................................... 2.3
Figure 2.4 Power Module ........................................................................................................................ 2.4
Figure 2.5 Power Requirement Markings................................................................................................ 2.5
Figure 2.6 Midplane Mounting Bracket .................................................................................................. 2.6
Figure 2.7 23-Inch Rack-Mount Extension ............................................................................................. 2.7
Figure 2.8 Quattro Module With Access Submodule Slots..................................................................... 2.8
Figure 2.9 Full-Width ICON Chassis Slot Assignments ......................................................................... 2.9
Figure 2.10 ICON Cube Chassis Slot Assignments .................................................................................. 2.9
Figure 3.1 Line Module 8020-01............................................................................................................. 3.4
Figure 3.2 Performance Monitor Interval Bins...................................................................................... 3.41
Figure 4.1 Protected Line Module 8021-01............................................................................................. 4.3
Figure 4.2 Cross Connect Source Settings ............................................................................................ 4.14
Figure 4.3 Terminate DPipe Settings..................................................................................................... 4.14
Figure 4.4 Registers ............................................................................................................................... 4.32
Figure 5.1 Server Module Connections and LED Indicators .................................................................. 5.2
Figure 5.2 Reset Jumper Location on the Server Module ....................................................................... 5.3
Figure 5.3 SEL-C575 Cable for Dry Contact Inputs ............................................................................... 5.4
Figure 5.4 Server Module Alarm Wiring Guide...................................................................................... 5.5
Figure 6.1 Nx64F PRBS Test Generator, Monitors, and Loopbacks....................................................... 6.5
Figure 7.1 Async LED Location and Function........................................................................................ 7.2
Figure 7.2 SEL-C616 Cable for Data Plus Control Line Diagram.......................................................... 7.4
Figure 7.3 SEL-C611 Cable Diagram for Two Circuits Per Port ............................................................ 7.4
Figure 7.4 Dual Circuit Custom Cable .................................................................................................... 7.5
Figure 7.5 Triple Circuit Custom Cable .................................................................................................. 7.5
Figure 7.6 SEL-C607 Cable Diagram for EIA-422 or EIA-485 4-Wire ................................................. 7.6
Figure 7.7 4W Custom Cable .................................................................................................................. 7.6
Figure 7.8 2W Custom Cable .................................................................................................................. 7.6
Figure 8.1 Front View of the Transfer Trip Module (TTM) With LED Locations.................................. 8.2
Figure 9.1 RJ45 Connector Pinouts for a VF Circuit .............................................................................. 9.2
Figure 9.2 4W LED Location and Function ............................................................................................ 9.2
Figure 9.3 SEL-C607 Cable 7Diagram for 4W VF Applications ........................................................... 9.3
Figure 10.1 Crypto Module LED Locations............................................................................................ 10.2
Figure 10.2 Ring Architecture ................................................................................................................. 10.3
Figure 11.1 RJ11 Connector Pinouts for a 2-Wire FXS Circuit .............................................................. 11.2
Figure 11.2 FXS LED Location and Function......................................................................................... 11.2

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


viii List of Figures

Figure 11.3 Cable Diagram for FXS VF Applications ............................................................................ 11.3


Figure 12.1 RJ11 Connector Pinouts for a 2-Wire FXO Circuit ............................................................. 12.2
Figure 12.2 FXS LED Location and Function......................................................................................... 12.2
Figure 12.3 Cable Diagram for FXO VF Applications ........................................................................... 12.3
Figure 13.1 RJ48C Connector Pinouts for a DS1 Circuit........................................................................ 13.2
Figure 13.2 DS1 Async LED Location and Function.............................................................................. 13.2
Figure 13.3 Cable Diagram for DS1 Async Applications ....................................................................... 13.3
Figure 14.1 RJ48C Connector Pinouts for a DS1 Circuit........................................................................ 14.2
Figure 14.2 DS1 Sync LED Location and Function................................................................................ 14.2
Figure 14.3 Cable Diagram for DS1 Sync Applications ......................................................................... 14.3
Figure 14.4 DS1 Sync Submodule Port Test Modes ............................................................................... 14.6
Figure 15.1 EAM LED Location and Function ....................................................................................... 15.2
Figure B.1 Firmware Upgrade Tab...........................................................................................................B.1
Figure B.2 Add Uploads Selection...........................................................................................................B.2
Figure B.3 Firmware Selected and Immediate Upload Selected..............................................................B.2
Figure B.4 Selected Firmware Upgrades Added to the Queue ................................................................B.4
Figure B.5 Firmware Upgrade Status Bars ..............................................................................................B.4
Figure B.6 Upgrade Complete..................................................................................................................B.4
Figure B.7 Reset Module..........................................................................................................................B.5
Figure B.8 Confirm Module Reset ...........................................................................................................B.5
Figure D.1 NMS Terms and Conditions .................................................................................................. D.1
Figure D.2 Log Into the Network Management System Software .......................................................... D.2
Figure D.3 Caps Lock Warning ............................................................................................................... D.2
Figure D.4 Disconnected From Network ................................................................................................ D.2
Figure D.5 Change Passwords................................................................................................................. D.3
Figure D.6 Network Entry Points ............................................................................................................ D.3
Figure D.7 Add Entry Points ................................................................................................................... D.3
Figure D.8 SEL-5051 NMS Properties.................................................................................................... D.4
Figure D.9 SEL-5051 NMS Properties Window ..................................................................................... D.5
Figure D.10 Adding Password Text to Target Field .................................................................................. D.5
Figure D.11 SEL-5051 NMS Login Screen .............................................................................................. D.6
Figure D.12 Security Screen...................................................................................................................... D.6
Figure D.13 Open Manage Networks Tool................................................................................................ D.7
Figure D.14 Manage Networks Window ................................................................................................... D.8
Figure D.15 Enter Network Name............................................................................................................. D.8
Figure D.16 Select and Open New Network ............................................................................................. D.8
Figure D.17 Open Network Confirmation................................................................................................. D.8
Figure D.18 USB Port on the Server Module............................................................................................ D.9
Figure D.19 NMS Terms and Conditions ................................................................................................ D.10
Figure D.20 Log Into the Network Management System Software ........................................................ D.10
Figure D.21 Ethernet Port on the Server Module .................................................................................... D.11
Figure D.22 NMS Terms and Conditions ................................................................................................ D.11
Figure D.23 Log Into the Network Management System Software ........................................................ D.11
Figure D.24 Network Entry Point Configuration Screen ........................................................................ D.12
Figure D.25 Network View...................................................................................................................... D.13
Figure D.26 Preferences Menu................................................................................................................ D.14
Figure D.27 Setting the SNMP Message Size and TCP Port Number .................................................... D.14
Figure D.28 Ignore Neighbor Node From First Node ............................................................................. D.16
Figure D.29 Ignore Neighbor Node From Second Node......................................................................... D.16
Figure D.30 Link the Ports ...................................................................................................................... D.17
Figure D.31 Enter Link Details ............................................................................................................... D.17
Figure D.32 Virtual Link ......................................................................................................................... D.17
Figure D.33 Delete Virtual Link.............................................................................................................. D.18
Figure E.1 Initiate Event Search Criteria Pane ........................................................................................E.1
Figure E.2 Event Search Criteria .............................................................................................................E.2
Figure E.3 Raised and Cleared Alarms Selection ....................................................................................E.3
Figure E.4 Major and Minor Alarms Selection........................................................................................E.3
Figure E.5 Security Reports .....................................................................................................................E.4

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


List of Figures ix

Figure E.6 Global Inventory.....................................................................................................................E.5


Figure G.1 Desktop Composition Disabled Screen................................................................................. G.2
Figure H.1 Circuit Wizard Tab ................................................................................................................ H.1
Figure H.2 Configure Circuit Button....................................................................................................... H.1
Figure H.3 Network View........................................................................................................................ H.2
Figure H.4 Select Nodes.......................................................................................................................... H.2
Figure H.5 Next Button ........................................................................................................................... H.3
Figure H.6 Select Drop Ports................................................................................................................... H.3
Figure H.7 Set Circuit Parameters ........................................................................................................... H.3
Figure H.8 Auto-Configuration Window................................................................................................. H.4
Figure H.9 Port Configuration Settings Window .................................................................................... H.4
Figure H.10 Finish Window ...................................................................................................................... H.5
Figure H.11 Apply Button ......................................................................................................................... H.5
Figure H.12 Confirmation Window........................................................................................................... H.5
Figure I.1 Preferences View .....................................................................................................................I.2
Figure I.2 Preferences Window................................................................................................................I.2
Figure I.3 File Open Dialog Box .............................................................................................................I.3

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Section 1
Overview and Specifications

Introduction
This section describes some of the features and benefits of the SEL Integrated
Communications Optical Network (ICON), containing the following topics:
ICON System on page 1.1
Applications on page 1.2
ICON Architecture on page 1.10
Access Modules on page 1.13
Access Submodules on page 1.14
Dimensions on page 1.17
Specifications on page 1.19

ICON System
The ICON combines both Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) and
Ethernet technologies on a single platform. To provide the equivalent
functionality of the ICON by using traditional methods, as many as four
discrete pieces of hardware would be necessary. Figure 1.1 is a comparison of
the ICON functionality to that of traditional methods.

Traditional System ICON System

Ethernet Switch
Fiber-Optic
Cables Between
Stations
SONET Terminal

VT 1.5

DACS
Voice, Data, and
Ethernet Interfaces
DS1

Channel Bank Channel Bank

Figure 1.1 Traditional Communications System Versus the ICON

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.2 Overview and Specifications
Applications

The ICON provides all the functionality of a traditional communications


system, including the following components:
Support for 155 Mbs (OC3), 622 Mbs (OC12), and 2.4 Gbs
(OC48) line speeds.
An Ethernet switch module to provide local Ethernet
connectivity. Typically this capability would require a separate
Ethernet network requiring dedicated hardware. ICON supports
both TDM and Ethernet traffic over SONET and provides an
Ethernet switch with Ethernet drop ports.
Drop ports for voice and data circuits. To do this using
traditional approaches would require a separate channel bank
or T1 terminal.
Integrated Digital Access Cross-Connect Switch (DACS). This
provides the cross-connection between the voice and data
circuit traffic on DS0 channels and the SONET multiplexer.
DS0 signals from incoming DS1 tributaries can also be
individually groomed and routed to any other network-wide
DS0 egress location. In legacy systems, this functionality was
typically performed using separate hardware.
The ICON combines both TDM and packet technology while offering
interfaces to the lowest bandwidth applications, including serial data and
voice communication. This consolidation of functionality provides economy
of scale, central management of the network, and a versatile system that will
provide a communications platform for many years.

Applications
Time Distribution
Site A
GPS
Antenna IRIG-B
Site D

Site B

Intersubstation
IRIG-B ICON Network IEEE 1588

Precision OXCO, IED


Cesium, or
Rubidium Clock

Intrasubstation
ICON Network
IRIG-B IEEE 1588

IRIG-B
IED
IED
Site C IED
Figure 1.2 Time-Distribution Network

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.3
Applications

The ICON can distribute time over wide-area networks (WANs) with an
accuracy of 1 s. High-accuracy time is quickly becoming a critical
requirement in power utility protection and monitoring schemes for use in
applications such as the following:
Power system disturbance recording devices
Synchrophasor measurement
Sequential Events Recorders (SER)

Each ICON terminal has a global positioning system (GPS) receiver. When
enabled, the local GPS receiver provides the local real-time clock and network
stratum one clock. In the event of a local GPS receiver failure, other clock
sources in the network will continue to provide high-accuracy timing over the
network. In the event that all GPS clock sources in an ICON network are lost,
the network will continue to maintain relative time with an accuracy of1 s.
Each node also has an IRIG-B input port to allow a CO-located high-stability
(OCXO, Rubidium, or Cesium) clock to improve the holdover drift.
Time signals to local intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) (e.g., SEL-311) are
available from two BNC ports on the Line Module, and the EIA-232/EIA-422
ports on the Async Submodule.
Timing over the Ethernet ports (IEEE 1588pp) will be supported in a future
release.

Transmission Line
Protection

Line Current
Differential System
C37.94

Site A

Intersubstation
ICON Network
C37.94 C37.94

Line Current Direct Transfer


Differential Site B Trip System
System Site D ICON With
Direct Transfer
Trip Module
Site C
Figure 1.3 TeleprotectionTransmission Line Protection

Transmission line protection is an important application to an electric utility.


Figure 1.3 shows two types of protection: line current differential protection
and direct transfer trip protection.
For line current differential protection, an SEL-311L relay with an IEEE
C37.94 interface connects to an Nx64F Data Submodule on the ICON at
Site D. A similar connection is established at Site A.
For direct transfer trip protection, an SEL-2595 with an IEEE C37.94
interface connects to an Nx64F data submodule on the ICON at Site B. A
similar connection is established at Site C using the transfer trip module
(TTM) available on the ICON. The ICON network monitors and reports the
channel latency in real time. You can select the shortest path between

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.4 Overview and Specifications
Applications

terminals as the primary path. This ensures that the system always reverts
back to this configuration in the event of a path failure and subsequent
restoration. The ICON TTM is a four-function transfer trip module that can
plug into the ICON shelf for an integrated solution. These features combined
with robust environmental operating specifications make the ICON ideal for
critical power system applications.

Synchrophasors
Site A
Precision OXCO,
Cesium, or SEL-3354
Rubidium Clock
IRIG-B Ethernet
Site B
IRIG-B GPS
Antenna IRIG-B

Intersubstation
ICON Network
Site D
IRIG-B Ethernet

SEL-421
Intrasubstation
ICON Network
Ethernet Ethernet
IRIG-B IRIG-B
Ethernet
IRIG-B
SEL-421 Synchrophasor
Processor
Site C SEL-421
Figure 1.4 Wide-Area Control Using Synchrophasors

Synchronized phasor measurements (synchrophasors) provide a real-time


measurement of electrical quantities across a power system. If they are
synchronized correctly, you can use these measurements for analysis and
control of the power system. The ICON provides communication necessary
for synchrophasors. Ethernet is the preferred method to communicate
synchrophasor data between power system substations and control locations.
A key component of a synchrophasor system is the availability of precise time.
The ICON distributes time across the network and can maintain better than
1 s accuracy among all terminals in the network. This allows synchrophasor
systems to continue to operate accurately even in the event of a local or
system-wide GPS failure.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.5
Applications

Security Monitoring
Site A Video Monitoring
Station

Ethernet

Power Over
Intersubstation Ethernet
Ethernet ICON Network
Ethernet

Power Over
Ethernet SEL-2440
SCADA DPAC
Site D Door Alarm
Ethernet
SEL-2440 Cabinet Fence
DPAC Alarms Alarms
Site B
Cabinet Fence
Site C Alarms Alarms

Figure 1.5 Security Applications

Use the SEL-2440 with the ICON to address substation security applications.
The SEL-2440 Discrete Programmable Automation Controller (DPAC)
provides fast and powerful input/output (I/O) programmable logic, flexible
communication, and integration with supervisory control and data acquisition
(SCADA). Fence, motion, panel, and door sensors can connect to the
SEL-2440 DPAC digital inputs, while strobes, sirens, and substation lighting
connect to SEL-2440 control outputs. The ICON network can then
communicate information back to a SCADA master. In addition to providing
communication for the DPAC, the ICON Ethernet ports support Power over
Ethernet (PoE). This allows devices such as video cameras and IP telephones
to draw their power from the ICON.

DS0 Distribution Use ICONs DS0 grooming ability to route low-speed DS0 circuits from byte
synchronous DS1 inputs onto any DS0 drop on the ICON network.

0
15
FXS 23

T1 Frame = 24 DS0s
0 1 2 23
DS1 Sync
Non-ICON
1 11 MUX
Nx64, 4-Wire T1/DS1

FXO
2

Figure 1.6 Route Low-Speed DS0 Circuits

Extend the reach of your corporate PBX into each ICON location by
connecting it to the ICON DS1 Sync Module. Then use ICON FXS modules
throughout the network to distribute and terminate two-wire analog circuits
for telephones and faxes.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.6 Overview and Specifications
Applications

DS1

PBX

Figure 1.7 Distribute and Terminate Two-Wire Analog Circuits

Network Management
Site A
SEL-5051
Manager

Ethernet

Ethernet
Site B
Intersubstation
Local ICON Network
User
Site D
Ethernet
SNMP
Manager

Intrasubstation
ICON Network

USB Local
Connection User
Site C
Figure 1.8 ICON Integrated Communications Network With Network Management

Use industry-standard SNMPv3 or the SEL-5051 software to manage an


ICON network. These network management sessions can occur either locally
or remotely via Ethernet, or locally via USB. NMS provides:
Graphical network representation
Remote provisioning
Event reporting
Performance monitoring
Inventory management
Remote firmware upgrade of ICON units
Monitoring of contact closures

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.7
Applications

NMS detects the network and topology, then presents it graphically as shown
in Figure 1.9. The configuration of each network element can be viewed and
modified as shown in Figure 1.10. The graphical views allow the status of
every network element to be verified, with the ability to perform system-wide
monitoring and event logging. To simplify locating specific nodes on larger
networks, you can also search for nodes whose name (alias) you enter into a
search box. Only those nodes which meet your search criteria are displayed.

Figure 1.9 SEL-5051 Network Management System Network and Topology (Overview Tab)

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.8 Overview and Specifications
Applications

Figure 1.10 SEL-5051 Device Design (For Configuring and Monitoring Modules)

Table 1.1 Network Management Features (Sheet 1 of 2)

Feature Description

Graphical Network Represent ICON network element with a node icon


Representation Organize and arrange node icons
Distribute common view to multiple users
Display type and status of internode line links
Event Management Track user access at each node
Monitor valid and invalid logon attempts
Session statisticslogon and logoff times
Configuration history
Filter and sort event log parameters/columns
Event log electronic file storage or paper record
Alarms for users exceeding allowable invalid counts for specific events
Alarm Management Alarms are recorded in an alarm engine that supports three views
Current alarms
New alarms
Acknowledged alarms
Alarms are time-stamped and stored on the local node
An alarm log file is stored on the host computer
Alarms are filtered and sorted

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.9
Applications

Table 1.1 Network Management Features (Sheet 2 of 2)

Feature Description

Inventory Management Inventory by network, ring, node


Total number of modules
Number of specific modules
Inventory information
Module serial numbers
Module firmware
Specific parameters
Remote firmware upgrade of all units
Configuration Management Circuit provisioning wizards (Pipes, STS-1, VT)
Circuit trace
Circuit aliases
Node aliases
Ring aliases
Port aliases
Performance Management SONET performance monitoring
Section
Line
Path
VT: code violations
Errored seconds
Severely errored seconds
Ethernet frame counters
Input and output frame counters
Error frame counters
CybersecuritySystems Security Capable of enabling NERC-CIP compliance
Management Generates network topology maps and configuration
Role-based user access controls and file encryption
Centralized user account and password management
Event reporting
Generates reports of authorized users and access privileges
Logs all changes to system settings, firmware, and hardware modules
Communications ports disabled by default
Authenticates and monitors all user access
Logs all authorized and unauthorized access attempts
Alarm management
Logs physical removal of hardware modules and attempts to access disabled Ethernet ports

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.10 Overview and Specifications
ICON Architecture

ICON Architecture
Chassis Options

Line Server
Module* Module Access Modules Power Modules

* Protected Line Modules shown


Figure 1.11 19-Inch Rack-Mount Chassis (Front Cable Access Shown)

The ICON is available in a 19-inch rack-mount chassis as shown in


Figure 1.11. The 19-inch rack-mount chassis has seven access module slots,
which are available for the various interfaces.

Line Server Access Power


Module* Module Modules Modules

* Protected Line Modules shown


Figure 1.12 Half-Width Cube Chassis (Front Cable Access Shown)

For more space restricted installations, the ICON is available in the ICON
Cube chassis shown in Figure 1.12. The ICON Cube has two access module
slots.
Access module slots are the physical locations for the various accessory drop
interfaces chosen by the user. The network supports two hardware
configurations for access modules: full height and the Quattro Module, shown
in the access module slots in Figure 1.11. Use the Quattro Module to divide
the access module slot into four parts called submodule slots. The Quattro
Module concept allows more efficient use of an access module slot. For

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.11
ICON Architecture

example, if only one voice or data circuit is necessary, the Quattro Module can
support various combinations of data and voice submodules in the four
available submodule slots.

Line Module The Line Module provides the following functionality:


Intermode communications links using SONET OC-48 line
ports
Eight 10/100 Mbps copper drop ports for Ethernet traffic
Two 1000 Mbps fiber drop ports for Ethernet traffic
Cross-connect with synchronous transport signal level 1
(STS-1) or virtual tributary (VT) granularity
Timing output (IRIG-B) signals
PoE on four ports

Tri-Color
Status LED

RJ45
Connectors
Line Ports 10/100 Mbps
for OC-48 SFPs Power Over
Ethernet

SFP ports
for Gigabit
Ethernet
drop circuits
RJ45
Connectors
10/100 Mbps
Ethernet
BNC Connectors
IRIG-B OUT

Figure 1.13 Line Module

Protected Line The Protected Line Module provides a redundant SONET line interface. Users
have the option to install two Protected Line Modules in place of the single
Module Line Module. The Protected Line Module provides added reliability by
ensuring SONET line communications are maintained in the event of a
module failure or replacement.
The Protected Line Module provides the following functionality:
Internode communications links using SONET OC-3/OC-12/
OC-48 line ports
Cross-connect with STS-1, VT, or DS0 granularity

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.12 Overview and Specifications
ICON Architecture

Timing output (IRIG-B) signals


Ethernet support provided by separate Ethernet Access Module

Tri-Color
Status LED

Line Ports
for OC-3,
OC-12, and
OC-48 SFPs

BNC Connectors
IRIG-B OUT

Figure 1.14 Protected Line Module

Server Module The Server Module provides the following functionality:


Timing input (GPS and IRIG-B) signals
RJ45 connector supporting 100 Mbps Ethernet for NMS local
or remote connection
USB management port
Three contact inputs for NMS alarm information
Two Form C contact outputs for major and minor alarms

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.13
Access Modules

Tri-Color Status LED


Type B USB Connector
NMS Local Connection RJ45 Connector
100 Mbps Ethernet
NMS Local or Remote
Connection

Reserved for
future use

Three Dry
Contact Input
Connections

Terminal Block
Contact OUT
2 Connections
BNC Connector
IRIG-B IN

TNC Connector
GPS Antenna IN

Figure 1.15 Server Module

Access Modules
Access modules are the full height of the chassis. The 19-inch rack-mount
chassis has seven access module slots available. The ICON Cube has two
access module slots available.
The access modules and submodules all support the following test and
monitoring features:
Circuit addressing
Real-time latency monitoring
PRBS generation and monitoring
Local and line loopback

This feature set consumes an additional 64 kbps time slot per module.

Quattro Module The Quattro Module provides the interface for as many as four Access
submodules. The various submodules available are described in Access
Submodules.

Ethernet Access The Ethernet Access Module (EAM) provides eight 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
ports on a full-height access module. The EAM is currently only supported by
Module the Protected Line Module.
10/100 Mbps copper drop ports for Ethernet traffic
PoE (to power video cameras, etc.)

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.14 Overview and Specifications
Access Submodules

Transfer Trip Module


Inputs
Number of command inputs: 4
Input voltage options: 24, 48, 125, 250 Vdc
Connector: Compression block

Outputs
Number of command outputs: 4
Output type: SEL Fast Hybrid
Output ratings
Make: 30 A per IEEE C37.90
Interrupting:
48 Vdc 10 A L/R = 40 ms
125 Vdc 10 A L/R = 40 ms
250 Vdc 10 A L/R = 20 ms

Pickup time: 10 s
Dropout time: 8 ms
Connector: Compression block

Crypto Module Number of circuits encrypted: 2


Encryption line rate: OC-48
Encryption: AES-128, AES-256
Latency: <1 s
Interface: Four small form-factor pluggable (SFP) fiber-optic transceivers
The Crypto Module cannot be used with the ICON Cube chassis.

Access Submodules
Data
Nx64F
Number of ports: 1
Interface: IEEE C37.94
Data rate: 64 kbps to 768 kbps
Connector: ST fiber optic
Wavelength: 850 nm multimode or 1300 nm single-mode (ordering option)
Single-mode will be available in a future release.

Async
Number of ports: 2
NOTE: As many as six EIA-232 Interface:
circuits can be supplied if handshake
signals are not necessary. EIA-232
EIA-422
EIA-485

Data rate: 300 bps to 115.2 kbps


Connector: Two RJ45
Time output: IRIG-B

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.15
Line Module SFPs

DS1 Async
Number of ports: 4
Connector: RJ48C
Line coding schemes: AMI, B8ZS
Nominal data rate: 1.544 Mbps

DS1 Sync
Number of ports: 4
Connector: Four RJ48C
Line coding schemes: AMI, B8ZS
Nominal data rate: 1.544 Mbps

Voice
Voice 4-Wire
Number of circuits: 2
Signaling: Type I, II, III, V, or Transmission Only (TO)
Connector: Two RJ45

Voice 2-Wire FXS


Number of circuits: 1
Signaling: Loop start, PLAR
Connector: One RJ11

Voice 2-Wire FXO


Number of circuits: 2
Signaling: Loop start
Connector: Two RJ11

Line Module SFPs


The SONET SFP fiber-optic specifications are listed below.
NOTE: The Line Module (8020-01) Table 1.2 Standard Single-Mode SONET SFP (Sheet 1 of 2)
only supports the OC-48 SFPs in
Table 1.2 and Table 1.4. The Protected
Line Module (8021-01) supports all of SEL Part SONET Distance Distance Wavelength TX Power RX Sens.
the OC-48, OC-12, and OC-3 SFPs that Number Rate (km) (Mi) (nm) (dBm) (dBm)
are listed.
8120 OC-48 2 1.2 1310 3 to 9.5 18
8121 OC-48 15 9.3 1310 0 to 5 18
8122 OC-48 40 25 1310 3 to 2 20
8123 OC-48 80 50 1550 3 to 2 28
8124 OC-48 100 62 1550 5 to 0 28
8125-01 OC-48 120 75 1550 1 to 5 30
8125-02 OC-48 160 100 1550 5 to 8 30
8110-01 OC-12 20 12.4 1310 8 to 14 28
8110-02 OC-12 40 25 1310 2 to 3 28
8110-03 OC-12 80 50 1550 2 to 3 29

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.16 Overview and Specifications
Line Module SFPs

Table 1.2 Standard Single-Mode SONET SFP (Sheet 2 of 2)

SEL Part SONET Distance Distance Wavelength TX Power RX Sens.


Number Rate (km) (Mi) (nm) (dBm) (dBm)

8110-04 OC-12 120 74.5 1550 5 to 0 34


8110-05 OC-12 160 99.4 1550 5 to 1 37
8105-01 OC-3 20 12.4 1310 8 to 14 31
8105-02 OC-3 50 31 1310 0 to 5 34
8105-03 OC-3 80 50 1550 0 to 5 34
8105-04 OC-3 120 74.5 1550 5 to 0 34
8105-05 OC-3 160 99.4 1550 5 to 2 35

Table 1.3 Standard Multimode SONET SFP

SEL Part SONET Distance Distance Wavelength TX Power RX Sens.


Number Rate (km) (Mi) (nm) (dBm) (dBm)

8111-01 OC-12 1 0.62 1310 12 to 19 26


8106-01 OC-3 2 1.24 1310 12 to 19 30

Table 1.4 Single-Fiber Single-Mode SONET SFP

SEL Part SONET Distance Distance Wavelength TX Power RX Sens.


Number Rate (km) (Mi) (nm) TX/RX (dBm) (dBm)

8127-01 OC-48 5 3.1 1310/1550 3 to 10 18


8127-11 1550/1310 3 to 10 18
8127-02 OC-48 20 12.4 1310/1550 0 to 5 18
8127-12 1550/1310 0 to 5 18
8127-03 OC-48 40 25 1310/1550 3 to 2 20
8127-13 1550/1310 3 to 2 20
8127-04 OC-48 80 50 1510/1590 3 to 2 28
8127-14 1590/1510 3 to 2 28

Table 1.5 Single-Fiber Multimode SONET SFP

SEL Part SONET Distance Distance Wavelength TX Power RX Sens.


Number Rate (m) (ft) (nm) TX/RX (dBm) (dBm)

8128-01 OC-48 300 984 1310/1550 0 to 9 15


8128-11 1550/1310 0 to 9 15

Table 1.6 Standard Single-Mode Gigabit Ethernet SFP

SEL Part Wavelength


Ethernet Rate Distance (km) Distance (Mi)
Number (nm)

8135-01 1000BASE-LX 10 6.2 1310


8135-02 1000BASE-LX 20 12.4 1310
8135-03 1000BASE-LX 30 18.6 1310
8135-04 1000BASE-LX 40 24.8 1310
8135-05 1000BASE-LX 50 31.0 1550
8135-06 1000BASE-LX 80 49.7 1550

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.17
Dimensions

Table 1.7 Standard Multimode Gigabit Ethernet SFP

SEL Part Wavelength


Ethernet Rate Distance (m) Distance (Mi)
Number (nm)

8136-01 1000BASE-SX 300 (62.5/125 m) 0.18 850


500 (50/125 m) 0.34

Dimensions

Figure 1.16 19-Inch ICON Dimension Diagram

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.18 Overview and Specifications
Dimensions

in
(mm)
Figure 1.17 Half-Width ICON Cube Dimension Diagram

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.19
Specifications

Specifications
U.Instruction Manual

Line Module (SEL-8020-01) Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFPs)


Also see Table 1.2Table 1.5.
Line Ports
SONET OC-3 Dual Fiber (Multimode)
A/B: OC-48
Connector: LC
C/D: OC-48
1310 nm: 2 km
E/F: 1000BASE-LX Ethernet
SONET OC-3 Dual Fiber (Single Mode)
Max VCAT Differential Delay
Connector: LC
VT1.5: 62.5 s
1310 nm: 20 km
STS-N (N being STS-1 or
STS-3c): 115 s 1310 nm: 50 km

Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFPs) 1550 nm: 80 km

Also see Table 1.2Table 1.7. 1550 nm: 120 km

SONET OC-48 Dual Fiber (Single Mode) 1550 nm: 160 km

Connector: LC SONET OC-12 Dual Fiber (Multimode)

1310 nm: 2 km Connector: LC

1310 nm: 15 km 1310 nm: 1 km

1310 nm: 40 km SONET OC-12 Dual Fiber (Single Mode)

1550 nm: 80 km Connector: LC

1550 nm: 100 km 1310 nm: 20 km

1550 nm: 160 km 1310 nm: 40 km

SONET OC-48 Single Fiber Bidirectional (Multimode) 1310 nm: 80 km

1310 nm Tx, 1550 nm Rx: 300 m 1550 nm: 120 km

1550 nm Tx, 1310 nm Rx: 300 m 1550 nm: 160 km

SONET OC-48 Single Fiber Bidirectional (Single Mode) SONET OC-48 Dual Fiber (Single Mode)

Connector: LC Connector: LC

1310 nm Tx, 1550 nm Rx: 5 km 1310 nm: 2 km

1550 nm Tx, 1310 nm Rx: 5 km 1310 nm: 15 km

1310 nm Tx, 1550 nm Rx: 20 km 1310 nm: 40 km

1550 nm Tx, 1310 nm Rx: 20 km 1550 nm: 80 km

1310 nm Tx, 1550 nm Rx: 40 km 1550 nm: 100 km

1550 nm Tx, 1310 nm Rx: 40 km 1550 nm: 160 km

1510 nm Tx, 1590 nm Rx: 80 km SONET OC-48 Single Fiber Bidirectional (Multimode)

1590 nm Tx, 1510 nm Rx: 80 km 1310 nm Tx, 1550 nm Rx: 300 m


1550 nm Tx, 1310 nm Rx: 300 m
Other Ports
SONET OC-48 Single Fiber Bidirectional (Single Mode)
10/100 Ethernet Ports
Connector: RJ45 Connector: LC
1000 Mbs Optical 1310 nm Tx, 1550 nm Rx: 5 km
Ethernet Connector: SFP
1550 nm Tx, 1310 nm Rx: 5 km
Unicast MAC Addresses: 16000
1310 nm Tx, 1550 nm Rx: 20 km
Multicast MAC
Addresses: 2000 1550 nm Tx, 1310 nm Rx: 20 km

Power Over Ethernet: IEEE 802.3af 1310 nm Tx, 1550 nm Rx: 40 km

IRIG-B Out Connector: BNC 1550 nm Tx, 1310 nm Rx: 40 km


1510 nm Tx, 1590 nm Rx: 80 km
Protected Line Module (SEL-8021-01)
1590 nm Tx, 1510 nm Rx: 80 km
Line Ports
A/B: OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48
C/D: OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


1.20 Overview and Specifications
Specifications

Ethernet 1000BASE-LX Dual fiber (Single Mode) SEL-8010-02


Connector: LC Rated Supply Voltage: 110/125/220/250 Vdc; 120/240 Vac
1310 nm: 10 km Input Voltage Range: 88300 Vdc; 102264 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Terminal Block Connector
1310 nm: 20 km
Power Consumption: 65 W max
1310 nm: 30 km
1310 nm: 40 km Access Modules
1550 nm: 50 km Ethernet Access Module (SEL-8035-01)
1550 nm: 80 km 10/100 Ethernet Ports: 8
Ethernet 1000BASE-LX Dual fiber (Multimode) Ethernet Port Connector: RJ45
Connector: LC Power Over Ethernet: 4 ports, IEEE 802.3af compliant
800 nm: 300 m (62.5/125) Data Nx64F (Multimode) (SEL-8051-01)
500 m (50/125)
Data Standard: C37.94
Other Ports
Fiber: Multimode
IRIG-B Out Connector: BNC
Connector: ST
Server Module (SEL-8030-01) Quantity: 1 Rx, 1 Tx
GPS Antenna Connector: TNC Data Rate: 64 kbps768 kbps
Supply for GPS Antenna: 5 V or 3 V Data Nx64F (Single-Mode) (Future Release)
IRIG-B In Connectors: BNC Fiber: Single-mode
Code Format: DCLS equivalent TTL Connector: ST
Network Management B-type USB connector Quantity: 1 Rx, 1 Tx
Ports: RJ45 Ethernet
Data Rate: 64 kbps768 kbps
Data Ports Connector: RJ45 reserved for future use
Contact In Connector: Molex 70551 connector
Data Nx64E (Future Release)
Data Standards: EIA-530, EIA-449, CCITT V.35,
Quantity: 3
CCITT X.21
Contact Out Connector: Terminal block
Connector: DB-25
Quantity: 2
Quantity: 1
Type: Form C
Data Rates: 64 kbps768 kbps
Power Modules Data Async (SEL-8053-01)
Full-Height Power Module for 19-Inch Rack Connector: RJ45
Input Voltage Range Quantity: 2 ports supporting as many as 6 circuits
SEL-8011-01 Data Standards: EIA-232, EIA-422, EIA-485
Rated Supply Voltage: 120/240 Vac Data Rates: 110 bps115.2 kbps
Input Voltage Range: 102264 Vac, 50/60 Hz IEC C6 4W VF (SEL-8065-01)
Connector
Connector: RJ45
SEL-8011-02
Number of Ports: 2
Rated Supply Voltage: 110/125/220/250 Vdc; 120/240 Vac
2W FXS (SEL-8066-01)
Input Voltage Range: 88300 Vdc; 102264 Vac, 50/60 Hz
Terminal Block Connector Connector: RJ11
SEL-8011-03 Number of Ports: 1
Rated Supply Voltage: 24/48 Vdc 2W FXO (SEL-8067-01)
Input Voltage Range: 1856 Vdc Connector: RJ11
Power Consumption: 95 W max Number of Ports: 2
Half-Height Power Module for ICON Cube Chassis Direct Transfer Trip (SEL-8041-01, SEL-8041-04)
Input Voltage Range Connector: Compression terminal
SEL-8010-01 Number of Commands: 4
Rated Supply Voltage: 120/240 Vac Channel Bandwidth: 64 kbps
Input Voltage Range: 102264 Vac, 50/60 Hz IEC C6 DS1 Async (SEL-8057-01)
Connector
Connector: RJ48C
Number of Ports: 4

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Overview and Specifications 1.21
Specifications

DS1 Sync (SEL-8057-02) Voltage Interruptions IEC 61000-4-29:2000 Clause 5 (Table 1b)
(On Power Input Port): Severity Level: 1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300,
Connector: RJ48C 1000 ms
Number of Ports: 4 Voltage Dips IEC 61000-4-29:2000 Clause 5 (Table 1a)
(On Power Input Ports): Severity Level: 40% Rated Voltage for
Crypto Module (SEL-8029-01)
10, 30, 100, 300, 1000 ms
Connector: LC Severity Level: 70% rated voltage for
10, 30, 100, 300, 1000 ms
Number of Ports: 4 IEC 61000-4-11:2004
Severity Level: 0.5 cycle, 1 cycle,
System Specifications 2.5 cycles, 5 cycles, 10 cycles, 25
Network Topologies: Point-to-Point, Linear, Ring, Multiple cycles
Rings with single or dual Electrostatic Discharge IEEE 1613-2003 Clause 8Class 1
interconnected nodes Immunity: Severity Level 15 kV air discharge,
Path Switching Time: <5 ms per ring for Ethernet; < 5 ms end- 8 kV contact discharge
to-end for TDM IEC 61000-4-2:2008
Severity Level 4: 15 kV air discharge,
Convection Cooled No fans 8 kV contact discharge

Environmental Requirements Radiated RF Immunity: IEEE 1613-2003 Clause 7Class 1


Severity Level: 35 V/m (peak)
Operating Requirements IEC 61000-4-3:2006
Severity Level: 10 V/m
Operating Temperature: 20 to +65C (4 to +149F) ambient
Conducted RF Immunity IEC 61000-4-6:2001
Storage Temperature: 40 to +85C (40 to +185F) (On Power Input Port): Severity Level: 10 Vrms
Relative Humidity: 595%, noncondensing Magnetic Field Immunity: IEC 61000-4-8:2009; Power frequency
Pollution Environment magnetic field
Pollution Degree: 2 Severity Level: 5 (1000 A/m for
3 seconds, 100 A/m for 1 minute)
Maximum Altitude: 2000 m IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Atmospheric Pressure: 80 ... 110 kPa Severity Level: 5, 1000 A/m peak
Surge Immunity: IEC 61000-4-5-2005
Type Test Requirements Severity Level: 4 kV (peak), 2 kV Line-
Cold: IEC 60068-2-1:2007 Earth, 1 kV Line-Line
Test Ad, 16 hours at 20C Surge Withstand IEEE 1613-2003 Clause 6Class 1
Dry Heat: IEC 60068-2-2:2007 Capability: Severity Level: 2.5 kV, 1 MHz
Test Bd, 16 hours at +65C Oscillatory; 4 kV, 2.5 kHz Fast
Transient
Damp Heat Cyclic: IEC 60068-2-30:2005 IEC 60255-22-1
95% humidity, 25 to 55C, 6 cycles Severity Level: 2.5 kV
Vibration Resistance: IEEE 1613 Clause 9 Class V.S.X Fast Transient Burst: IEC 60255-22-4:2008
IEC 60255-21-1:1988 IEC 61000-4-4:2011
Severity Level: 10150 Hz, 1 G Severity Level Class A: 4 kV, 5 kHz,
Response; 2 G Endurance 2 kV, 5 kHz on communications ports
Shock Resistance: IEEE 1613 Clause 9
IEC 60255-21-2:1988
Severity Level: Class 2 Response, 10 G
Class 1 withstand, 15 G
Class 1 Bump, 10 G
Seismic: IEC 60255-21-3:1993
Severity Level: Class 2 Response,
2 G Horizontal, 1 G Vertical
Insulation Tests IEEE 1613-2003 Clause 5
(On Power Input Port): IEEE C37.90:2005
IEC 60255-5:2000
Ripple IEEE 1613-2003
(On DC Power Input Peak = 5% of voltage rating (but not to
Port): go below min. voltage)
IEC 61000-4-17:2009 Severity Level 2:
Peak-to-Peak = 4% of voltage rating
Severity Level 3: Peak-to-Peak = 10%
of Voltage Rating
Severity Level 4: Peak-to-Peak = 15%
of Voltage Rating

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Section 2
Physical Platforms

Introduction
This section describes some of the physical characteristics and options of the
SEL Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON), containing the
following topics:
ICON Chassis Options on page 2.1
ICON HMI on page 2.3
Power Modules on page 2.3
Environmental Requirements on page 2.5
Full-Width Chassis Mounting Options on page 2.6
Access Module and Submodule Slot Assignments on page 2.7

ICON Chassis Options


The SEL ICON is available in two chassis configurations, the full size ICON
chassis that can support seven access module slots and the half-width Cube
chassis with support for two access modules.

Full-Size ICON Chassis The ICON 19 rack-mount chassis, shown in Figure 2.1, has seven access
module slots, which are available for the various modules and submodules
described in ICON Architecture on page 1.10. See Access Module and
Submodule Slot Assignments on page 2.7 when adding new modules or
submodules to the ICON.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


2.2 Physical Platforms
ICON Chassis Options

Line Server Access Modules Power Modules


Module
Module* Module

HMI Display
* Protected Line Modules shown
Figure 2.1 Full-Size 19 Rack-Mount ICON Cable Access and HMI Display Views

Half-Width ICON Cube


Chassis

HMI Display
Line Server Access Power
Module* Module Modules Modules * Protected Line Modules shown
Figure 2.2 ICON Cube Cable Access and HMI Display Views

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Physical Platforms 2.3
ICON HMI

The ICON Cube chassis is ideal for small footprint (such as pad mount)
installations as well as industrial and long-distance repeater extension
applications. As shown in Figure 2.2, the Cube has two access module slots
which are available for the various interfaces described in ICON Architecture
on page 1.10. See Access Module and Submodule Slot Assignments on
page 2.7 when adding new modules or submodules to the Cube.

ICON HMI
HMI LEDs The human-machine interface (HMI) display (see Figure 2.3) on both ICON
chassis provides LEDs that summarize the present nodes conditions, as
shown in Table 2.1.

Figure 2.3 ICON HMI Display View

Table 2.1 ICON HMI LED Definitions

LED Status Description

ENABLE LED
Steady Green Line Module is operational
Dark Line Module is non-operational
FAR END LED
Steady Yellow Far-end failure has been detected
Dark No far-end failures
TEST LED
Steady Blue At least one module in node is in test mode
Dark No module in the node is in test mode
ALARM LED
Steady Red Node has at least one active alarm
Dark No active alarms in the node

USB This standard USB-B port is an interface for network management. This port
is intended for local use only and will only operate with a PC that is running
SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) software. This USB port will
function similarly to the USB port located on the Server Module. Both HMI
and Server USB ports can be accessed simultaneously.

Power Modules
The full-width ICON and the ICON Cube both use dual redundant, hot-
swappable power modules. One medium voltage and two high voltage power
modules are available for the full-width ICON, and two high-voltage power
module options are available for the Cube. Table 2.2 provides a list of the
available power modules and their specifications.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


2.4 Physical Platforms
Power Modules

Table 2.2 Power Module Options

Internal Fuse
Part Number Description Voltage Range Power Consumption Wiring Interface
Size

Full-Width ICON Power Modules


SEL-8011-01 High voltage ac 120240 V 102264 Vac, 3.15 Amp 95 W max IEC C6 Plug
50/60 Hz (33.7 I2t)
SEL-8011-02 High voltage ac/dc 120240 V 102264 Vac, 3.15 Amp 95 W max Terminal Block
50/60 Hz (33.7 I2t)
88300 Vdc
SEL-8011-03 Medium voltage dc 2448 V 1856 Vdc 6.3 Amp 95 W max Terminal Block
(171 I2t)
ICON Cube Power Modules
SEL-8010-01 High voltage ac 120240 V 102264 Vac, 2.5 Amp 65 W max IEC C6 Plug
50/60 Hz (7.5 I2t)
SEL-8010-02 High voltage ac/dc 120240 V 102264 Vac, 2.5 Amp 65 W max Terminal Block
50/60 Hz (7.5 I2t)
88300 Vdc

Power Module LED The ICON power modules have two LED indicators, as shown in Figure 2.4
that provide indication of the power modules status. Table 2.3 provides a
Descriptions description of the LEDs and a description of each color state.

5 V Status

48 V Status

Figure 2.4 Power Module

Table 2.3 Power Module LED Status (Sheet 1 of 2)

LED Status Description

5 V Status LED (All Power Modules)


Steady green Enabled and no errors
Steady red Alarm, 5 V supply is out of regulation
Dark No power to 5 V bus, no power to input
48 V Status LED (SEL-8011-01, -02, -03 Modules)
Steady green Enabled and no errors
Steady red Alarm, 48 V supply is out of regulation
Dark No power to 5 V bus, no power to input

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Physical Platforms 2.5
Environmental Requirements

Table 2.3 Power Module LED Status (Sheet 2 of 2)

LED Status Description

48 V Status LED (SEL-8010-01, -02 Modules)


Steady green Enabled and no errors
Dark No power to 48V bus, no power to input

Power Supply Wiring The front view of the Power Module lists incoming power requirements, as
shown in Figure 2.5. The Power Module with terminal blocks are marked with
and Fusing (+/H) and (/N), and must connect to 125/250 Vdc with the proper polarity, or
to 120/240 Vac. The power terminals are isolated from the chassis ground.
Use 1614 AWG (1.52.5 mm2) wire with a strip length of 8 mm to connect to
the power and ground terminals. For the power modules that use an IEC C6
plug, use an IEC C6 line cord.

Power Requirement

Figure 2.5 Power Requirement Markings

Table 2.4 Terminal Block/Power Supply Connections

Label Description

GND Ground
/N Negative or neutral terminal
+/H Positive or hot (line terminal)

For compliance with IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-3, place a suitable external
switch or circuit breaker in the power leads for the ICON. This device should
interrupt both the hot (+/H) and neutral (/N) power leads. The maximum
current rating for the power disconnect circuit breaker or option overcurrent
device (fuse) should be equal to or greater than the internal fuse size listed in
Table 2.2.

Environmental Requirements
Table 2.5 Operating Requirements

Operating Temperature: 20 to +65C (4 to +149F) ambient


Storage Temperature: 40 to +85C (40 to +185F)
Relative Humidity: 595%, noncondensing
Pollution Environment
Pollution Degree: 2
Maximum Altitude: 2000 m
Atmospheric Pressure: 80 ... 110 kPa

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


2.6 Physical Platforms
Full-Width Chassis Mounting Options

Full-Width Chassis Mounting Options


To meet environmental specifications, it is necessary to provide ventilation
spaces above and below the ICON chassis. A minimum separation of 1 U
(1.75 inches or 4.445 cm) between adjacent equipment is required.

19-Inch Rack The ICON ships from the factory with the mounting brackets attached so that
the cable-access side is facing the front of the rack.
Mounting
If so desired, the mounting brackets can be flipped so that the cable-access
side is rear facing, with the HMI side facing the front of the rack.

Midplane Bracket Kit The optional Midplane Bracket Kit With 23-Inch Rack Mounting Extension,
SEL Part Number 915900276, contains brackets and instructions for both
midplane and 23-inch rack mount options.

Midplane Mounting
Use the midplane mounting bracket kit to replace the existing rack mount
brackets with midplane mounting brackets as shown in Figure 2.6.
Detailed instructions are included with the midplane mounting bracket kit and
are also available on the ICON product page of the SEL website.

Midplane Mounting
Bracket

Figure 2.6 Midplane Mounting Bracket

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Physical Platforms 2.7
Access Module and Submodule Slot Assignments

23-Inch Rack Mounting


The 23-inch rack mount extension attaches to the midplane mounting bracket,
as shown in Figure 2.7. Detailed instructions are included with the midplane
mounting bracket kit and are also available on the ICON product page of the
SEL website.

Optional 23 rack
mounting extension
Figure 2.7 23-Inch Rack-Mount Extension

Access Module and Submodule Slot Assignments


Access module slots are the physical locations for the various accessory drop
interfaces chosen by the user. The ICON supports two hardware form factor
configurations for access modules: full-height modules and the Quattro
Module, shown in the access module slots in Figure 2.9 and Figure 2.10. Use
the Quattro Module adaptor to divide full-height access module slots into four
parts called submodule slots. The Quattro Module concept allows more
efficient use of an access module slot. For example, if only one voice or data
circuit is necessary, you can use a small quattro Async submodule in one
submodule slot, and use the other three submodule slots for other types of
interfaces. All submodules occupy one quattro slot, except the DS1 Async and
DS1 Sync submodules, which each occupy two quattro slots.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


2.8 Physical Platforms
Access Module and Submodule Slot Assignments

Figure 2.8 Quattro Module With Access Submodule Slots

Each ICON comes from the SEL manufacturing facility configured with all
access modules and submodules pre-installed. In the event of an access
module or submodule being added in the field, refer to Table 2.6 for the
required slot location and any restrictions. All modules and submodules are
hot swappable.

Table 2.6 Module and Submodule Slot Assignments

Module Full-Width ICON Chassis ICON Cube Chassis

SEL-8020-01 Line Module or SEL 8021-01 Protected Line Module Slots 1 and 2 Slots 1 and 2
SEL-8030-01 Server Module Slot 3 Slot 3
SEL-8035-01 Ethernet Access Module Slots 4 or 5 Slot 4 or 5
SEL-8041-01Transfer Trip Access Module Slots 410 Slot 4 or 5
Quattro Module Slots 410 Slot 4 or 5
SEL-8051-01 Nx64F Submodule
SEL-8053-01 Async Data Submodule
SEL-8065-01 4-Wire Submodule
SEL-8066-01 FXS VF Submodule
SEL-8067-01 FXO VF Submodule
SEL-8057-01 DS1 Async Submodule
SEL-8057-02 DS1 Sync Submodule
SEL-8029-01 Crypto Module Slots 49a Not supported
SEL-8011/SEL-8010 Power Modules Slots 11 and 12 Slot 6 (half slot)
a SEL recommends that the Crypto Module be placed in Slot 9. The ICON must have three empty slots when using the Crypto Module.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Physical Platforms 2.9
Installing and Removing ICON Modules

Slot 1 and 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Slot 9 Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 12
Figure 2.9 Full-Width ICON Chassis Slot Assignments

Slots 1 and 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6


Figure 2.10 ICON Cube Chassis Slot Assignments

Installing and Removing ICON Modules


When ICON nodes are shipped from SEL, the modules are preinstalled using
the proper torque on the module retention screws. ICON modules are hot-
swappable to allow module replacement, additions, or reconfigurations
without affecting service. The connections between the line modules and the
ICON chassis backplane are made through high density make before break
connectors which can require more effort to remove and/or install the
modules.
It is very important that, once physically inserted, the modules two knurled
screws be fully engaged to ensure the module is mated properly to the chassis
backplane connectors. If the modules are not installed correctly, the ICON
could experience internal errors, causing alarms or communication
difficulties. Do not depend solely on the physical insertion of the module. Use
a screwdriver to fasten the module firmly, but do not overtighten the screws, as
this may cause damage. You will feel a definite point where the screw is fully
tightened. Do not go any further.
Likewise, to remove a module, unscrew the knurled screws fully until you feel
they are no longer engaged. These screws are part of the module ejection
system. Remove the module by pulling both screws toward yourself.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


2.10 Physical Platforms
Installing and Removing ICON Modules

Note also that if you experience alarms or difficulties that are the result of
improper module installation (as reported on SEL-5051 Network
Management System (NMS) Software) the actual location of the problem may
be anywhere on your network. It is a recommended best practice to inspect all
modules on all nodes for proper installation before ruling out any other system
issues.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Section 3
Line Module
Part Number 8020-01

Introduction
General The Line Module provides the Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) link
between adjacent SEL Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON)
nodes. It has a built-in cross-connect, with virtual tributary (VT) and
synchronous transport signal level 1 (STS-1) granularity, capable of
supporting as many as four line ports (A, B, C, and D). The line ports support
SONET OC-48. Various optical small form-factor pluggable (SFPs) are
available for the line ports, depending on distance requirements.
On the drop side, the Line Module has an integrated switch capable of
supporting eight 10/100 Mbps Ethernet copper ports and two SFP optical
Ethernet ports at 1000 Mbps for local or wide-area network applications. Four
of the copper Ethernet ports can supply power in network cabling to remote
devices in support of Power over Ethernet (PoE) capability. The Line Module
also has two BNC connectors for IRIG-B output time distribution.

Network Topologies The Line Module supports the following topologies:


Point-to-point: where one node connects directly to another
node
Linear: where nodes are arranged in a line to allow traffic to be
added or dropped along the way
Ring: where each node connects to exactly two other nodes,
forming a circular pathway for traffic in a closed loop
configuration
Single Tie interconnected rings: where one node touches two
separate rings and has an internal cross-connect with VT and
STS granularity to allow traffic to flow between the two rings
Dual Tie interconnected rings: where each ring has two
independent access points for interconnection between the
rings. This architecture uses two sites in each ring as tie points
for traffic flow. The main advantage is to provide an alternate
traffic path in the event of a fiber or node failure in either
interconnection.

SONET The Line Module supports as many as four SONET line ports (A, B, C, and D)
and uses SFP fiber-optic transceivers. The Line Module uses unidirectional
path switched ring (UPSR) technology with path direction selection and
switch on yellow to eliminate asymmetrical delays. The Line Module has an
internal cross-connect with VT and STS-1 granularity for inter-ring traffic
among ports. To minimize latency added by packet queues and to provide
traffic isolation for Ethernet transport, you can divide the SONET payload into

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.2 Line Module
Introduction

pipes and use these pipes as dedicated paths. You can create single VT1.5,
STS-1, or STS-3c pipes, or form pipes into VCAT VT1.5, STS-1, or STS-3c
groups. This technology provides guaranteed bandwidth and support for
various application priorities.
The Line Module supports internal, line, or external timing and
synchronization status messaging (SSM). You can configure nodes for
internal, line, or local GPS Stratum 1 timing. Network management is carried
in VTs 1528 of STS-1 #12 (STS #4,3). The Line Module monitors fiber-optic
receive level and transmit current level for proper performance and uses the
B1, B2, and B3 bytes for error monitoring. Built-in test capabilities include
the following:
Forced AIS XMT and RCV
NOTE: When upgrading an SFP or
inserting for the first time, the correct Line/local loopback
procedure is to insert the SFP(s) into
the Line Module and accept it/them Section tracing
before inserting the fiber(s) into the
SFP(s). PRBS/test bytes

The SONET SFP fiber-optic specifications are listed in Table 1.2 and
Table 1.4.

Ethernet
LAN Ports
On the drop side, the Line Module has an integrated switch capable of
supporting as many as eight 10/100 Mbps RJ45 copper ports and two
1000 Mbps optical SFP ports for local Ethernet traffic. The switch has the
ability to provide time distribution to IEDs via IEEE C37.238 (1588 v2 Power
Profile); however, this functionality is not supported in the current software
release.
Although there are a total of six SFP sockets on the Line Module, it will
support no more than four SFPs simultaneously. The allocation of available
SFP slots is determined by whether valid Gigabit Ethernet (GigE) SFPs are
installed in slot port E and/or F.
Option 1: No GigE SFPs are installed in Slot E or Slot F. SFP-A, B, C, D
can be used for SONET line port applications.
Option 2: GigE SFPs are installed in Slot E or Slot F. SFP-A, B can be
used for SONET line applications. SFP-E, F can be used for GigE
Ethernet drop applications.
NOTE: The SFPs for the SONET line Features supported on copper Ethernet ports include the following:
side and the 1000 Mbs Ethernet drop
side are not interchangeable.
Port enabling and disabling
Auto-negotiation (bit rate and duplex mode)
Auto-MDIX (crossover cables not required)
Power over Ethernet (as many as four ports)IEEE 802.3af
compliant
The SEL ICON system uses SONET to transport Ethernet traffic from the
integrated switch between nodes. Bandwidth assigned to the Ethernet
transport can be in VT, STS, or STS-3c increments. Because each of these
containers has overhead bytes, the effective Ethernet throughput can vary
depending on the SONET payload allocation and packet size. Appendix F:

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.3
Introduction

Effective Ethernet Throughput gives detailed information on the effective


Ethernet throughput for 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, and 1000BASE-LX/SX
services using different SONET bandwidth resource allocations.

Ethernet Features
For security purposes, interruption of a ports LINK status is monitored and an
alarm notification to the NMS is issued (Loss of Link if the port is enabled,
Connection to Disabled Port if the port is disabled). The switch supports
eight (8) priority queues, and VLAN filtering per port. MAC address table
functions include the following:
Content-addressable RAM (no hashing collisions)
Aging Field
Learn and Ageuser-configurable aging time-out
Count Locklock MAC address table after reaching a user-
configurable number of MAC addresses
Lockedmanual port lock (stop learning) by user. Alarm
generated for subsequent new MACs received.
The switch supports the following VLAN capabilities:
Port-based VLANs
802.1Q VLANs
Nested VLANs (802.1Q VLANs in Port Group LANs)

The switch supports the following standards:

802.1d Ethernet bridge


802.1Q VLAN tagging, priority queues
802.3i 10BASE-T (RJ45 Cu)
802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE)
802.3u 100BASE-TX (RJ45 Cu)
802.3z 1000BASE-LX/ZX/BX
DSCP DiffServ to 802.1Q priority mapping

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.4 Line Module
Installation

Installation

Figure 3.1 Line Module 8020-01

The Line Module can only be installed in chassis slots 1 and 2. All modules in
the ICON are hot swappable, which means that the modules can be removed
and/or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should the Line Module fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a
like Line Module. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new module and
transfer the existing settings onto the new Line Module. When the Line
Module is programmed and in service, the status LED will turn from slow
blinking blue to green.
If your replacement Line Module has a lower revision of firmware from the
one currently installed, see Line Module Replacement.

Indicators
Table 3.1 Module Status Indicator LED (Sheet 1 of 2)

Precedence Status LED Module Condition Details

0a Steady red Board dead Server Module asserts this condition when board is unre-
sponsive
1 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is initializing the module
2 Alternating red/blue (1)b FPGA load error The selected FPGA image is corrupted or missing
3 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting The module is ready and waiting for the Server Module
4 Double flashing yellow (4)b Disabled The Server Module has set the operational state to disabled

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.5
Installation

Table 3.1 Module Status Indicator LED (Sheet 2 of 2)

Precedence Status LED Module Condition Details

5 Flashing green (1)b Configuration Line Module is loading configuration settings prior to
going on line
6 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, VCXO, or temperature out of range
7 Flashing red (4)b Boot error The bootloader cannot find a good image to boot
8 Steady blue Test mode Any interface is in a test mode
9 Steady green Normal The module is enabled and okay
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

Table 3.2 Line Port LED

Precedence Line Port LED State Line Port Condition Details

0a Dark Disabled Port disabled


1 Alternate red/green (2)b SFP error SFP type mismatch, invalid license, or no data
from SFP
2 Steady red SONET line error AIS-L, LOS, LOF, OOF;
CV-S or CV-L > threshold, or SFP missing
3 Flashing red (1)b SONET Path error Path or AIS-VT or LOP;
CV-P or CV-VT > threshold
4 Steady yellow Far-end failure on SONET line Line RDI-L
5 Flashing yellow (1)b Far-end failure on SONET path Path RDI-VT
6 Steady green OkayNon-SSM timing source Internal/headend timing
7 Flashing green (1)b OkaySSM timing source Line timing
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

Table 3.3 Ethernet Port LED

Precedence Ethernet Port LED State Ethernet Port Condition Details

0a Dark Link down


1 Alternating red/green SFP type mismatch, invalid Relevant to GigE only
license, unknown type
2 Double-flashing red Link up, but port is disabled
3 Steady red Security violation Bad PVID on egress
4 Flashing red (1)b Ethernet problem Ingress CRC error
5 Steady green, flashing Remote fault indication Relevant to GigE only
yellow
6 Flashing green (4)b Link up, line active Data in/out
7 Steady green Link up, line idle No activity
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

Table 3.4 PoE LED (Sheet 1 of 2)

Precedence PoE LED State PoE Status Details

0a Dark Idle Link down, no connection, or device not using


PoE
1 Double-flashing red Disabled PoE device detected, but PoE disabled on port

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.6 Line Module
Specifications

Table 3.4 PoE LED (Sheet 2 of 2)

Precedence PoE LED State PoE Status Details

2 Red Fault Port cannot supply PoE (mismatch, overload)


3 Green Powered Link up, port supplying PoE
a Precedence level 0 is highest.

Table 3.5 IRIG-B OUT LED

Precedence Ethernet IRIG-B LED State Ethernet IRIG-B Condition Details

0a Dark IRIG-B port is disabled


1 Steady red Time source is unavailable
2 Flashing red (1)b Time in holdover Inaccuracy is > 1 sec (IRIG-B quality > 4)
3 Flashing green (1)b Time in holdover Inaccuracy is < 1 sec (IRIG-B quality 4)
4 Steady green Time is locked to UTC Inaccuracy is < 1 sec
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption Typically 12 W
Chassis Space Requirements Module slots 1 and 2 only
Line Ports SFPs with LC connector
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Drop Interface RJ45
1000 Mbps Ethernet Drop Interface SFPs with LC connector
IRIG-B Outputs BNC

Settings and Status


Synchronization
Status Messaging
(SSM)
Setting/Status Option Notes

Quality Version There are two different generations of SSM timing:


Generation 1 with quality levels 1 to 7
Generation 2 with quality levels 1 to 9
Quality Level 1 is the best for either generation. Generation 2 supports the addition of
Stratum 3E and Transit Node Clock (TNC) QL levels.
Generation 1 Generation 1 is the default setting in the SEL ICON
Generation 2 Generation 2 supports the addition of Stratum 3E and TNC
Synch Source Displays the source to which the Line Module is currently locked
lineA Line Port A

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.7
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

lineB Line Port B


lineC Line Port C
lineD Line Port D
Internal Clock Internal Stratum 3 oscillator on Line Module
Server Module When locked to GPS through Server Module (Stratum 1)produces SSM
Holdover Enforced during loss of clock from Server Module. Currently not implemented. A loss
of clock will fall back to InternalCLK source.
SSM Preset
Line A/Ba Use for a typical through timed node
Line A/B, Server Use for a secondary GPS timed node
Modulea
Server Module, Use for a primary GPS timed node
Line A/Ba
Line A/B/C/D Use for through timed node with spur or dual-ring interconnect
Line A/B/C/D, Use for secondary GPS timed node with spur or dual-ring interconnect
Server Module
Server Module, Use for primary GPS timed node with spur or dual-ring interconnect
Line A/B/C/D
a This option is available when SONET ports C/D are disabled (GigE ports E/F are enabled).

Line AD, Internal Clock, and Server

Setting/Status Option Notes

Enable This Timing Enable/Disable Turns the effective timing source on or off
Source
Priority Priority of SSM Source. It can vary between 0 to 6. The larger the number, the lower the
priority. No two inputs can have the same priority.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.8 Line Module
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

SSM In Synchronization status messaging values with the associated quality level from
Generation 1 and 2 indicated beside the description for each value

SSM
Gen#1 Description Gen#2 Description
Value

0 2 - Quality Unknown 2 - Quality Unknown


1 1 - Stratum 1 1 - Stratum 1
2 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
3 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
4 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 4 - Transit Node Clock
5 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
6 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
7 3 - Stratum 2 3 - Stratum 2
8 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
9 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
10 4 - Stratum 3 6 - Stratum 3
11 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
12 5 - SONET Minimum Clock 7 - SONET Minimum Clock
13 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 5 - Stratum 3E
14 6 - Reserved for Network Synchro- 8 - Reserved for Network Synchroni-
nization zation
15 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization

Quality Level In Generation 1 quality levels: 1 to 7


Generation 2 quality levels: 1 to 9
Force Input Provides quality level of the input
0No Override: The input signal quality level is based on the incoming SSM bits.
(a) When ICON is configured for Generation 1:
1 to 7Equivalent to Generation 1 quality levels (1 to 7)
(b) When ICON is configured for Generation 2:
1 to 9Equivalent to Generation 2 quality levels (1 to 9)
(1 means best quality; quality decreases as the value increases)
A value of 7 (for Generation 1) or 9 (for Generation 2) means that the source will not be
used for synchronization

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.9
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

SSM Out Synchronization status messaging values with the associated quality level from
Generation 1 and 2 indicated beside the description for each value

SSM
Gen#1 Description Gen#2 Description
Value

0 2 - Quality Unknown 2 - Quality Unknown


1 1 - Stratum 1 1 - Stratum 1
2 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
3 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
4 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 4 - Transit Node Clock
5 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
6 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
7 3 - Stratum 2 3 - Stratum 2
8 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
9 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
10 4 - Stratum 3 6 - Stratum 3
11 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
12 5 - SONET Minimum Clock 7 - SONET Minimum Clock
13 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 5 - Stratum 3E
14 6 - Reserved for Network Synchroni- 8 - Reserved for Network Synchroni-
zation zation
15 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization

Quality Level Out Generation 1 quality levels: 1 to 7


Generation 2 quality levels: 1 to 9
Force Output Forces the output SSM to the selected value if the source SSM has a better quality level
and is chosen as the timing source.
0No Override: The output signal quality level is based on the outgoing SSM bits
(a) When ICON is configured for Generation 1:
1 to 7Equivalent to Generation 1 quality levels (1 to 7)
(b) When ICON is configured for Generation 2:
1 to 9Equivalent to Generation 2 quality levels (1 to 9)
(1 means best quality; quality decreases as the value increases)
A value of 7 (for Generation 1) or 9 (for Generation 2) means that the source will not be
used for synchronization.
Frequency Offset Frequency offset in local crystal in parts per million (PPM). This value is only valid for
line sources.

Ethernet Dual Ring


Interconnect (DRI)
Settings
Setting Option Notes

Port Pair Topology Specify the topology of the network


Dual Ring

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.10 Line Module
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Linear on A/B,
Ring on C/D
Ring on A/B,
Linear on C/D
Dual Linear
Tie Node
Disabled
Single
Primary
Backup
Node
None Single tie mode, no primary or backup node designation
Node Alias Based on primary or backup setting choice in Tie Node field designate primary or
backup node alias or IP address

Ports

Setting Option Notes

Port Configuration Line Module has detected and will support the displayed SFPs for operation
Reconfigure Reset the above configuration based on the currently installed SFPs

NOTE: The Line Module will be out of Detection and acceptance of installed SFPs occurs when the Reconfigure
service during the SFP reconfigure
process. button on the Ports menu is selected. It may take up to 10 seconds before the
Line Module reboots to load the new SFPs as indicated by the flashing blue
module LED.

Port AD Settings

Port C and Port D are shown in the settings tree only if the Line Module is not
configured to use GigE ports E and F.

Setting/Status Option Notes

Port Alias User-assigned name for the port


Port Enabled Turn the port on or off
Down Off
Up On
Port Status
Disabled

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.11
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

SFP Error
SONET Line Error
SONET Path Error
FEFI on SONET Line
FEFI on SONET Path
OK - Non-SSM Timing
Source
OK - SSM Timing
Source

Ethernet Settings
Common Settings
NOTE: As mentioned in LAN Ports, The following settings are common to both the 10/100 RJ45 and GigE SFP
the Line Module can either support
four SONET connections on ports A, B, drop ports.
C, and D with no GigE support, or two
SONET connections (A/B) and one or
two GigE ports on E and F.

Port Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Port Configuration Ports A/B OC-48, Present fiber-optic configuration


Ports C/D OC-48
Ports A/B OC-48,
Ports E/F E1000
Reconfigure Reconfigure fiber-optic ports to support the presently inserted SFPs.

To show and configure Gigabit Ethernet ports, you must first place the GigE
SFP into Port E or Port F of the Line Module. With the GigE SFP in the Line
Module, click Ports and reset the firmware image to accept the SFP. Once
accepted, proceed to Ethernet Settings. Port E and Port F will appear. Click
on Port E or Port F to configure the port. The Line Module will reboot during
FPGA reconfiguration reset.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.12 Line Module
Settings and Status

DSCP Configuration

Setting Option Notes

DSCP Value n 07 (Priority) Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)


When the DSCP mapping setting is set to enable, the QoS setting in the DSCP bits of the IP packet
entering the switch is used to set the QoS of that message. The DSCP value setting is used to map
the DSCP values to the eight QoS priority settings of the ICON. When a Line Module is reset, the
DSCP values are set to default values. (DSCP 07 set to priority 0, DSCP 815 to priority 1, etc.)
Priority 7 is the highest.

Port Group to EPipe Mapping

This setting maps Ethernet port groups to EPipes.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.13
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Port Groups 14095 0, 216 and 3348 Defines the EPipe number that is mapped to a specific port group
0: Port group not used
1: Reserved for NMS
216 and 3348: Available for general use

NOTE: For the special case of


Ingress Packets with VID = 0 and
the Filter Table set to Block mode, it
will be necessary to repeat a non-
zero block value VID into all 32 cells
in order to allow VID = 0 to ingress.

Setting Option Notes

Cells 132 04095 Enter the VLAN number(s) to be blocked or allowed. System forces VLAN numbers to
be unique. Enter a zero (0) to remove a VLAN entry. See note above on special case of
VID = 0 in Blocking mode.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.14 Line Module
Settings and Status

The Statistics screen shows counts of ingress and egress Ethernet frames.
Reset clears the Ethernet frame and Diffserv statistics for the given drop port.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.15
Settings and Status

The DSCP Counters screen shows counts of frames mapped from a Diffserv
code point (063) to a switch priority (07).

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.16 Line Module
Settings and Status

Copper RJ45 Drop Port Configuration Settings

Setting/Status Option Notes

Ports 18
Port Alias User-assigned name for the port
Port State Current operational state of this port
Link Down
Disabled Port Link
Attempt
Alarm
Ethernet CRC
Errors
Port Active
Port Idle
Port Enabled Turning the port on or off
Up On (Alarm will be generated if a link down condition is detected)
Down Off (Alarm will be generated if a link up condition is detected)

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.17
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

Link Status Status up or down


Up
Down
MDI/MDIX Crossover This port can be configured to autodetect crossover or can be manually set
Reverse
Forward
Auto Detect
MDI/MDIX Crossover Status of MDI/MDIX
Status
Auto Negotiate Enable/Disable Autonegotiate for speed
Speed Hard set the port for 10 or 100 Mbps
10
100
Speed Status Status of the speed of the port in Mbps
10
100
Duplex Status Full Always full duplex
PoE Modea Power over Ethernet configuration
Disabled
Class 1 (4000 mW) Class 1 range of power, 4000 mW
Class 2 (7000 mW) Class 2 range of power, 7000 mW
Class 3 (15400 mW) Class 3 range of power, 15400 mW
PoE Classa Indicates what power class the connected device achieved after PoE negotiation
with this port
No Power No power being sourced from port
Class 1 (4000 mW) Class 1 range of power being sourced, up to 4000 mW
Class 2 (7000 mW) Class 2 range of power being sourced, 40007000 mW
Class 3 (15400 mW) Class 3 range of power being sourced, 700015400 mW
Unknown Power class of device cannot be determined
PoE Powera milliwatts Displays power in mW being sourced from port to device
PoE Statea Idle No PoE device connected
Disabled PoE disabled from port and PoE device connected
Fault Fault detected in PoE connection
Powered PoE device connected and being powered by port
Startup The port is powering up
Port Group 14095 The port group to which the port is assigned. The default is Port Group 1.
Ingress VLAN Filtering
Disable Disable Ingress VLAN filtering
Enabled-Block Block listed VLANs
Enabled-Allow Enable listed VLANs
Force Ingress Priority True/False Force default ingress priority optionreference 802.1Q
Forced Priority 07 802.1Q priority of the port. The higher the number, the higher the priority.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.18 Line Module
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

Force Ingress VID True/False Force overwrite ingress VID optionreference 802.1Q
Forced VID 14094 If Force Ingress VID is true, use this value for all ingressing packets. An outer-
most IEEE 802.1Q LAN Identifier will be overwritten.
Ingress DSCP Mapping Enables differentiated services for QoS management of Ethernet traffic
Disabled DSCP disabled
Enabled DSCP enabled
Egress QTAG Stripping Supports removal of 802.1Q VLAN tags from Ethernet frames on egress from
switch
Disabled VLAN tags are left untouched
Auto Enable VLAN tags are removed if added by ICON on ingress
Always Enabled VLAN tags are removed on egress
Learn Mode Mode in which the drop port learns MAC addresses. Port security.
Aging New entries are learned and aged out
Count Lock Lock after learn limit reached, no aging
Locked Port is locked, no aging
Port Aging 1 to 1440 Port aging in minutes. It can vary from 1 minute to 1 day (1440 mins).
Learn Limit 0 to 4095 Number of entries that can be learned for this port when Learn Mode is set to
Count Lock. Alarm is generated if any new entries are detected above the Count
Lock limit.
a PoE settings are applicable only for ports 14.

The ingress QTAG processing shown in the Copper RJ45 Drop Port
Configuration Settings figure is summarized in Table 3.6. ( means
condition result is No, N/A means condition result may be either Yes or
No).

Table 3.6 Ingress QTAG Processing

Ingress Frame Settings Ingress QTAG Processing

QTAG Force DSCP Modify Outermost Modify Outermost


Force VID? Add QTAG
Present? Priority? Mapping? PCP VID


Y Y 2 Forced VID
Y Y QoS for DSCP 1
Y Y Y QoS for DSCP Forced VID
Y N/A Y Forced Priority 1
Y N/A Y Y Forced Priority Forced VID
Y
Y Y Forced VID
Y Y Y QoS for DSCP Copy ingress QTAG
Y Y Y Y QoS for DSCP Forced VID
Y Y N/A Forced Priority
Y Y N/A Y Forced Priority Forced VID

An Ethernet frame which passes through the ICON network can have a QTAG
added or removed as shown in Table 3.7.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.19
Settings and Status

Table 3.7 QTAG Stripping

Egress QTAG Stripping


Ingress Frame
Disabled Auto Enable Always Enabled

No QTAG, no force options, no DSCP mapping


No QTAG, force priority, force VID, or DSCP mapping Added
QTAG, no force options, length 68 octets Removed
QTAG, no force options, length < 68 octets
QTAG, force priority or VID, length 68 octets Removed
QTAG, force priority or VID, length < 68 octets
QTAG, DSCP mapping (no force priority) Added

GigE Drop Port Configuration Settings

Setting/Status Option Notes

Ports E/F
Port Alias User-assigned name for the port (maximum 64 characters)
Port State Current operational state of this port
Link Down
Invalid SFP
Disabled Port
Link Attempt
Alarm
Ethernet CRC
Errors

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.20 Line Module
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

Remote Fault
Indication
Port Active
Port Idle
Port Enabled Turning the port on or off
Up On
Down Off
Link Status Status up or down
Up
Down
Remote Fault Indi- Indicates the received Remote Fault Indication (IEEE 802.3-2012 Table 37-3) from the
cation far-end connected device
Line Ok
Offline
Link Failure
Autonegotiation
Error
Auto Negotiate Enable/Disable Enable/disable 1000BASE-X Remote Fault support per IEEE 802.3
Speed Status 1000 Status of the speed of port in Mbps
Unknown Speed is unknown
Port Group 14095 The port group to which the port is assigned. The default is Port Group 1.
Ingress VLAN
Filtering
Disable Disable Ingress VLAN filtering
Enabled-Block Block listed VLANs
Enabled-Allow Enable listed VLANs
Force Ingress Prior- True/False Force default ingress priority optionreference 802.1Q
ity
Forced Priority 07 802.1Q priority of the port. The higher the number, the higher the priority.
Force Ingress VID True/False Force overwrite ingress VID optionreference 802.1Q
Forced VID 14094 If Force Ingress VID is true, use this value for all ingressing packets. An outermost
IEEE 802.1Q LAN Identifier will be overwritten.
Ingress DSCP Map- Enables differentiated services for QoS management of Ethernet traffic
ping
Disabled DSCP disabled
Enabled DSCP enabled
Egress QTAG Strip- Supports removal of 802.1Q VLAN tags from Ethernet frames on egress from switch
ping
Disabled VLAN tags are left untouched
Auto Enable Outermost VLAN tag is removed if added by ICON on ingress
Always Enabled Outermost VLAN tag is removed on egress
Learn Mode Mode in which the drop port learns MAC addresses. Port security.
Aging New entries are learned and aged out
Count Lock Lock after learn limit reached, no aging
Locked Port is locked, no aging

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.21
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

Port Aging 1 to 1440 Port aging in minutes. It can vary from 1 minute to 1 day (1440 mins).
Learn Limit 0 to 4095 Number of entries that can be learned for this port when Learn Mode is set to Count
Lock. Alarm is generated if any new entries are detected above the Count Lock limit.

TOH Bytes
Configuration

Setting Option Notes

e1C1e2C1
Unassigned This setting means that the network is not using the TOH byte associated with the setting
Time Stamp This setting assigns the one TOH byte needed to carry the distributed time signal (UTC,
IRIG-B, etc.) around the network. The default setting is TOH byte e1C1.
Link Monitor This setting assigns the TOH byte to the link monitor function. The link monitor is used to
monitor the health of the network ring. Default setting for an OC-48 is dcc1C1 to dcc8C1.
For the fastest recovery rate time, use as many bytes as are available.

Nodes Minimum Number of TOH Bytes

14 1
58 2
912 3
...
6164 16

Terminate

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.22 Line Module
Settings and Status

Link Monitor

Link Monitor provides statistics on the SONET link.

Monitor Point Option Notes

Link Up True/False Indicates whether SONET link is established


CRC Error Count Measured number of CRC errors
Abort Count Measured number of aborts
Receive Frames Pass- Measured number of received pass through frames
Through Count
Received Frames Termi- Count of received frames terminated at this node
nated Count
Number of Nodes Number of nodes in network
Good Tie True/False Indicator of node tie state
Reset Statistics Reset link monitor counters

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.23
Settings and Status

EPipe Statistics

EPipe statistics provides statistics on the EPipe traffic and Ethernet switch
queue.

Monitor Point Option Notes

Code Header Error Count Measured code header errors


Type Header Error Count Measured type header errors
Extension Header Error Measured extension header errors
Count
GFP-F Count Counts the number of GFP-F frames received
GFP Status Indicates status of GFP
Hunt
Presync
Idle Locked, no data
Receiving Receiving generic framing procedure data frame
Link Down Link status, indicates if there is a link break in the ring
True Link is down
False Link is up
Receive Frames Passed Count of received frames pass through node
Through
Receive Frames Terminated Count of received frames terminated at node

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.24 Line Module
Settings and Status

IRIG-B Settings

Setting Option Notes

Parity Standard/Inverted Sets the parity for the IRIG-B output message (default is Standard)
Time Zone UCT hh:mm The offset applied to the UTC time to generate local time. This is set in plus or minus
half-hour increments.
Use DST True/False Enables daylight-saving time. Default reset state is DST with adjustment enabled from
2 AM on the second Sunday of March to 2 AM on the first Sunday of November.
On Month Month Sets the month to apply the daylight-saving time shift
On Day Day of Week Sets the day of the week to apply the daylight-saving time shift (+ 1 hr)
On Week Week of Month Sets the week of the month to apply the daylight-saving time shift (+ 1 hr)
On Hour 024 Sets the hour of the day to apply the daylight-saving time shift (+ 1 hr)
Off Month Month Sets the month to turn off the daylight-saving time shift (1 hr)
Off Day Day of Week Sets the day of week to turn off the daylight-saving time shift (1 hr)
Off Week Week of Month Sets the week of the month to turn off the daylight-saving time shift (1 hr)
Off Hour 024 Sets the hour of the day to turn off the daylight-saving time shift (1 hr)
Port X Signal Off, IRIG-B UTC, Sets the format of the time signal on BNC connector X
Formata IRIG-B Local, PPS
Port Y Signal Off, IRIG-B UTC, Sets the format of the time signal on BNC connector Y
Formata IRIG-B Local, PPS
a Both IRIG-B Ports X and Y will be inactive (i.e., no output and red IRIG-B LED on Line Module or Protected Line Module) unless a valid
synchronized and consistent clock source is present.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.25
Monitor

Monitor
Module Status

Monitor Point and


Units Notes
Settings

Module State Indicates state of the module


Offline Module has been disabled by the Server Module (8030-01)
Alarm Module has one or more active alarms
Active Backplane Module has an active backplane alarm
Alarm
Test Module is in test mode
Good Module is running normally without any other conditions
Module Temperature C Measured temperature of module
FPGA Temperature C Measured temperature of FPGA
3.3 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 3.3 V supply rail
2.5 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 2.5 V supply rail
1.8 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 1.8 V supply rail
1.5 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 1.5 V supply rail

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.26 Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point and


Units Notes
Settings

1.2 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 1.2 V supply rail


0.9 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 0.9 V supply rail
VCXO311 Voltage V Measured voltage of VCXO 311
VCXO125 Voltage V Measured voltage of VCXO 125
Current A Measured module supply current
Module Status A check mark in the box next to the status field indicates the status is currently in
alarm
Low Module
Temperature
High Module
Temperature
High FPGA
Temperature
3.3 V
2.5 V
1.8 V
1.5 V
1.2 V
0.9 V
Volt VCXO 311
Volt VCXO 125
Alert Current
Alert SEU
LED Test Enable/Disable Enables or disables module LEDs

Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP)

Setting/Status Option Notes

Vendor Displays the SFP Vendor. Note that only SEL SFPs are compatible with the ICON.
Part Number Displays the part number of the installed SFP
Serial Number Displays the serial number of the installed SFP
Wavelength nm Displays the wavelength of the installed SFP
Rated Distance km Displays the rated maximum distance for the installed SFP

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.27
Monitor

Setting/Status Option Notes

Low Power Alert Off, 35 dBm to Sets the receive level at which an alert (minor alarm) is raised
Threshold 10 dBm
Low Power Alarm Off, 35 dBm to Sets the receive level at which an alarm (major alarm) is raised
Threshold 10 dBm
Temperature C Displays the current operating temperature of the SFP
Transmit Power dBm SFP transmitted laser power
Receive Power dBm SFP measured receive level
Transmit Laser mA The current being drawn to drive the laser in the SFP
Current
Voltage mV The voltage applied to the SFP from the Line Module. Normal operating range is 3000
to 3600 mV.

Synchronous
Transport Signal (STS)

Setting/Status Option Notes

Bandwidtha Defines how the STS bandwidth is allocated in the OC-48 payload
STS1 Single STS at 51.84 Mbps signal to be carried in the OC-48 payload
STS3c Three STSs combined into one 155.52 Mbps signal to be carried in the OC-48 payload
STS12c Twelve STSs combined into one 622.08 Mbps signal to be carried in the OC-48 payload
Structure Displays the structure of the STS
VT Structured Breaks the STS into 28 VTs. Only the first 12 STSs (1,1 to 4,3) can be structured. The
rest have to be in bulk mode.
Bulk Leaves the STS as one 51.84 Mbps pipe
Target Defines the destination of the STS
Pass Through Sets the STS to pass through a node with no drops or adds
Cross Connect Sets the STS to be used in a cross-connect between two rings
Terminate The STS is set to terminate at the node and allow drops and adds
Set to Pass Through Button only appears if STS is set to Cross Connect or Terminate
Cross Connect Defines the source STS of the cross-connect
Source
Cross Connect Dual Enables operation for dual-ring interconnections
Homing
Undefined
On
Off

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.28 Line Module
Monitor

Setting/Status Option Notes

Terminating EPipe 2 to 48 TDM bandwidth EPipes used to carry Ethernet traffic. EPipes 216 can be designated to
carry Ethernet traffic in the first 24 STSs (1,1 through 8,3), and EPipes 3348 can be
designated to carry traffic in the upper 24 STSs (9,1 through 16,3). EPipes 1732 are
currently not supported.
Terminating DPipe Slot Determines the chassis slot to which the STS is connected across the back plane. The
selection is None, 4 through 10.
DPipe Selects the DPipe that the TDM data will use in the selected slot. DPipe range is 0 to 41.
Note that some ICON access modules do not support the entire 0 to 41 DPipe range.
When provisioning the Line Module, pay particular attention to the ranges your target
access module will support. Assigning DPipes outside the acceptable range of an access
module will produce unpredictable results. The maximum numbers of DPipes for access
modules are shown in the table below.

Module Type DPipe Range

FXS/FXO 014
Async Data 041
DS1 Async 014
Nx64F 014
DS1 Sync 031
Transfer Trip 041

Reserved STS reserved for future use and is displayed as reserved in the Bandwidth Manager of
the SEL-5051 software
Available
Reserved
Generate PRBSb
Enable
Disable
Line Loopbackb Enable/Disable When Enabled, loops the STS data back at the line level
Local Loopbackb Enable/Disable When Enabled, loops the STS data back at the local level
Add AISb True/False
Drop AISb True/False
a Options vary with different STSs.
b Test mode (module LED is blue).

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.29
Monitor

Virtual Tributary Signal (VT)


These settings need to be made on matching ports (for example, Port A and
Port B or Port C and Port D).

Setting/Status Option Notes

Target Displays the destination of the VT


Pass Through Sets the VT to pass through a node with no drops or adds
Cross Connect Sets the VT to be used in a cross-connect between two rings
Terminate The VT is set to terminate at the node and allow drops and adds
Set to Pass Through Button only appears if VT is set to Cross Connect or Terminate
Cross Connect Defines the source VT of the cross-connect
Source
Cross Connect Dual Enables operation for dual-ring interconnections
Homing
Undefined
On
Off
Terminating EPipe 2 to 16 TDM bandwidth EPipes used to carry Ethernet traffic. EPipes 216 can be designated to
carry Ethernet traffic in the first 12 STSs (1,1 through 4,3).
Terminating DPipe Slot Not currently used
DPipe
Reserved VT is reserved for future use and is displayed as reserved in the Bandwidth Manager of
the SEL-5051 software.
Available
Reserved
VT Structure
Off Disabled
DS0 Channels Allows DS0 level of termination on the VT
Bulk DS0 level not available. Used with the DS1 Async Module.
Test Modea Replaces the Add VT1.5 data with test bytes defined below
None
0x11
0x33

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.30 Line Module
Monitor

Setting/Status Option Notes

0x66
0xAA
0xEE
0x42
PRBS ITU 215 1
Test Mode Receiveda Monitoring mode indicating if VT1.5 is receiving a test byte
No Test Byte
Received
Value of Test Byte
Received
Line Loopbacka Enable/Disable When Enabled, loops the VT1.5 data back at the line level
Add AISa True/False Replaces the Add VT1.5 data with AIS
Drop AISa True/False Replaces the Drop VT1.5 data with AIS to the access module slot
a Test mode (module LED is blue).

SONET Section Layer

Monitor Point Option Notes

Section Status
No Defect
LOS Loss of signal
LOF Loss of frame
LOS and LOF
Current Errored Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Seconds
Current Severely Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
Errored Seconds
Current Coding Current count of errors detected by the bit interleaved parity (BIP) checks at the remote
Violations node during the present interval

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.31
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

Trace Check Enabled True/False Enables section trace check


Trace Expected The value that is expected to be received in the section trace bytes. This value may only
be set to printable ASCII characters.
Trace Received If the value received does not match the expected value, an alarm will result
Trace to Send The message that is sent in the section trace bytes when the Trace Mode is set to Send
Configured. This message may only be set to printable ASCII characters.
Trace Mode
Disable Disable sending section trace message
Send Default Line Module will send node identifier to adjacent node in section trace message. This
identifier is used by SEL-5051 to determine network topology. This is the preferred
mode.
Send Configured Line Module will send a user-configured section trace message to the adjacent node.
The configured trace message must be 15 characters and will prevent full network
topology connectivity on the SEL-5051 Overview. This mode is provided mainly to
interoperate with other SONET vendors in possible section trace message requirements.
Bit Error Rate The bit error rate at which the node reports an alarm
Threshold
None
1e-4
1e-5
1e-6
1e-7
1e-8
1e-9
Interval Time Time duration of the performance monitor bin
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hr
6 hr
12 hr
1 day
Errored Seconds This ES-S parameter is a count of the number of seconds during which (at any point
Today during the second) at least one section BIP error was detected or a severely errored
framing (SEF) or loss of signal (LOS) defect was present.
Errored Seconds Yes- This ES-S parameter is a count of the number of seconds during which (at any point
terday during the second) at least one BIP error was detected or an SEF or LOS defect was
present.
Severely Errored Sec- This SES-S parameter is a count of the seconds during which K or more Section BIP
onds Today errors were detected or a LOS defect was present. K for OC-48 is 2392.
Severely Errored This SES-S parameter is a count of the seconds during which K or more section BIP
Seconds Yesterday errors were detected or a LOS defect was present. K for OC-48 is 2392.
Coding Violations This CV-S parameter is a count of BIP errors detected at the Section layer (i.e., using
Today the B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal). As many as eight section BIP errors can be
detected per STS-N frame, with each error incrementing the CV-S current second regis-
ter. As many as 64000 errors can be detected per second.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.32 Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

Coding Violations This CV-S parameter is a count of BIP errors detected at the Section layer (i.e., using
Yesterday the B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal). As many as eight section BIP errors can be
detected per STS-N frame, with each error incrementing the CV-S current second regis-
ter. As many as 64000 errors can be detected per second.
Reset Statistics Reset the SONET Section layer performance counters

SONET Section
Interval

Monitor Point Units Notes

Intervals 131 Shows Section layer statistics for each interval


Interval Errored Seconds Count of errored seconds in selected interval
Interval Severely Errored Count of severely errored seconds in selected interval
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count of coding violations in selected interval
Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if data is valid for selected interval

SONET Line Layer

Monitor Point Option Notes

Line Status
No Defect
AIS
RDI
AIS and RDI
Current Errored Seconds Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Current Severely Errored Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
Seconds

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.33
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

Current Coding Violations Current count of coding violations in the present interval
Current Far End Coding Current count of coding violations at the far end
Violations
Bit Error Rate Threshold The bit error rate at which the node reports an alarm
None
1e-4
1e-5
1e-6
1e-7
1e-8
1e-9
Interval Time Time duration of the performance monitor bin
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hr
6 hr
12 hr
1 day
Errored Seconds Today Near-end line errored seconds (ES-Ls). The ES-L parameter is a count of the seconds
during which (at any point during the second) at least one line BIP error was detected or
an AIS-L defect was present.
Errored Seconds Yesterday Near-end line errored seconds (ES-Ls). The ES-L parameter is a count of the seconds
during which (at any point during the second) at least one line BIP error was detected or
an AIS-L defect was present.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end line severely errored seconds (SES-Ls). The SES-L parameter is a count of the
Today seconds during which 2459 or more line BIP errors were detected or an AIS-L defect
was present.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end line severely errored seconds (SES-Ls). The SES-L parameter is a count of the
Yesterday seconds during which 2459 or more line BIP errors were detected or an AIS-L defect
was present.
Coding Violations Today Near-end line coding violations (CV-Ls). The CV-L parameter is a count of BIP errors
detected at the line layer (i.e., using the B2 bytes in the incoming SONET signal). As
many as 8 N BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame, with each error increment-
ing the CV-L current second register. For OC-48, as many as 8 48 = 384 can be
detected per frame, with as many as 3,072,000 per second.
Coding Violations Near-end line coding violations (CV-Ls). The CV-L parameter is a count of BIP errors
Yesterday detected at the line layer (i.e., using the B2 bytes in the incoming SONET signal). As
many as 8 N BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame, with each error increment-
ing the CV-L current second register. For OC-48, as many as 8 48 = 384 can be
detected per frame, with as many as 3,072,000 per second.
Far End Line Coding Far-end line coding violations (CV-LFEs). The CV-LFE parameter is a count of the
Violations Today number of BIP errors that the far-end LTE detects and reports back to the near-end LTE
using the REI-L indication in the LOH. For OC-48 signals, as many as 255 BIP errors
per STS-N frame can be indicated. The CV-LFE current second register is incremented
for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-L.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.34 Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

Far End Line Coding Far-end line coding violations (CV-LFEs). The CV-LFE parameter is a count of the
Violations Yesterday number of BIP errors that the far-end LTE detects and reports back to the near-end LTE
using the REI-L indication in the LOH. For OC-48 signals, as many as 255 BIP errors
per STS-N frame can be indicated. The CV-LFE current second register is incremented
for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-L.
Reset Statistics Reset Reset the SONET Line Performance counters

SONET Line Interval

Monitor Point Option Notes

Intervals 131 Shows Line layer statistics for each interval


Interval Errored Seconds Count of errored seconds in selected interval
Interval Severely Errored Count of severely errored seconds in selected interval
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count of coding violations in selected interval
Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if data is valid for selected interval
Far End Interval Coding Count of far end interval coding violations
Violations
Far End Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if far end interval data is valid

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.35
Monitor

SONET Path Layer

Monitor Point Units Notes

Current Status
No Defect
STS LOP
STS AIS
STS RDI
Path Unequipped
Path Signal Label
Mismatch
Current Width
STS1
STS3CSTM1
STS12CSTM4
STS24C
STS48CSTM16
STS192CSTM64
STS768CSTM256
Current Errored Seconds Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Current Severely Errored Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
Seconds
Current Coding Violations Current count of coding violations in the present interval
Current Far End Coding Current count of coding violations at the far end in the present interval
Violations
Bit Error Rate Threshold The bit error rate at which the node reports an alarm
None
1e-4
1e-5
1e-6

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.36 Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Units Notes

1e-7
1e-8 Only for STS-12c
Signal Label
Unequipped or
Supervisory
Unequipped
Equipped - Nonspe-
cific Payload
VT Structured STS-
1 SPE
Locked VT Mode
Asynchronous Map-
ping for DS3
Mapping under
development
Asynchronous Map-
ping for DS4NA
Mapping for ATM
Mapping for DQDB
Asynchronous Map-
ping for FDDI
Mapping for HDLC/
PPP Framed Signals
Mapping for SDL
with Self-Synchro-
nizing Scrambler
Mapping for HDLC/
LAPS Framed Sig-
nals
Mapping for SDL
with Set-Reset
Scrambler
Mapping for 10
Gbps Ethernet
GFP Mapping
Mapping for 10
Gbps Fiber Channel
Asynchronous map- (k = 1, 2)
ping of ODUk into (X = 17, 68)
VT-4-Xv
Reserved
O.181 Test Signal
Mapping
STE SPE AIS
Interval Time Time duration of the performance monitor bin
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hr

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.37
Monitor

Monitor Point Units Notes

6 hr
12 hr
1 day
Errored Seconds Today Near-end STS path errored seconds (ES-Ps). The ES-P parameter is a count of
the seconds during which (at any point during the second) at least one STS path
BIP error was detected, or an AIS-P defect, an LOP-P defect, or UNEQ-P was
present.
Errored Seconds Yesterday Near-end STS path errored seconds (ES-Ps). The ES-P parameter is a count of
the seconds during which (at any point during the second) at least one STS path
BIP error was detected, or an AIS-P defect, an LOP-P defect, or UNEQ-P was
present.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end STS path severely errored seconds (SES-Ps). The SES-P parameter is a
Today count of the seconds during which 2400 or more STS path BIP errors were
detected, or an AIS-P defect, an LOP-P defect, or UNEQ-P was present.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end STS path severely errored seconds (SES-Ps). The SES-P parameter is a
Yesterday count of the seconds during which 2400 or more STS path BIP errors were
detected, or an AIS-P defect, an LOP-P defect, or UNEQ-P was present.
Coding Violations Today Near-end STS path coding violations (CV-Ps). The CV-P parameter is a count of
BIP errors detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte in the incoming
STS POH). As many as eight BIP errors can be detected per frame, with each
error incrementing the CV-P current second register.
Coding Violations Near-end STS path coding violations (CV-Ps). The CV-P parameter is a count of
Yesterday BIP errors detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte in the incoming
STS POH). As many as eight BIP errors can be detected per frame, with each
error incrementing the CV-P current second register.
Far End Path Coding Far-end STS path coding violations (CV-PFEs). The CV-PFE parameter is a
Violations Today count of the number of BIP errors detected by the far-end STS PTE and reported
back to the near-end STS PTE using the REI-P indication in the STS POH. As
many as eight BIP errors per frame can be indicated. The CV-PFE current sec-
ond register is incremented for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-P.
Far End Path Coding Far-end STS path coding violations (CV-PFEs). The CV-PFE parameter is a
Violations Yesterday count of the number of BIP errors detected by the far-end STS PTE and reported
back to the near-end STS PTE using the REI-P indication in the STS POH. As
many as eight BIP errors per frame can be indicated. The CV-PFE current sec-
ond register is incremented for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-P.
Reset Statistics Reset Reset the SONET Path counters

SONET Path Interval

Monitor Point Option Notes

Intervals 131 Shows Path statistics for each interval


Interval Errored Seconds Count of errored seconds in selected interval
Interval Severely Errored Count of severely errored seconds in selected interval
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count of coding violations in selected interval

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.38 Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if data is valid for selected interval
Far End Interval Coding Count of far end interval coding violations
Violations
Far End Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if far end interval data is valid

Virtual Tributaries
(VTs)

Monitor Point Units Notes

Bandwidth Type of SONET VT and SDH VC


VT1.5/VC11
VT2/VC12
VT3
VT6/VC2
VT6c
Defect Status Multiple defects and failures can be present at the same time
No Defect
LOP
AIS
RDI
Unequipped
Signal Label Mismatch
Bit Error Rate The bit error rate at which the node reports an alarm
Threshold
None
1e-4
1e-5
1e-6
Signal Label
Unequipped

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.39
Monitor

Monitor Point Units Notes

Equipped - Nonspe-
cific Payload
Asynchronous Map-
ping: VT1.5 for DS1,
VT2 for 2.048 Mbps,
VT3 for DS1C, VT6 for
DS2
Bit-synchronous Map-
ping: VT1.5 for DS1,
VT2 for 2.048 Mbps
Byte-synchronous
Mapping: VT1.5 for
DS1, VT2 for 2.048
Mbps
Extended Signal Label
O.181 Test Signal
Mapping
Experimental or Devel-
opmental Mapping
ATM mapping
Mapping of HDLC/
PPP Framed Signal
Mapping of HDLC/
LAPS Framed Signals
Virtually Concatenated
O.181 Test Signal
GFP Mapping
VT SPE AIS
Interval Time Time duration of the performance monitor bin
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hr
6 hr
12 hr
1 day
Errored Seconds in Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Current Interval
Errored Seconds Near-end VT path errored seconds (ES-Vs). The ES-V parameter is a count of the
Today seconds during which (at any point during the second) at least one VT path BIP error
was detected, or an AIS-V defect, an LOP-V defect, or UNEQ-V was present.
Errored Seconds Near-end VT path errored seconds (ES-Vs). The ES-V parameter is a count of the
Yesterday seconds during which (at any point during the second) at least one VT path BIP error
was detected, or an AIS-V defect, an LOP-V defect, or UNEQ-V was present.
Severely Errored Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
Seconds in Current
Interval
Severely Errored Near-end VT path severely errored seconds (SES-Vs). The SES-V parameter is a
Seconds Today count of the seconds during which 600 or more VT path BIP errors were detected, or
an AIS-V defect, an LOP-V defect, or an UNEQ-V was present.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.40 Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Units Notes

Severely Errored Near-end VT path severely errored seconds (SES-Vs). The SES-V parameter is a
Seconds Yesterday count of the seconds during which 600 or more VT path BIP errors were detected, or
an AIS-V defect, an LOP-V defect, or an UNEQ-V was present.
Coding Violations Current count of coding violations in the present interval
in Current Interval
Coding Violations Near-end VT path coding violations (CV-Vs). The CV-V parameter is a count of BIP
Today errors detected at the VT path layer (i.e., using bits 1 and 2 of the V5 byte in the
incoming VT POH). As many as two BIP errors can be detected per VT superframe,
with each error incrementing the CV-V current second register.
Coding Violations Near-end VT path coding violations (CV-Vs). The CV-V parameter is a count of BIP
Yesterday errors detected at the VT path layer (i.e., using bits 1 and 2 of the V5 byte in the
incoming VT POH). As many as two BIP errors can be detected per VT superframe,
with each error incrementing the CV-V current second register.
Far End Line Current count of far-end line coding violations in the present interval
Coding Violations
in Current Interval
Far End Line Far-end VT path coding violations (CV-VFEs). The CV-VFE parameter is a count of
Coding Violations the number of BIP errors that the far-end VT PTE detects and reports back to the near-
Today end VT PTE using the REI-V indication in the VT path overhead. Note that only one
BIP error can be indicated per VT superframe by using the REI-V bit (out of the two
BIP errors that can be detected). The CV-VFE current second register is incremented
for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-V.
Far End Line Far-end VT path coding violations (CV-VFEs). The CV-VFE parameter is a count of
Coding Violations the number of BIP errors that the far-end VT PTE detects and reports back to the near-
Yesterday end VT PTE using the REI-V indication in the VT path overhead. Note that only one
BIP error can be indicated per VT superframe by using the REI-V bit (out of the two
BIP errors that can be detected). The CV-VFE current second register is incremented
for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-V.
Reset Statistics Reset Reset the VT counters

VT Statistics Interval

Monitor Point Option Notes

Interval 131 Shows VT statistics for each interval


Interval Errored Seconds Count of errored seconds in selected interval
Interval Severely Errored Count of severely errored seconds in selected interval
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count of coding violations in selected interval
Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if data is valid for selected interval
Far End Interval Coding Count of far end interval coding violations
Violations
Far End Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if far end interval data is valid

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.41
Network Management Communications

SONET Performance The ICON supports the following Performance Monitoring (PM) counters for
each Section, Line, and Path (STS, VT) entity. This section summarizes the
Monitoring information from the settings tables.

Table 3.8 Supported PM Counters

Far-End Path Far-End


Section Line
Line (STS, VT) Path

Errored Seconds (ES) x x x


Severely Errored Sec- x x x
onds (SES)
Coding Violation (CV) x x x x x

On each error event, a Current counter is incremented. There are also 31


previous interval counter bins. At the end of the user-specified interval time
(15 minutes to 1 day) the Current counter is copied to Interval #1 bin, Interval
#1 bin is copied to Interval #2 bin, and so on, until the previous content of
Interval #31 bin is discarded. The Current counter is then cleared.
Interval bins that have not yet had data copied into them have their Valid Data
field set to False.
On each error event, a Today counter is also incremented. At the end of each
24-hour interval from the time the Line Module is rebooted, the Today counter
is copied to the Yesterday counter and the Today counter is cleared.

Now

Interval Interval Interval


Current
#31 ... #2 #1

... Yesterday ... Today

Time

Figure 3.2 Performance Monitor Interval Bins

Each Reset Statistics button clears the Current, Interval, Today, and Yesterday
counters for one Section, Line, or Path entity.
PM counters will not increment above a maximum value of 4,294,967,295.

Network Management Communications


The placement of NMS information in the SONET data stream is set during
the initial system configuration.
The factory-default settings are based on the SONET transport level and are
set as follows:

Transport Level Default Network Management Location

OC-48 VT 15 to 28 on STS4,3

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


3.42 Line Module
Firmware Upgrade

Firmware Upgrade
From the NMS Device View screen, right-click on the Line Module and select
the Firmware Upgrade option. This option can be used to upgrade or
downgrade the Line Module firmware version as required. When you upgrade
a Line Modules firmware, your settings will be automatically preserved for
transparent operation. The upgrade can be applied immediately or scheduled
to occur at a future time.
Downgrading a Line Module is not recommended unless absolutely required.
If a Line Module downgrade is required, SEL recommends that you perform a
backup of the Node settings in case the downgrade is interrupted. Once the
downgrade process is complete, you will need to accept the newly
downgraded Line Module from the Inventory option, found by right-clicking
the node in the Device View.
If you revert from firmware version R108 or higher to firmware R107 or
lower, be aware that a downgrade from firmware R108 or higher to firmware
R107 or lower will force the Line Module to four SONET ports.
For other changes that may affect the performance of your system when
downgrading firmware, see Table A.1.

Line Module Replacement


The Line Module can be hot-swapped with another Line Module if the
Node Inventory status for the current Line Module is Ok. You can find the
Node Inventory by right-clicking the node in the NMS Device View. When the
new replacement Line Module completes the bootup process (blue flashing
module LED), the Server Module will automatically download the stored
settings into the new Line Module to resume normal operation with minimal
interruption of service. The settings download from the Server Module will
only be successful if the firmware version in the replacement Line Module is
the same as that of the previous Line Module or newer.
If the replacement Line Module has an older version of firmware installed, use
the following procedure to resume normal operation based on the settings
stored in the Server Module. SEL strongly recommends that all Line Module
spares be kept updated to your latest firmware to avoid prolonged network
outage.
NOTE: This procedure should only be Step 1. Check that the NMS Node Inventory has accepted the settings
followed if it is not possible to replace
the Line Module with another module from the current Line Module.
containing firmware of the same
version or higher. You can find the Node Inventory by right-clicking the node in
the Device View. Accept the inventory if the Line Module
status is not Ok.
Step 2. From the Overview tab, right-click the Node icon and select
Backup Node(s) to ensure that a settings backup is stored on
your computer.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Line Module 3.43
Line Module Replacement

Step 3. Swap the current Line Module with replacement Line Module.
The replacement Line Module will boot up and blink the blue
module LED for approximately 1020 seconds.
At this point, the Server Module will not download settings to
the replacement Line Module that has older firmware installed.
Therefore, it is very likely that the replacement module is not
operating as expected.
Step 4. Do not accept the Line Module inventory.
At this time, NMS will produce a Module Config Failure
(Major) alarm in the System Monitoring view. This state is
normal and indicates that the Server Module settings are newer
than the replacement Line Module (older version) will support.
If the Line Module Inventory is accidentally accepted, the
Server Module will update its settings to the replaced Line
Module and the original Line Module settings will be lost. If
you accidentally accept the Line Module Inventory, you can
still recover the Line Module settings from the Backup Nodes
file on your computer after Step 6 is completed.
Step 5. From the device view, right-click the Line Module and select
Upgrade Firmware to perform an immediate version upgrade.
Step 6. After the Firmware Upgrade progress bar completes, the Line
Module will reboot (blue flashing LED) and the Server Module
will automatically download the stored settings into the
replacement Line Module to resume normal operation.
Step 7. It may be necessary to reconfigure the SFP ports of the
replacement module if the replacement module accepted an
alternate SFP configuration in the past. Refer to Ports for
instructions on how to accept the currently installed SFP
configuration into the non-volatile memory of the replacement
Line Module.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Section 4
Protected Line Module
Part Number 8021-01

Introduction
General The Protected Line Module provides the Synchronous Optical Network
(SONET) and Ethernet transport interface between adjacent nodes. It has a
built-in cross-connect, with virtual tributary (VT), synchronous transport
signal level 1 (STS-1), and DS0 granularity, capable of supporting as many as
two line ports (A/B and C/D). The line ports can support SONET OC-48,
OC-12, and OC-3 line rates. Various optical SFPs are available for the line
ports, depending on transport selection and distance requirements.
The Protected Line Module has two BNC connectors for IRIG-B/PPS output
time distribution.
Ethernet support is provided by the optional Ethernet Access Module
(8035-01).

Network Topologies The Protected Line Module supports the following topologies:
Point-to-point: where one node connects directly to another
node
Linear: where nodes are arranged in a line to allow traffic to be
added or dropped along the way
Ring: where each node connects to exactly two other nodes,
forming a circular pathway for traffic in a closed loop
configuration
Single Tie interconnected rings: where one node touches two
separate rings and has an internal cross-connect with DS0, VT,
and STS granularity to allow traffic to flow between the two
rings
Dual Tie interconnected rings: where each ring has two
independent access points for interconnection between the
rings. This architecture uses two sites in each ring as tie points
for traffic flow. The main advantage is to provide an alternate
traffic path in the event of a fiber or node failure in either
interconnection.
Ring switch time is less than 5 ms per ring.

SONET When two Protected Line Modules are installed, the SEL Integrated
Communications Optical Network (ICON) supports as many as four SONET
line ports (A, B, C, and D) using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) fiber-
optic transceivers. The Protected Line Module uses unidirectional path
switched ring (UPSR) technology with path direction selection and switch on

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.2 Protected Line Module
Introduction

yellow to eliminate asymmetrical delays. The Protected Line Module has an


internal cross-connect with DS0, VT, and STS-1 granularity for inter-ring
traffic among ports. To minimize latency added by packet queues and to
provide traffic isolation for Ethernet transport, ICON can divide the SONET
payload into pipes and use these pipes as dedicated paths. ICON can create
single VT1.5, STS-1, or STS-3c pipes, or form pipes into VCAT VT1.5, STS-
1, or STS-3c groups. This technology provides guaranteed bandwidth and
support for various application priorities.
The Protected Line Module supports internal, line, or external timing and
synchronization status messaging (SSM). You can configure nodes for
internal, line, or local GPS Stratum 1 timing. Network management is carried
in the TOH bytes of the SONET frame. The Protected Line Module monitors
fiber-optic transmit and receive power levels and transmit current level for
proper performance and uses the B1, B2, and B3 bytes for error monitoring.
NOTE: When upgrading or inserting
an SFP for the first time, the correct Built-in test capabilities include the following:
procedure is to insert the SFP(s) into
the Protected Line Module and accept Forced XMT-LINE AIS and RCV-LINE AIS
it/them before inserting the fiber(s)
into the SFP(s). Line/local loopback
If changing the line rate of the
Protected Line Module between OC-3, Section tracing
OC-12, or OC-48, refer to SFP Upgrade
Procedure for Changing Line Rate on PRBS and fixed-value test bytes for STSs and VT1.5s
Protected Line Module on page 4.2.
The SONET SFP fiber-optic specifications are listed in Table 1.2Table 1.5.

SFP Upgrade The following describes the recommended procedure for upgrading SFPs to
change the line rate of an operational network. This procedure is only
Procedure for applicable to the Protected Line Module (8021-01), as it is capable of
Changing Line Rate supporting OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48 line rates. The Line Module (8020-01)
only supports OC-48.
on Protected Line
Step 1. Start at the node adjacent to the node providing the primary
Module timing reference for the network. The node used for primary
timing reference should be upgraded last.
Step 2. Remove the fiber from the operational SFP, remove the
operational SFP, and insert the new SFP into the Protected Line
Module.
Step 3. An alarm on SEL-5051 will be generated, indicating SFP type
mismatch.
Step 4. Under Device View, select the PLM being upgraded by double-
clicking on the module.
Step 5. Select the Ports field in the Settings section.
Step 6. Click on the Reconfigure Reset button to reboot and
reconfigure the module into the correct mode.
Step 7. In the port configuration field above the Reconfigure Reset
button, verify that the correct optic rate has been configured.
Step 8. Reinsert the fiber.
Step 9. Set the bit error rate threshold to an appropriate level for
section and line monitoring.
Step 10. From the newly upgraded SFP, follow the fiber to the next
node. The SFP on the far end of the fiber should be the next
SFP to be upgraded. Repeat Step 2Step 8.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.3
Installation

Step 11. At this point you have upgraded both SFPs on each end of the
fiber connecting two nodes. Any optic level alarms should now
be cleared. Note that a path problem might be reported if going
from a higher optic rate to a lower optic rate.
Step 12. Continue with Step 2Step 11 until the ring is complete.

Installation

Figure 4.1 Protected Line Module 8021-01

The Protected Line Modules can only be installed in chassis slots 1 and 2. All
modules in the ICON are hot swappable, which means that the modules can
be removed and/or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should the Protected Line Module fail while it is in service, you can replace it
with a like Protected Line Module. The Server Module will recognize the
insertion of a new module and transfer the existing settings onto the new
Protected Line Module. When the Protected Line Module is programmed and
in service, the status LED will turn from slow blinking blue to green. The
firmware revision of the replacement module must be compatible with the
companion Protected Line Module and other modules in the system.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.4 Protected Line Module
Installation

Indicators
Table 4.1 Module Status Indicator LED

Precedence Status LED Module Condition Details

0a Steady red Board dead Server Module asserts this condition when board
is unresponsive
1 Flashing red (4)b Boot error The bootloader cannot find a good image to boot
2 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is initializing the
module
3 Alternating red/blue (1)b FPGA load error The selected FPGA image is corrupted or missing
4 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting The module is ready and waiting for the server
module
5 Double flashing yellow (4)b Disabled The Server Module has set the operational state to
disabled
6 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, VCXO, or temperature out of
range
7 Steady blue Test mode Any interface is in a test mode
8 Steady green Normal The module is enabled and okay
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

Table 4.2 Line Port LED (Top)

Precedence Line Port LED State Line Port Condition Details

0a Dark Off Port disabled


1 Alternate red/green (2)b SFP problem SFP type mismatch, invalid license, or no data
from SFP
2 Steady red SONET line problem Line AIS (AIS-L), LOS, LOF, OOF;
CV-S or CV-L > threshold, or SFP missing
3 Steady yellow Far-end failure RDI-L
4 Flashing green (1)b SONET line okay, line timing SONET line signal good and in line timing mode
5 Steady green SONET line okay SONET line signal good
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

Table 4.3 Line Port LED (Bottom)

Precedence Line Port LED State Line Port Condition Details

0a Dark No paths terminated or port off All traffic is pass-through on this module or the
port is disabled
1 Steady red Problem with STS/VT One or more problems with STSs and/or VTs.
Condition AIS-P, LOP-P, AIS-V, or LOP-V.
2 Steady yellow Far-end failure RDI-P or RDI-V
3 Steady green Healthy PATH/VT signal
a Precedence level 0 is highest.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.5
Specifications

Table 4.4 IRIG-B OUT LED

Precedence Ethernet Port LED State Ethernet Port Condition Details

0a Dark IRIG-B port is disabled


1 Steady red Time source is unavailable Time source has never been available
2 Flashing red (1)b Time in holdover Inaccuracy is > 1 sec
3 Flashing green (1)b Time in holdover Inaccuracy is < 1 sec
4 Steady green Time is locked to UTC Inaccuracy is < 1 sec
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption Typically 7 W (max 8.5 W)
Chassis Space Requirements Module slots 1 or 2 only
Line Ports SFPs with LC connector
IRIG-B Outputs BNC

Settings and Status


Synchronization
Status Messaging
(SSM)

Setting/Status Option Notes

Quality Version There are two different generations of SSM timing:


Generation 1 with quality levels 1 to 7
Generation 2 with quality levels 1 to 9
Quality Level 1 is the best for either generation. Generation 2 supports the addition of
Stratum 3E and Transit Node Clock (TNC) QL levels.
All Protected Line Modules in the same network must be set to the same Quality Ver-
sion.
Generation 1 Generation 1 is the default setting in the SEL ICON
Generation 2 Generation 2 supports the addition of Stratum 3E and TNC
Sync Source Source to which the Protected Line Module is currently locked
Line A Line Port A (only available in Slot 1)
Line B Line Port B (only available in Slot 2)
Line C Line Port C (only available in Slot 1)
Line D Line Port D (only available in Slot 2)
Companion Timing is provided by companion Protected Line Module
Internal Clock Internal SMC oscillator on Protected Line Module

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.6 Protected Line Module
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

External Clock For future support of BITS clock


Server Module When locked to GPS through Server Module, Stratum 1. If no GPS, then Stratum 3.
Holdover Module enters holdover on a change of timing source
SSM Preset
The following selection options apply to a PLM inserted in Slot 1.
Master GPS This setting is used to configure the node as the GPS timing master. The appropriate set-
Node: Server tings need to be made on the Server Module to enable the GPS receiver. The PLM will
Module, Line A, use the highest quality timing source available based on evaluating SSM quality from
Companion the following sources in the following order: Server Module, followed by Line A, fol-
lowed by the alternate companion PLM in Slot 2.
Back-Up GPS This setting is used to configure the node as a backup GPS node. The appropriate set-
Node: Line A, tings need to be made on the Server Module to enable the GPS receiver. The PLM will
Companion, use the highest quality timing source available based on evaluating SSM quality from
Server Module the following sources in the following order: Line A, followed by the alternate compan-
ion PLM in Slot 2, followed by the Server Module.
Line Timed Node: This setting is used to configure the node to be line timed. The PLM will use the highest
Line A, Compan- quality timing source available based on evaluating SSM quality from the following
ion, Server Mod- sources in the following order: Line A, followed by the alternate companion PLM in
ule Slot 2, followed by the Server Module.
The following selection options apply to a PLM inserted in Slot 2.
Master GPS This setting is used to configure the node as the GPS timing master. The appropriate set-
Node: Compan- tings need to be made on the Server Module to enable the GPS receiver. The PLM will
ion, Server Mod- use the highest quality timing source available based on evaluating SSM quality from
ule, Line B the following sources in the following order: the alternate companion module in Slot 1,
followed by Server Module, followed by Line B.
Back-Up GPS This setting is used to configure the node as a backup GPS node. The appropriate set-
Node: Compan- tings need to be made on the Server Module to enable the GPS receiver. The PLM will
ion, Line B, use the highest quality timing source available based on evaluating SSM quality from
Server Module the following sources in the following order: the alternate companion module in Slot 1,
followed by Line B, followed by the Server Module.
Line Timed Node: This setting is used to configure the node to be line timed. The PLM will use the highest
Companion, quality timing source available based on evaluating SSM quality from the following
Line B, Server sources in the following order: the alternate companion PLM in Slot 1, followed by
Module Line B, followed by the Server Module.

Line AD, Companion, Internal Clock, and Server

Setting/Status Option Notes

Enable This Timing Enable/Disable Turns the effective timing source on or off
Source
Priority 06 Priority of SSM source. The larger the number, the lower the priority. No two inputs can
have the same priority.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.7
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

SSM In Stratum level of the clock source


Quality Level In Synchronization status messaging values with the associated quality level from
Generation 1 and 2 indicated beside the description for each value

SSM
Gen#1 Description Gen#2 Description
Value

0 2 - Quality Unknown 2 - Quality Unknown


1 1 - Stratum 1 1 - Stratum 1
2 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
3 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
4 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 4 - Transit Node Clock
5 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
6 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
7 3 - Stratum 2 3 - Stratum 2
8 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
9 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
10 4 - Stratum 3 6 - Stratum 3
11 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
12 5 - SONET Minimum Clock 7 - SONET Minimum Clock
13 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 5 - Stratum 3E
14 6 - Reserved for Network Synchroni- 8 - Reserved for Network Synchroni-
zation zation
15 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization

Force Input 07 Provides quality level of the input


0No Override: The input signal quality level is based on the incoming SSM bits.
(a) When ICON is configured for Generation 1:
1 to 7Equivalent to Generation 1 quality levels (1 to 7)
(b) When ICON is configured for Generation 2:
1 to 9Equivalent to Generation 2 quality levels (1 to 9)
(1 means best quality; quality decreases as the value increases)
A value of 7 (for Generation 1) or 9 (for Generation 2) means that the source will not be
used for synchronization

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.8 Protected Line Module
Settings and Status

Setting/Status Option Notes

SSM Out SSM Out value


Quality Level Out Synchronization status messaging values with the associated quality level from
Generation 1 and 2 indicated beside the description for each value

SSM
Gen#1 Description Gen#2 Description
Value

0 2 - Quality Unknown 2 - Quality Unknown


1 1 - Stratum 1 1 - Stratum 1
2 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
3 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
4 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 4 - Transit Node Clock
5 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
6 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
7 3 - Stratum 2 3 - Stratum 2
8 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
9 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
10 4 - Stratum 3 6 - Stratum 3
11 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization
12 5 - SONET Minimum Clock 7 - SONET Minimum Clock
13 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 5 - Stratum 3E
14 6 - Reserved for Network Synchroni- 8 - Reserved for Network Synchroni-
zation zation
15 7 - Do Not Use for Synchronization 9 - Do Not Use for Synchronization

Force Output 07 Forces the output SSM to the selected value if the source SSM has a better quality and is
chosen as the timing source
0No Override: The output signal quality level is based on the outgoing SSM bits
(a) When ICON is configured for Generation 1:
1 to 7Equivalent to Generation 1 quality levels (1 to 7)
(b) When ICON is configured for Generation 2:
1 to 9Equivalent to Generation 2 quality levels (1 to 9)
(1 means best quality; quality decreases as the value increases)
A value of 7 (for Generation 1) or 9 (for Generation 2) means that the source will not be
used for synchronization
Frequency Offset Frequency offset with respect to the local crystal in parts per million (PPM). This value
is only valid for line and external sources.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.9
Settings and Status

Ethernet Dual Ring


Interconnect (DRI)
Settings

Setting Option Notes

Port Pair Topology Specify the topology of the network


Dual Ring
Linear on A/B,
Ring on C/D
Ring on A/B,
Linear on C/D
Dual Linear
Tie Node
Disabled Not a tie node
Single Selected node is a single-tie node
Primary Dual tie with selected node defined as primary tie node
Backup Dual tie with selected node defined as backup tie node
Source Ring ID A/B
131 Used to identify the ring that Port A and Port B are physically part of. Not required for
PLM.
Source Ring ID C/D
131 Used to identify the ring that Port C and Port D are physically part of. Not required for
PLM.
Node
None Single tie mode, no primary or backup node designation
Node Alias Based on primary or backup setting choice in Tie Node field designate primary or
backup node

Ports Settings

Setting/Monitor Option Notes

Port Configuration Shows SONET rate for each line port


Port A OC-48, If Protected Line Module inserted in Slot 1
OC-12, OC-3
Port C OC-48,
OC-12, OC-3
Port B OC-48, If Protected Line Module inserted in Slot 2
OC-12, OC-3
Port D OC-48,
OC-12, OC-3
Reconfigure Reset button Used to reboot the module after changing SFP line rate. See SFP Upgrade Procedure
for Changing Line Rate on Protected Line Module on page 4.2.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.10 Protected Line Module
Settings and Status

Port AD Settings

Port A and Port C are shown in the settings tree if the Protected Line Module
is inserted in Slot 1. Port B and Port D are shown in the settings tree if the
Protected Line Module is inserted in Slot 2.

Setting Option Notes

Port Alias User-assigned name for the port


Port Enabled Turn the port on or off
Down Off
Up On

Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP)

Setting/Status Option Notes

Vendor N/A Displays the SFP Vendor. Note only SEL SFPs are compatible with the ICON.
Part Number N/A Displays the part number of the installed SFP
Serial Number N/A Displays the serial number of the installed SFP
Wavelength N/A Displays the wavelength of the installed SFP
Rated Distance N/A Displays the rated maximum distance for the installed SFP
Low Power Alert Off, 35 to 10 Sets the receive level at which an alert (minor alarm) is raised. Default is 20 dBm.
Threshold
Low Power Alarm Off, 35 to 10 Sets the receive level at which an alarm (major alarm) is raised. Default is 25 dBm.
Threshold
Temperature N/A Displays the current operating temperature of the SFP
Calibration N/A This should always read Internal, External, or Unknown
Transmit Power N/A SFP transmitted laser power
Receive Power N/A SFP measured receive level
Transmit Laser N/A The current being drawn to drive the laser in the SFP
Current
Voltage N/A The voltage applied to the SFP from the Protected Line Module. Normal operating
range is 3000 to 3600 mV.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.11
Settings and Status

Synchronous This lists all the STSs available on the SONET payload. When using the
Protected Line Module, these settings need to be made on both the left and
Transport Signal (STS) right modules.

Setting Option Notes

Bandwidth Defines how the STS bandwidth is allocated in the SONET payload
STS1 Single STS at 51.84 Mbps signal to be carried in the SONET payload
STS3c Three STSs combined into one 155.52 Mbps signal to be carried in the SONET payload
STS12c Twelve STSs combined into one 622.08 Mbps signal to be carried in the SONET pay-
load. Not available for OC-3 or OC-12 rates.
Structure Defines the structure of the STS
VT Structured Breaks the STS into 28 VTs. For OC-48 and OC-12, only the first 12 STSs (1,1 to 4,3)
can be structured, and the rest must be in bulk mode. For OC-3, all available STSs (1,1
to 1,3) can be structured.
Bulk Leaves the STS as bulk data
Target Defines the configuration of the STS
Pass Through The STS is in pass-through mode with no drops or adds
Cross Connect Sets the STS to be used in a cross-connect between two rings
Terminate The STS is set to terminate at the node and allow drops and adds
Set to Pass Through Select Button Selecting the button will set the STS to pass through and not terminate at this node
Cross Connect Defines the source STS of the cross-connect
Source
Cross Connect Dual Enables operation for dual-ring interconnections
Homing
Undefined
On Node is being used to cross-connect a dual-homed ring
Off Node is not being used to cross-connect a dual-homed ring
Terminating EPipe Off, 232 TDM bandwidth EPipes used to carry Ethernet traffic. EPipes 232 can be designated to
carry Ethernet traffic in any of the 48 STSs for OC-48, 12 STSs for OC-12, or 3 STSs
for OC-3.
Terminating DPipe
Slot None, 410 Determines the chassis slot to which the STS is connected across the back plane

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.12 Protected Line Module
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

DPipe N/A, 041 Selects the DPipe that the TDM data will use in the selected slot. Note that some ICON
access modules do not support the entire 0 to 41 DPipe range. When provisioning the
Protected Line Module, pay particular attention to the ranges your target access module
will support. Assigning DPipes outside the acceptable range of an access module will
produce unpredictable results. The maximum numbers of DPipes for access modules are
shown in the table below.

Module Type DPipe Range

FXS/FXO 014
Async 041
DS1 Async 014
Nx64F 014
DS1 Sync 031
Transfer Trip 041

Reserved STS reserved for future use and is displayed as reserved in the bandwidth manager of
the SEL-5051 software
Available Default setting
Reserved
Generate PRBS Enable/Disable
Line Loopback Enable/Disable When Enabled, loops the STS data back at the line level
Local Loopback Enable/Disable When Enabled, loops the STS data back at the local level
Add AIS True/False Transmit Line AIS. This will cause a far-end path and/or timing source switch.
Drop AIS True/False Transmit Drop AIS. This will cause a path and/or timing source switch.

Virtual Tributary Signal (VT)


When using the Protected Line Module, these settings need to be made on
both the left and right modules.

Setting Option Notes

Target Displays the destination of the VT


Pass Through Sets the VT to pass through a node with no drops or adds
Cross Connect Sets the VT to be used in a cross-connect between two rings
Terminate The VT is set to terminate at the node and allow drops and adds
Set to Pass Through Button only appears if VT is set to Cross Connect or Terminate

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.13
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Cross Connect Defines the source STS/VT of the cross-connect


Source
Cross Connect Dual Enables operation for dual-ring interconnections
Homing
Undefined
On
Off
Terminating EPipe Off, NMS Chan- TDM bandwidth EPipes used to carry Ethernet traffic. EPipes 232 can be designated to
nel, 232 carry Ethernet traffic in any of the 336 VTs (for STS-1s 1,1 to 4,3) for OC-48/OC-12 or
84 VTs for OC-3.
Terminating DPipe
Slot None, 410 Determines the chassis slot to which the VT is connected across the back plane
DPipe 041 Selects the DPipe that the TDM data will use in the selected slot. Note that some ICON
access modules do not support the entire 0 to 41 DPipe range. When provisioning the
Protected Line Module, pay particular attention to the ranges your target access module
will support. Assigning DPipes outside the acceptable range of an access module will
produce unpredictable results. The maximum numbers of DPipes for access modules are
shown in the table below.

Module Type DPipe Range

FXS/FXO 014
Async 041
DS1 Async 014
Nx64F 014
DS1 Sync 031
Transfer Trip 041

Reserved VT is reserved for future use and is displayed as reserved in the bandwidth manager of
the SEL-5051 software
Available
Reserved
VT Structure
Off VT not terminated
DS0 Structured Allows DS0 level of termination on the VT. Passes whole VT to the access module slot
Bulk DS0 level not available. Typically used with the DS1 Async Module. The VT1.5 pro-
cessing is performed at the access module card.
DS0 Groomed Provides ability to groom traffic at the DS0 level
Test Mode Replaces the Add VT1.5 data with test bytes defined below
None
0x11
0x33
0x66
0xAA
0xEE
0x42
PRBS ITU 215 1

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.14 Protected Line Module
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Test Mode Received Monitoring mode indicating if VT1.5 is receiving a test byte
No Test Byte
Received
Value of Test Byte
Received
Line Loopback Enable/Disable When Enabled, loops the VT1.5 data back at the line level
Add AIS True/False Replaces the Add VT1.5 data with AIS
Drop AIS True/False Replaces the Drop VT1.5 data with AIS to the access module slot

DS0 Grooming
The DS0 grooming capability supports the ability to groom DS0s from
SONET line ports and access modules. The Cross Connect Source settings are
used to groom traffic from the SONET line ports and the Terminating DPipe
settings are used to groom traffic from the Access Modules. These settings are
mutually exclusive.
To use the DS0 Grooming feature, the VT at each end of a pass-through or
cross-connect must be set to VT Structure DS0 Groomed. Also, if the cross-
connect is between the two PLMs, then each PLM must have the corresponding
VT on the other side set to DS0 Groomed. For example, a DS0 cross-connect
from Port A STS 1,1 VT 2 to Port D STS 2,2 VT 3 must have each of the
following VTs set to DS0 Groomed:
Port A STS 1,1 VT 2
Port B STS 1,1 VT 2
Port C STS 2,2 VT 3
Port D STS 2,2 VT 3

The number of DS0 Groomed VTs per PLM is shown in the field DS0
Groomed VTs in Module Status.

Figure 4.2 Cross Connect Source Settings

Figure 4.3 Terminate DPipe Settings

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.15
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Target
Pass Through DS0s are being passed through this Protected Line Module
Cross Connect DS0s being cross connected from SONET Line port
Terminate DS0s being groomed from Access Module
Set to Pass Through Select Button Selecting the button will set the DS0 to pass through and not terminate at this node
Cross Connect Cross connecting DS0s from SONET Line port
Source
Port SONET Line ports A/B can cross connect with ports C/D and vice versa
None
Port A
Port B
Port C
Port D
STS Select source STS
N/A, 1,14,3 OC-48 / OC-12
N/A, 1,11,3 OC-3
VT N/A, 128 Select source VT1.5
DS0 N/A, 124 Select source DS0
Terminating DPipe Groomed data is being terminated at an Access Submodule
DS0
Slot Defines the destination access slot number
None
Slot 410
DPipe N/A, 031 Defines the destination DPipe number
DS0 N/A, 124 Defines the destination DS0 number within the DPipe number

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.16 Protected Line Module
Settings and Status

Port Group to EPipe


Mapping Settings

This setting maps Ethernet port groups to EPipes.

Setting Option Notes

Port Groups 14095 032 Defines the EPipe number that is mapped to a specific port group
0: Port group not used
1: NMS port group
232: Available for general use

Ethernet Settings

These settings need to be made on both the left and right Protected Line
Module. Remaining Ethernet settings are made on the Ethernet Access
Module (EAM). See Section 15: Ethernet Access Module.

Setting Option Notes

Port Enabled Turn the port on or off


Up On
Down Off
Port Group 14095 The port group to which the port is assigned. The default is Port Group 1.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.17
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Learn Mode Mode in which the drop port learns MAC addresses. These settings provide Ethernet
port security.
Aging New entries are learned and aged
CountLock Lock after learn limit reached, no aging
Locked Port is locked, no aging
Port Aging 11440 Port aging in minutes. It can vary from 1 minute to 1 day (1440 minutes). Default is 1
minute.
Learn Limit 04095 Number of entries that can be learned

IRIG-B Settings

Setting Option Notes

Parity Standard, Inverted Sets the parity for the IRIG-B output message (default is Standard)
Time Zone UCT hh:mm The offset applied to the UTC time to generate local time. This is set in plus or
minus half-hour increments.
Use DST True/False Enables daylight-saving time. Default reset state is DST with adjustment enabled
from 2 AM on the second Sunday of March to 2 AM on the first Sunday of
November.
On Month Month Sets the month to apply the daylight-saving time shift (+1 hr)
On Day Day of Week Sets the day of the week to apply the daylight-saving time shift (+1 hr)
On Week Week of Month Sets the week of the month to apply the daylight-saving time shift (+1 hr)
On Hour 024 Sets the hour of the day to apply the daylight-saving time shift (+1 hr)
Off Month Month Sets the month to turn off the daylight-saving time shift (1 hr)
Off Day Day of Week Sets the day of week to turn off the daylight-saving time shift (1 hr)
Off Week Week of Month Sets the week of the month to turn off the daylight-saving time shift (1 hr)
Off Hour 024 Sets the hour of the day to turn off the daylight-saving time shift (1 hr)
Port X Signal Formata Sets the format of the time signal on BNC connector X
Off Port is off
IRIG-B UTC Port outputs IRIG-B signal with UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
IRIG-B Local Port outputs IRIG-B signal with local time (Adjusted by Time Zone)
PPS Port outputs one pulse per second

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.18 Protected Line Module
Network Management Communications

Setting Option Notes

Port Y Signal Formata Sets the format of the time signal on BNC connector Y
Off Port is off
IRIG-B UTC Port outputs IRIG-B signal with UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
IRIG-B Local Port outputs IRIG-B signal with local time (Adjusted by Time Zone)
PPS Port outputs one pulse per second
a Both IRIG-B Ports X and Y will be inactive (i.e., no output and red IRIG-B LED on Line Module or Protected Line Module) unless a valid
synchronized and consistent clock source is present.

Network Management Communications


There are several options for configuring how the NMS information is passed
between nodes. The placement of NMS information in the SONET data
stream is set during the initial system configuration. These settings must be
the same at every node.
The factory-default settings are based on the SONET transport level and are
set as follows:

Transport Level Default Network Management Location

OC-48 TOH
OC-12 TOH
OC-3 TOH

TOH Bytes These settings must be made on both the left and right Protected Line Module.

Configuration

Setting Option Notes

e1C1e2C3
Unassigned Not dropped at this node. TOH byte is in pass-through mode.

Time Stamp TOH byte is being used to carry Time Distribution information. Only one TOH byte
should be used for time stamp.
Link Monitor This setting assigns the TOH byte to the link monitor function. The link monitor is used to
monitor the health of the network ring. One byte is required for every four nodes.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.19
Network Management Communications

Setting Option Notes

NMS TOH byte is being used for NMS traffic.

Terminate The TOH byte is set to all zeros. This should be used on xxC2 and xxC3 if not being used
to carry anything else.

TOH Byte Default Settings

TOH Byte Default Setting

f1C1, dcc9C1, dcc10C1, dcc11C1, Unassigned


dcc12C1, e2C1
e1C1 Time Stamp
dcc1C1, dcc2C1, dcc3C1, dcc4C1, Link Monitor
dcc5C1, dcc6C1, dcc7C1, dcc8C1
dcc1C2, dcc1C3, dcc2C2, dcc2C3, NMS
dcc3C2, dcc3C3, dcc4C2, dcc4C3,
dcc5C2, dcc5C3, dcc6C2, dcc6C3,
dcc7C2, dcc7C3, dcc8C2, dcc8C3,
dcc9C2, dcc9C3, dcc10C2, dcc10C3,
dcc11C2, dcc11C3, dcc12C2, dcc12C3
e1C2, e1C3, f1C2, f1C3, e2C2, e2C3 Terminate

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.20 Protected Line Module
Monitor

Monitor
Module Status

Monitor Point and


Units Notes
Settings

Module State Indicates state of the module


Offline Module has been disabled by the Server Module (8030-01)
Alarm Module has one or more active alarms
Active Backplane Module has an active backplane alarm
Alarm
Test Module is in test mode
Good Module is running normally without any other conditions
Module Temperature C Measured temperature of module
FPGA Temperature C Measured temperature of FPGA
3.3 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 3.3 V supply rail
2.5 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 2.5 V supply rail
1.8 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 1.8 V supply rail
1.5 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 1.5 V supply rail

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.21
Monitor

Monitor Point and


Units Notes
Settings

1.2 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 1.2 V supply rail


0.9 V Voltage V Measured voltage of 0.9 V supply rail
VCXO311 Voltage V Measured voltage of VCXO 311
VCXO125 Voltage V Measured voltage of VCXO 125
Current A Measured module supply current
VCXO155 Voltage V Measured voltage of VXCO155 for Port A/B. Only available in OC-3 mode.
(Port A/B)
VCXO155 Voltage V Measured voltage of VCXO155 for Port C/D. Only available in OC-3 mode.
(Port C/D)
Module Status A check mark in the box next to the status field indicates the status is currently in
alarm
High FPGA
Temperature
Low Module
Temperature
High Module
Temperature
3.3 V
2.5 V
1.8 V
1.5 V
1.2 V
0.9 V
Volt VCXO 311
Volt VCXO 125
Current Draw
Volt VCXO 155 A/B Only available in OC-3 mode
Volt VCXO 155 C/D Only available in OC-3 mode
RFU1
RFU2
Alert SEU
BSE Init Failure
LED Test Enable/Disable Enables or disables module LEDs
DS0 Groomed VTs 084 The number of DS0 Groomed VTs per PLM

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.22 Protected Line Module
Monitor

SONET Section Layer

Monitor Point Units Notes

Section Status No Defect Port not enabled, or no LOS or no LOF


LOS Loss of signal
LOF Loss of frame
LOS and LOF Loss of signal and loss of frame
Current Errored Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Seconds
Current Severely Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
Errored Seconds
Current Coding Current count of errors detected by the bit interleaved parity (BIP) checks at the remote
Violations node during the present interval
Trace Check Enabled True/False Enables section trace check
Trace Expected The value that is expected to be received in the section trace bytes. This value may only
be set to printable ASCII characters.
Trace Received If the value received does not match the expected value, an alarm will result
Trace to Send The message that is sent in the section trace bytes when the Trace Mode is set to Send
Configured. This message may only be set to printable ASCII characters.
Trace Mode
Disable Disable sending defined section trace message
Send Default Line Module will send node identifier to adjacent node in section trace message. This
identifier is used by SEL-5051 to determine network topology. This is the preferred
mode.
Send Configured Line Module will send a user-configured section trace message to the adjacent node.
The configured trace message must be 15 characters and will prevent full network
topology connectivity on the SEL-5051 Overview. This mode is provided mainly to
interoperate with other SONET vendors in possible section trace message requirements.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.23
Monitor

Monitor Point Units Notes

Bit Error Rate The section bit error rate (B1) at which the node reports an alarm and drops Line-AIS
Threshold
None
1e-4
1e-5
1e-6
1e-7
1e-8 N/A for OC-3
1e-9 N/A for OC-3 and OC-12
Interval Time Time duration of the performance monitor bin
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hr
6 hr
12 hr
1 day
Errored Seconds The ES-S parameter is a count of the number of seconds during which (at any point dur-
Today ing the second) at least one section BIP error was detected or a severely errored framing
(SEF) or loss of signal (LOS) defect was present.
Errored Seconds The ES-S parameter is a count of the number of seconds during which (at any point dur-
Yesterday ing the second) at least one BIP error was detected or an SEF or LOS defect was pres-
ent.
Severely Errored The SES-S parameter is a count of the seconds during which k or more Section BIP
Seconds Today errors were detected or a LOS defect was present. For OC-48 k = 2392, for OC-12
k = 616, and for OC-3 k = 155.
Severely Errored The SES-S parameter is a count of the seconds during which k or more section BIP
Seconds Yesterday errors were detected or a LOS defect was present. For OC-48 k = 2392, for OC-12
k = 616, and for OC-3 k = 155.
Coding Violations The CV-S parameter is a count of BIP errors detected at the Section layer (i.e., using the
Today B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal). As many as eight section BIP errors can be
detected per STS-N frame, with each error incrementing the CV-S current second coun-
ter. As many as 64000 errors can be detected per second.
Coding Violations The CV-S parameter is a count of BIP errors detected at the Section layer (i.e., using the
Yesterday B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal). As many as eight section BIP errors can be
detected per STS-N frame, with each error incrementing the CV-S current second coun-
ter. As many as 64000 errors can be detected per second.
Reset Statistics Reset the Section counters.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.24 Protected Line Module
Monitor

SONET Section
Interval

Monitor Point Units Notes

Intervals 131 Shows Section layer statistics for each interval


Interval Errored Seconds Count of errored seconds in selected interval
Interval Severely Errored Count of severely errored seconds in selected interval
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count of coding violations in selected interval
Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if data is valid for selected interval

SONET Line Layer

Monitor Point and


Units Notes
Settings

Line Status No Defect Port not enabled, or no AIS or no RDI


AIS
RDI
RDI and
AIS
Current Errored Seconds Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Current Severely Errored Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
Seconds
Current Coding Violations Current count of coding violations in the present interval
Current Far End Coding Current count of coding violations at the far end
Violations

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.25
Monitor

Monitor Point and


Units Notes
Settings

Bit Error Rate Threshold The line bit error rate (B2) at which the node reports an alarm and drops Line AIS
None
1e-4
1e-5
1e-6
1e-7
1e-8 N/A for OC-3
1e-9 N/A for OC-3 and OC-12
Interval Time Time duration of the performance monitor bin
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hr
6 hr
12 hr
1 day
Errored Seconds Today Near-end line errored seconds (ES-L). The ES-L parameter is a count of the seconds
during which (at any point during the second) at least one line BIP error was detected or
an AIS-L defect was present.
Errored Seconds Yesterday Near-end line errored seconds (ES-L). The ES-L parameter is a count of the seconds
during which (at any point during the second) at least one line BIP error was detected or
an AIS-L defect was present.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end line severely errored seconds (SES-L). The SES-L parameter is a count of the
Today seconds during which n or more Line BIP errors were detected or an AIS-L defect was
present. For OC-48 n = 2459, for OC-12 n = 615, and for OC-3 n = 154.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end line severely errored seconds (SES-L). The SES-L parameter is a count of the
Yesterday seconds during which n or more line BIP errors were detected or an AIS-L defect was
present. For OC-48 n = 2459, for OC-12 n = 615, and for OC-3 n = 154.
Coding Violations Today Near-end line coding violations (CV-L). The CV-L parameter is a count of BIP errors
detected at the line layer (i.e., using the B2 bytes in the incoming SONET signal). As
many as 8 N BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame, with each error increment-
ing the CV-L current second register. For OC-48, as many as 8 48 = 384 can be
detected per frame, with as many as 3072000 per second.
Coding Violations Near-end line coding violations (CV-L). The CV-L parameter is a count of BIP errors
Yesterday detected at the line layer (i.e., using the B2 bytes in the incoming SONET signal). As
many as 8 N BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame, with each error increment-
ing the CV-L current second register. For OC-48, as many as 8 48 = 384 can be
detected per frame, with as many as 3072000 per second.
Far End Line Coding Far-end line coding violations (CV-LFE). The CV-LFE parameter is a count of the num-
Violations Today ber of BIP errors that the far-end LTE detects and reports back to the near-end LTE
using the REI-L indication in the LOH. For SONET signals at rates below OC-48 and at
OC-768, as many as 8 N BIP errors per STS-N frame can be indicated using the REI-
L. For OC-48 and OC-192 signals, as many as 255 BIP errors per STS-N frame can be
indicated. The CV-LFE current second register is incremented for each BIP error indi-
cated by the incoming REI-L.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.26 Protected Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point and


Units Notes
Settings

Far End Line Coding Far-end line coding violations (CV-LFE). The CV-LFE parameter is a count of the num-
Violations Yesterday ber of BIP errors that the far-end LTE detects and reports back to the near-end LTE
using the REI-L indication in the LOH. For SONET signals at rates below OC-48, as
many as 8 N BIP errors per STS-N frame can be indicated using the REI-L. For OC-48
signals, as many as 255 BIP errors per STS-N frame can be indicated. The CV-LFE cur-
rent second register is incremented for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-L.
Reset Statistics Reset Reset the Line counters.

SONET Line Interval

Monitor Point Option Notes

Intervals 131 Shows Line layer statistics for each interval


Interval Errored Seconds Count of errored seconds in selected interval
Interval Severely Errored Count of severely errored seconds in selected interval
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count of coding violations in selected interval
Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if data is valid for selected interval
Far End Interval Coding Count of far end interval coding violations
Violations
Far End Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if far end interval data is valid

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.27
Monitor

SONET Path Statistics

Monitor Point Option Notes

Current Status
No Defect
STS LOP
STS AIS
STS RDI
Path
Unequipped
Path Signal
Label Mismatch
Current Width
STS1
STM1
STM4
STM16
Current Errored Seconds Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Current Severely Errored Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
Seconds
Current Coding Violations Current count of coding violations in the present interval
Current Far End Coding Current count of coding violations at the far end
Violations
Bit Error Rate Threshold The bit error rate at which the node reports an alarm
None
1e-4
1e-5
1e-6
1e-7

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.28 Protected Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

1e-8 Not for STS-1


1e-9 Not for STS-1 or STS-3c
Interval Time Time duration of the performance monitor bin
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hr
6 hr
12 hr
1 day
Errored Seconds Today Near-end STS path errored seconds (ES-P). The ES-P parameter is a count of the
seconds during which (at any point during the second) at least one STS path BIP
error was detected, or an AIS-P defect, an LOP-P defect, or UNEQ-P was present.
Errored Seconds Yesterday Near-end STS path errored seconds (ES-P). The ES-P parameter is a count of the
seconds during which (at any point during the second) at least one STS path BIP
error was detected, or an AIS-P defect, an LOP-P defect, or UNEQ-P was present.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end STS path severely errored seconds (SES-P). The SES-P parameter is a
Today count of the seconds during which 2400 or more STS path BIP errors were detected,
or an AIS-P defect, an LOP-P defect, or UNEQ-P was present.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end STS path severely errored seconds (SES-P). The SES-P parameter is a
Yesterday count of the seconds during which 2400 or more STS path BIP errors were detected,
or an AIS-P defect, an LOP-P defect, or UNEQ-P was present.
Coding Violations Today Near-end STS path coding violations (CV-P). The CV-P parameter is a count of BIP
errors detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte in the incoming STS
POH). As many as eight BIP errors can be detected per frame, with each error incre-
menting the CV-P current second counter.
Coding Violations Near-end STS path coding violations (CV-P). The CV-P parameter is a count of BIP
Yesterday errors detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte in the incoming STS
POH). As many as eight BIP errors can be detected per frame, with each error incre-
menting the CV-P current second counter.
Far End Path Coding Far-end STS path coding violations (CV-PFE). The CV-PFE parameter is a count of
Violations Today the number of BIP errors detected by the far-end STS PTE and reported back to the
near-end STS PTE using the REI-P indication in the STS POH. As many as eight
BIP errors per frame can be indicated. The CV-PFE current second counter is incre-
mented for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-P.
Far End Path Coding Far-end STS path coding violations (CV-PFE). The CV-PFE parameter is a count of
Violations Yesterday the number of BIP errors detected by the far-end STS PTE and reported back to the
near-end STS PTE using the REI-P indication in the STS POH. As many as eight
BIP errors per frame can be indicated. The CV-PFE current second counter is incre-
mented for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-P.
Reset Statistics Reset Reset all the Path counters.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.29
Monitor

Path Statistics
Interval

Monitor Point Option Notes

Intervals 131 Shows Path statistics for each interval


Interval Errored Seconds Count of errored seconds in selected interval
Interval Severely Errored Count of severely errored seconds in selected interval
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count of coding violations in selected interval
Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if data is valid for selected interval
Far End Interval Coding Count of far end interval coding violations
Violations
Far End Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if far end interval data is valid

Virtual Tributaries
(VT) Statistics

Monitor Point Option Notes

Defect Status
No Defect
LOP
AIS
RDI
RFI
Unequipped
Signal Label
Mismatch

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.30 Protected Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

Bit Error Rate Threshold The bit error rate at which the node reports an alarm
None
1e-4
1e-5
3e-6
Interval Time Time interval during which the data are sampled
15 min
30 min
1 hr
2 hr
6 hr
12 hr
1 day
Errored Seconds in Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Current Interval
Errored Seconds Today Near-end VT path errored seconds (ES-V). The ES-V parameter is a count of the sec-
onds during which (at any point during the second) at least one VT path BIP error was
detected, or an AIS-V defect, an LOP-V defect, or UNEQ-V was present.
Errored Seconds Yesterday Near-end VT path errored seconds (ES-V). The ES-V parameter is a count of the sec-
onds during which (at any point during the second) at least one VT path BIP error was
detected, or an AIS-V defect, an LOP-V defect, or UNEQ-V was present.
Severely Errored Seconds Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
in Current Interval
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end VT path severely errored seconds (SES-V). The SES-V parameter is a count
Today of the seconds during which 600 or more VT path BIP errors were detected, or an
AIS-V defect, an LOP-V defect, or an UNEQ-V was present.
Severely Errored Seconds Near-end VT path severely errored seconds (SES-V). The SES-V parameter is a count
Yesterday of the seconds during which 600 or more VT path BIP errors were detected, or an
AIS-V defect, an LOP-V defect, or an UNEQ-V was present.
Coding Violations in Current count of coding violations in the present interval
Current Interval
Coding Violations Today Near-end VT path coding violations (CV-V). The CV-V parameter is a count of BIP
errors detected at the VT path layer (i.e., using bits 1 and 2 of the V5 byte in the
incoming VT POH). As many as two BIP errors can be detected per VT superframe,
with each error incrementing the CV-V current second counter.
Coding Violations Near-end VT path coding violations (CV-V). The CV-V parameter is a count of BIP
Yesterday errors detected at the VT path layer (i.e., using bits 1 and 2 of the V5 byte in the
incoming VT POH). As many as two BIP errors can be detected per VT superframe,
with each error incrementing the CV-V current second counter.
Far End Line Coding Current count of far-end line coding violations in the present interval
Violations in Current Interval
Far End Line Coding Far-end VT path coding violations (CV-VFE). The CV-VFE parameter is a count of the
Violations Today number of BIP errors that the far-end VT PTE detects and reports back to the near-end
VT PTE using the REI-V indication in the VT path overhead. Note that only one BIP
error can be indicated per VT superframe by using the REI-V bit (out of the two BIP
errors that can be detected). The CV-VFE current second counter is incremented for
each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-V.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.31
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

Far End Line Coding Far-end VT path coding violations (CV-VFE). The CV-VFE parameter is a count of the
Violations Yesterday number of BIP errors that the far-end VT PTE detects and reports back to the near-end
VT PTE using the REI-V indication in the VT path overhead. Note that only one BIP
error can be indicated per VT superframe by using the REI-V bit (out of the two BIP
errors that can be detected). The CV-VFE current second counter is incremented for
each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-V.
Reset Statistics Reset Reset all the VT performance counters.

VT Statistics Interval

Monitor Point Option Notes

Interval 131 Shows VT statistics for each interval


Interval Errored Seconds Count of errored seconds in selected interval
Interval Severely Errored Count of severely errored seconds in selected interval
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count of coding violations in selected interval
Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if data is valid for selected interval
Far End Interval Coding Count of far end interval coding violations
Violations
Far End Interval Valid Data True/False Indicator for showing if far end interval data is valid

SONET Performance ICON supports the following Performance Monitoring (PM) counters for each
Section, Line, and Path (STS, VT) entity.
Monitoring
Table 4.5 Supported PM Counters

Far-End Path Far-End


Section Line
Line (STS, VT) Path

Errored Seconds (ES) x x x


Severely Errored Sec- x x x
onds (SES)
Coding Violation (CV) x x x x x

On each error event, a Current counter is incremented. There are also 31


previous interval counter bins. At the end of the user specified interval time
(15 minutes to 1 day) the Current counter is copied to Interval #1 bin, Interval
#1 bin is copied to Interval #2 bin, and so on, until the previous content of
Interval #31 bin is dropped. The Current counter is then cleared.
Interval bins that have not yet had data copied into them have their Valid Data
field set to False.
On each error event, a Today counter is also incremented. At the end of each
24-hour interval from the time the Line Module is rebooted, the Today counter
is copied to the Yesterday counter and the Today counter is cleared.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.32 Protected Line Module
Monitor

Now

Interval Interval Interval Current


#31 ... #2 #1

... Yesterday ... Today

Time

Figure 4.4 Registers

Each Reset Statistics button clears the Current, Interval, Today, and Yesterday
counters for one Section, Line, or Path entity.
PM counters will not increment above a maximum value of 4,294,967,295.

Link Monitor

Link Monitor provides statistics on the SONET link.

Monitor Point Option Notes

Link Up True/False Indicates whether SONET link is established


CRC Error Count Measured number of CRC errors
Abort Count Measured number of aborts
Receive Frames Pass- Measured number of received pass through frames
Through Count
Received Frames Termi- Count of received frames terminated at this node
nated Count
Number of Nodes Number of nodes in network
Good Tie True/False Indicator of node tie state
Reset Statistics Reset Button Reset link monitor counters

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Protected Line Module 4.33
Monitor

EPipe Statistics

EPipe statistics provides statistics on the EPipe traffic and Ethernet switch
queue.

Monitor Point Option Notes

Code Header Error Count Measured code header errors


Type Header Error Count Measured type header errors
Extension Header Error Measured extension header errors
Count
GFP-F Count Counts the number of GFP-F frames received
GFP Status Indicates status of GFP
Hunt
Presync
Idle Locked, no data
Receiving Receiving generic framing procedure data frame
Link Down Link status, indicates if there is a link break in the ring
True Link is down
False Link is up
Receive Frames Passed Count of received frames pass through node
Through
Receive Frames Terminated Count of received frames terminated at node
Egress Queue Priority Priority scheme to be used to manage Ethernet switch queues
Scheme
Strict Priority Ethernet traffic with the highest priority is sent first.
Weighted Weighed distribution Priority 7 = 50%, Priority 6 = 25%, Priority 5 = 12.5% ...
Round Robin Priority 0 = 0.4%

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


4.34 Protected Line Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Option Notes

Frames Added for Priority 0 Count of frames added to priority 0 queue (lowest priority)
Frames Added for Priority 1 Count of frames added to priority 1 queue
Frames Added for Priority 2 Count of frames added to priority 2 queue
Frames Added for Priority 3 Count of frames added to priority 3 queue
Frames Added for Priority 4 Count of frames added to priority 4 queue
Frames Added for Priority 5 Count of frames added to priority 5 queue
Frames Added for Priority 6 Count of frames added to priority 6 queue
Frames Added for Priority 7 Count of frames added to priority 7 queue (highest priority)
Frames Discarded for Count of frames discarded from priority 0 queue. Frames Discarded indicates when a
Priority 0 queue has overflowed and the Ethernet packet has been discarded.
Frames Discarded for Count of frames discarded from priority 1 queue
Priority 1
Frames Discarded for Count of frames discarded from priority 2 queue
Priority 2
Frames Discarded for Count of frames discarded from priority 3 queue
Priority 3
Frames Discarded for Count of frames discarded from priority 4 queue
Priority 4
Frames Discarded for Count of frames discarded from priority 5 queue
Priority 5
Frames Discarded for Count of frames discarded from priority 6 queue
Priority 6
Frames Discarded for Count of frames discarded from priority 7 queue
Priority 7

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Section 5
Server Module
Part Number 8030-01

Introduction
The Server Module performs many tasks in the SEL Integrated
Communications Optical Network (ICON) system. The primary role of the
Server Module is to provide the interface between the ICON and the
SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software or third-party
SNMP manager. The Server Module also contains a GPS satellite receiver for
network timing and for providing the real-time clock necessary for events
recording and for time distribution to connected IEDs.
The Server Module tracks and monitors the shelf inventory and holds a local
copy of the settings for all of the modules installed in the shelf. The local
copies of the settings allow the Server Module to reprogram replacement
modules with no need for the configuration software.
The Server Module also provides the alarm interface for the shelf. It provides
two Form C contacts to indicate a major and minor alarm condition at the
shelf.

Installation
The Server Module can only be installed in chassis slot 3. All modules in the
ICON are hot swappable, which means that the modules can be removed
and/or inserted while the system is powered and in operation. The Server
Module contains a copy of all other module settings and the local events
records.

Module Replacement Should the Server Module fail while in service, you can replace it with a new
Server Module. You must erase the replacement module prior to installation or
! CAUTION preprogram it for the node into which you intend to insert it into. The Server
When a Server Module from another Module contains the local sequential events recorder (SER) report, the backup
node is inserted into a shelf, the settings information for all modules in the shelf, and the shelf inventory.
settings from the previous node will
be applied to the shelf. An un-
configured Server Module will learn When the module is programmed and in service, the status LED will turn from
the settings of all of the hardware in red to green, as shown in Table 5.1. You will need to set the IP address on the
the shelf. However any specific Server
Module settings, e.g., Async port, module to match the previous module before you can participate in remote
IRIG-B input, etc., will need to be network management.
programmed separately.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


5.2 Server Module
Installation

Indicators
Module Status LED
USB NMS Interface

Future Use
NMS Link/Data LED
Ethernet NMS Interface

Future Use

Dry Contact Inputs

Major Alarm

Minor Alarm

IRIG-B Input LED IRIG-B Input

Antenna Fail LED


GPS LED GPS Antenna Connection

Figure 5.1 Server Module Connections and LED Indicators

Table 5.1 Status LED

Precedence Status LED Module Condition Details

0a Steady red Board dead Server Module asserts this condition when board
is unresponsive
1 Flashing red (4)b Boot error The bootloader cannot find a good image to boot
2 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is initializing the
module
3 Alternating red/blue (4)b FPGA load error The selected FPGA image is corrupted or missing
4 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting The module is ready and waiting for the Server
Module
5 Flashing yellow (4)b Disabled The Server Module has set the operational state to
disabled
6 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, VCXO, or temperature out of
range
7 Steady blue Test mode Any interface is in a test mode
8 Steady green Normal The module is enabled and okay
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Server Module 5.3
Installation

Manual System Reset You can use the provided jumper on connector J5 of the Server Module to
reset the modules in the ICON. This jumper affects not only the Server
! CAUTION Module, but all modules plugged into the chassis. Never use this jumper on a
Only bridge this jumper in a chassis live node.
that is not connected to the network!
Using it on a live node can affect all To access the jumper, remove the cover of the Server Module. Once you have
services on the network.
removed the Server Module card, insert the jumper across pins 1 and 2 of J5.
Insert the card into a test chassis, and the LED at the top of the card will light
as it boots up. The blue LED will start blinking when the operation is
complete.

Insert Jumper
! CAUTION
Equipment components are sensitive Backplane
to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Connector
Undetectable permanent damage J5
can result if you do not use proper
ESD procedures. Ground yourself,
your work surface, and this
equipment before removing any
cover from this equipment. If your
facility is not equipped to work with
these components, contact SEL
about returning this device and
related SEL equipment for service.

Serial
Ethernet Interface IRIG-B
GPS
Antenna Input

Figure 5.2 Reset Jumper Location on the Server Module

NMS Network The Server Module has two interfaces for network management: USB and
Ethernet. The USB type B connector is intended for local use only and will
Management Ports only operate with a PC that is running NMS. Use the USB port for initial setup
of a new node.
The Ethernet port is intended as the access point for remote network
management with NMS. You can also use third-party SNMP managers with
this port.

NMS Link/Data LED Table 5.2 NMS Link/Data LED

NMS Link/Data LED State

Steady green Link up and no data


Flashing red Problem with Ethernet signal
Flashing green Link up and Data in one/both directions
Double-flashing red Port disabled and user plugged in

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


5.4 Server Module
Specifications

Specifications
Hardware, General Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption < 0.5 W
Chassis Space Requirements Module slot 3 only
USB Interface Type B
Ethernet Interface 100 Mbit

GPS Receiver Satellite Tracking Supports SBAS (WAAS, EGNOS)


Sensitivity 160 dBm tracking sensitivity
Acquisition Time Cold start38 seconds typical
Warm start8 seconds (for signal loss less than 4 hours)
Clock Accuracy 500 ns peak
Antenna Requirements 3 or 5 V active antenna (setting required)

Hardware Inputs and Alarm Contacts 120 mA @ 250 V, contact resistance 35, AWG 2228 wire size
Outputs Inputs Dry contact only

Dry Contact Inputs


The Server Module can accept as many as three dry contact inputs. These
inputs create time-tagged events that you can read and display with NMS.

! CAUTION The dry contact inputs require access to an SEL-C575 cable. This cable is
These inputs are wetted by the Server designed for individual dry contact inputs only; therefore, one cable is
Module. Application of any voltage necessary for each of the three dry contact inputs. This cable does not come
source across the input will damage
the module. standard with the ICON and must be ordered separately.
NOTE: The Server Module scans and For each contact input, it is possible to define an alias and specify the alarm
samples the state of the contact
inputs every 100 ms. The contact
severity (major or minor). In the event of a contact input trigger, a time-
inputs should not be used in stamped event is generated which will be recorded in the alarm table with the
applications that require detection of corresponding defined alias and severity.
input events with faster than 100 ms
response times or where the trigger
event on the input signal is shorter SEL-C575
than 100 ms.

Figure 5.3 SEL-C575 Cable for Dry Contact Inputs

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Server Module 5.5
Contact Outputs

Contact Outputs
The Server Module has two relays, each with Form C contact outputs.
! CAUTION
The normally open and normally These relays are energized during normal operation (no alarms active).
closed designation on the label Contact output number 1 provides major alarm indication, while contact
represents the energized state of the
relay. Under normal operating output number 2 provides minor alarm indication. Contact outputs 1 and 2 are
conditions (no alarms active) these each wired through a single six-position compression terminal block.
relays are energized. Connect alarm
circuits to the normally open contact
for contact closure to indicate an
alarm condition.

NOTE: During the reboot of the


Server Module after a firmware
upgrade, the contact outputs generate
two momentary triggers. These
triggers do not indicate an alarm
event and applications that make use
of the contact outputs should be
aware of this behavior during a reboot
condition.

Contact 1 Major Alarm


Alarm Contact
Contact 2 Minor Alarm
Notes:
1. Alarm contacts are labeled per the energized
state. Alarms should be wired to the NO
or normally open contact. This will result in
a contact closure for the alarm condition.
2. Major Alarm is closed for any communications
issues on the transport system (SONET). This
includes fiber optic systems failures.
3. Minor alarm is closed for any channel module
issues.

Figure 5.4 Server Module Alarm Wiring Guide

IRIG-B Input
You can connect the IRIG-B BNC connector on the Server Module to an
external high-accuracy time source to provide an alternate source to the Line
Module. The preferable connection of this input is to an external GPS clock,
such as the SEL-2407 Satellite-Synchronized Clock, capable of providing an
unmodulated IRIG-B time signal. The external IRIG-B input signal must
provide the time quality bits defined in the IEEE C37.118 standard. An LED
is provided for indication of the input validity.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


5.6 Server Module
GPS Input

Table 5.3 IRIG-B Input LED

Steady green Valid IRIG-B data present


Steady red Invalid input

Input Specifications Table 5.4 IRIG-B Input Requirements

Signal format IRIG-B00X format


IRIG-B format IEEE C37.118 extended format
Accuracy 100 ns average, 500 ns peak
Time UTC
Connector BNC
Input resistance 2.3 k

GPS Input
A TNC connector on the bottom of the Server Module provides the connector
for a GPS antenna. GPS receiver operation is optional at each system node.
SEL recommends a minimum of two active receivers per system. The GPS
receiver uses a temperature-controlled crystal oscillator that provides
Stratum 1 synchronization.

LED Indicators Table 5.5 GPS LED

Off GPS is disabled


Steady green Receiver locked (output valid)
Steady red Loss of synchronization

Table 5.6 Antenna LED

Off GPS is disabled


Steady green Antenna system OK
Steady red Open or shorted antenna/cable

Antenna The Server Module provides voltage to power the antenna. You can set the
voltage to either 3 V or 5 V dc, with 5 V as the default setting. You must
install the GPS antenna in accordance with national electric codes. A clear
360-degree view of the sky is best. The antenna is housed in waterproof
packaging designed to withstand exposure to shock, excessive vibration,
extreme temperatures, rain, snow, and sunlight. Position the antenna so that
the radome points skyward. The GPS antenna should be located low and close
to the roof of the structure or enclosure containing the ICON. The antenna
should be located above maximum snow accumulation and away from roof
maintenance activities.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Server Module 5.7
GPS Time Distribution

GPS Time Distribution


Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Mode
Disabled
Monitor
Enabled
Time 2e28 seconds Latency introduced by the length of the antenna cable
Voltage Voltage required by the GPS antenna
0V
3V
5V
Low Current Threshold mA Current at which a low current alarm is generated
High Current Threshold mA Current at which a high current alarm is generated
Time Quality Threshold Meters If the GPS time quality exceeds the configured threshold value, then the GPS
will be taken out as a time source and an alarm will be raised

Status

Setting Option Notes

Time Quality meters GPS time quality. This is a measurement of uncertainty based on the most
recent time/position fix. Precision of the fix increases as the number
decreases. Range: 0 to 255 meters. A value of 0 is the best (represents the
most accurate fix), and 255 is the worst.
PTP s Most recent PTP time received (number of seconds since 01/01/1970)
Voltage mV Measured GPS antenna voltage. Range: 6 mV
Current mA Measured GPS antenna current. Range: 125 mA
Signal GPS signal status
Failed No signal is available
Fair Signal is of average quality
Good Signal is of good quality

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


5.8 Server Module
IRIG-B Time Distribution

Setting Option Notes

Version Current firmware running in the GPS module


Tracking
Tracking Status of GPS Receiver

Position Fix Doing position fixes


No GPS Time Do not have GPS time yet
High PDOPa PDOP is too high
Unusable Sat Chosen satellite is unreliable
No Usable Sat No usable satellites
Usable Sat1 Only one usable satellite
Usable Sat2 Only two usable satellites
Usable Sat3 Only three usable satellites
Over-Determined Tracking more satellites than minimum required
a PDOP = Position dilution of precision.

IRIG-B Time Distribution


Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Mode
Disabled
Monitor
Enabled
Trim 2e28 sec Latency introduced by the length of the antenna cable
Parity Standard
Inverted
Leap Seconds Previous To Latest Leap seconds before the leap event
Leap Event
Leap Seconds To Adjust At Latest Leap seconds from the leap event. The leap second adjustment must be set via
Leap Event SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software before an IRIG-B
timing source can be used.
Leap Event PTP seconds Leap event as number of PTP seconds
Leap Event Expiration PTP seconds Leap event expiration as number of PTP seconds. Alarm will assert when cur-
rent time exceeds the expiration.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Server Module 5.9
IRIG-B Time Distribution

Status

Monitor Point Option Notes

Quality Time quality indicator code per IEEE-C37.118.


Locked Normal operation, clock locked
Within 1 ns Time within 1 ns, clock unlocked
Within 10 ns Time within 10 ns, clock unlocked
Within 100 ns Time within 100 ns, clock unlocked
Within 1 s Time within 1 s, clock unlocked
Within 10 s Time within 10 s, clock unlocked
Within 100 s Time within 100 s, clock unlocked
Within 1 ms Time within 1 ms, clock unlocked
Within 10 ms Time within 10 ms, clock unlocked
Within 100 ms Time within 100 ms, clock unlocked
Within 1 s Time within 1 s, clock unlocked
Within 10 s Time within 10 s, clock unlocked
Within 100 s Time within 100 s, clock unlocked
Unreliable Clock failure, time not reliable
Time Current IRIG-B time, converted to PTP time
Raw IRIG-B Data IRIG-B data
Signal IRIG-B signal status
Failed No signal is available
Fair Signal is of average quality
Good Signal is of good quality
Errored Seconds Errored seconds (parity errors)
Reset Statistics Resets counters

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


5.10 Server Module
Node

Node
Settings

Setting Option Notes

Name The nodes alias string, as assigned by NMS


IP Address New IP address
Net Mask
Default Gateway
MAC Address

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Section 6
Nx64F Submodule
Part Number 8051-01

Introduction
The Nx64F Data Submodule provides a fiber-optic 64 to 768 kbps
synchronous interface. Set the data rate for this interface in multiples of
64 kbps, where N = 1 to 12 (64 kbps/DS0) time slots. This interface has two
options: Nx64F multimode fiber (MMF) (part number 8051-01) for use over
multimode fiber-optic cable, and Nx64F single-mode fiber (SMF) (part
number 8051-02) for use over single-mode fiber-optic cable. The Nx64F mm
Submodule complies with the IEEE C37.94 standard. The Nx64F SMF uses
the IEEE C37.94 modulation with single-mode fiber-optic components that
the IEEE C37.94-2002 standard does not cover.

Installation
The Nx64F Submodule is installed into one of the four submodule slots in the
Quattro Module. All modules in the SEL Integrated Communications Optical
Network (ICON) are hot swappable, meaning that the modules can be
removed and/or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should a submodule fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
submodule. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new submodule (in the
same Quattro submodule slot) and transfer the existing settings onto the new
submodule. When you have completed programming the submodule and it is
in service, the status LED will turn from red to green.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


6.2 Nx64F Submodule
Installation

Indicators Status

Data IN

Data OUT

Table 6.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED

Board LED Submodule


Precedence Description
Statusa Condition

0 Flashing red (4)b Boot error The bootloader cannot find a good
image to boot
1 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is
initializing the submodule
2 Alternating red/ FPGA load The selected FPGA image is
blue (4)b error corrupted or missing
3 Flashing blue Waiting Submodule is ready and waiting for
the Server Module
4 Double-flashing Disabled Server Module has set the
yellowc, d operational state to disabled
5 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, VCXO, or
temperature out of range
6 Steady blue Test mode An interface is in a test mode
7 Steady green Normal Enabled and no errors
a Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.
c Double-flash has two flashes per second at the 4-Hz rate.
d This will happen when a new module is inserted and until accepted by the user (right-click the
node picture in SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software.)

Table 6.2 Data IN LED

Precedence LED Status Description

0 Dark Port disabled


1 Steady Red Optic input error: framing, parity, loss of signal (LOS)
2 Steady Yellow Far-end failure on received optical signal
3 Flashing Green Received bytes changing (normal status)
4 Steady Green Received bytes not changing

Table 6.3 Data OUT LED (Sheet 1 of 2)

Precedence LED Statusa Description

0 Dark No paths assigned


1 Steady red All DPaths are bad
2 Blinking redb, Bad DPath, but at least one path is still good, tx bytes
flashing green (4)c counted
3 Blinking redb, Bad DPath, but at least one path is still good, tx data
steady green steady state
4 Steady yellow FEFI received on all DPaths
5 Blinking yellowb, FEFI received, but at least one path is still good, tx
flashing green (4) bytes counted

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Nx64F Submodule 6.3
Specifications

Table 6.3 Data OUT LED (Sheet 2 of 2)

Precedence LED Statusa Description

6 Blinking yellowb, FEFI received, but at least one path is still good, tx
steady green data steady state
7 Flashing green (4) Line active data present
8 Steady green Line okay, steady state data
a Not all states apply to all port types.
b Blinking cadence is 125 ms on, 875 ms off.
c Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption < 0.7 W
Chassis Space Requirements 1 Quattro submodule slot
Data Rate 64 to 768 kbps (64 kbps increments)

SEL-8051-01 SEL-8051-02
MMF, 50 m (62.5 m) SMF (future)

Wavelength 850 nm 1310 nm


Maximum Transmit Level 11 dBm tbd
Minimum Transmit Level 23 dBm (19 dBm) tbd
Maximum Receive Level 11 dBm tbd
Minimum Receive Level 32 dBm tbd

Settings and Status


To use the SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software to
access the details of this submodule, perform the following steps.
Step 1. Go to the device design page in the software.
The software will display a rendering of the node you have
selected.
Step 2. On the node rendering, double-click on the Nx64F Submodule
you want.
At the bottom left of the screen, Nx64F will appear.
Step 3. Use the expansion button to the left of Nx64F to view the rest
of the file tree.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


6.4 Nx64F Submodule
Settings and Status

Drop Port
Configuration

Setting or Monitored Value Option Notes

Port Alias User-assigned name for port


Port Enabled
Up Port is enabled
Down Port is disabled
Port Data Rate 64 kbps to 768 kbps
64 kbps
128 kbps
192 kbps
256 kbps
320 kbps
384 kbps
448 kbps
512 kbps
576 kbps
640 kbps
704 kbps
768 kbps
Test Mode Normal No loopback in place
Drop Port Loopback Loops the port back on itself
Line Loopback Loops the line back to the remote end
Both Loops both line and drop port
Optic Low Power Alert 37 to 7.5 dBm Power level, in dBm, at which the unit will generate this alert
Optic Low Power Alarm 37 to 7.5 dBm Power level, in dBm, at which the unit will generate the Low Power alarm
Optic High Power Alarm 37 to 7.5 dBm Power level, in dBm, at which the unit will generate the High Power alarm

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Nx64F Submodule 6.5
Settings and Status

(Best Path Selection)


Left DPath 116 SEL-5051
Line Circuit/Test Data Source
Modules OR
Drops Right DPath 116
FIFO Fiber Nx64 kbps
all DPaths Driver Optic Output
SEL-5051
Test Monitors Drop
PRBS
Monitor 1

SEL-5051
PRBS Port Configuration/
Monitor 2 Loopbacks

SEL-5051
Test Generator 1 Line
PRBS etc.
Left DPath 116
Line FIFO
Modules Fiber Nx64 kbps
Adds Right DPath 116 Receiver Optic Input

Figure 6.1 Nx64F PRBS Test Generator, Monitors, and Loopbacks

Circuit

Setting or Monitored Value Option Notes

User Circuit Address 065535 User circuit address (UCAD) to be sent to the remote module
Expected User Circuit Address 065535 The expected UCAD to be received from the remote module
Use Far End Failure Indication True/False Switch on Yellowthis setting is required to prevent channel
asymmetries
Revertive Time-Out Off, 0 to 25.4 seconds The recovery time of the DPath after network restoration
DPaths Check box field, DPath DPaths assigned to the submodule. One usually is assigned from
116 for left (Port A/C) left and right to provide full protection for the channel. Two are
and right (Port B/D) ports assigned for quad-homing (multi-ring) network topologies. Left is
fiber ports A or C, right is fiber ports B or D.
Active DPath Right/Left Indicates which direction the channel is currently using, right or left
Test Data Source List of data sources for test

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


6.6 Nx64F Submodule
Settings and Status

Left and Right Port

Setting or Monitored Value Option Notes

Priority 031 The priority of the DPath. The lower the number, the higher the pri-
ority. The submodule will choose the DPath with the highest priority.
Network Path Address 065535 Network path address (NPAD) to send to the circuits far-end access
module
Expected Network Path Address 065535 NPAD that is expected from circuits far-end access module
Received Network Path Address 065535 NPAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
(read only)
User Circuit Address Received 065535 UCAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
DPipe 014 DPipe assigned to the DPath
Ingress Latency s Latency of DPath from the far end
Egress Latency s Latency of DPath to the far end
Link Bad True/False False indicates that the link is good, true indicates the link is bad
Test Data Source The number of the DPath or test generator to use as source data for
the test. The test generator type is selected under the test generator
tab.
DS0 Check applicable boxes Used to select which N + 1 DS0 Bytes on the VT1.5 will be used
in box fields 124 (N = 1 to 12)
Errored Seconds Increments by one for each second during which the DPath (out of
band) PRBS error monitor recorded an error
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Nx64F Submodule 6.7
Monitor

Monitor
Port Statistics

Monitor Point Units Notes

Input Power dBm Fiber-optic input power in dBma


Received Number of Nx64 124 The number of Nx64 channels used by the connected IED
Input Cumulative Error Count Number The total number of errors accumulated since the last counter reset
Input Errored Seconds Seconds A count of the number of seconds during which (at any point during
the second) at least one bit error was detected in the received Nx64
optic signal
Input Severely Errored Seconds Seconds A count of the number of severely errored seconds during which at
least one LOS (per IEEE C37.94 clause 5.1) was detected
Input Bit Error Rate Errors per second
Reset Statistics Resets all of the above counters
a A display of 37 dBm means anything below 36 dBm.

Module Status Environmental parameters read from the submodule itself.

Setting Option Notes

Temperature Degrees C Module temperature in Celsius. The temperature can vary from
35 to +95C, inclusive. The alarm will be set if the temperature
goes out of this range and will clear when it returns to range
(30C to +90C).
5V Shelf Voltage V +5 V shelf voltage. If this voltage exceeds 10% (< 4.5 V or > 5.5 V),
the out-of-range alarm will be set. It will clear when voltage returns
to the 5% range.
3.3V Internal Voltage V +3.3 V internal voltage. If the voltage exceeds 10% (< 3.00 V or
> 3.60 V), the out-of-range alarm will be set. The alarm will clear
when voltage returns to the 5% range.
1.2V Internal Voltage V +1.2 V internal voltage. If the voltage exceeds 10% (< 1.08 V or
> 1.32 V), the out-of-range alarm will be set. The alarm will clear
when voltage returns to the 5% range.
Current mA Monitors the current draw of the submodule
LED Test Enabled/Disabled Sequences through all of the LED states

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


6.8 Nx64F Submodule
Testing

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incre-
mented by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be
Seconds incremented by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on Port A/C
Port A/C DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port A/C Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since the last counter reset
Count
Port B/D Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incre-
mented by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be
Seconds incremented by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on Port B/D
Port B/D DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port B/D Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since the last counter reset
Count
Reset Statistics Resets all of the above counters

Testing
Test Generator The Nx64F Submodule includes a PRBS test generator and two PRBS
pattern-error monitors, for simultaneous testing of the end-to-end DPaths, and
the connection to the attached end device (the PRBS pattern is the common
2047-bit [2e-11].)
Note that the PRBS generator/monitors are independent of the DPath PRBS
generator/monitor which continually monitors all the DPaths integrity.
Though offered, the other patterns are not of use in normal maintenance
debugging.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Nx64F Submodule 6.9
Testing

Setting Option Notes

Test Mode Increment per Byte Each byte has a value one larger than the previous
PRBS Generator PRBS generator (2047-bit [2e-11])
Increment per Frame Each frame has a value one larger than the previous
Pattern F0 All bytes in each frame set to 0xF0
Pattern 5A All bytes in each frame set to 0x5A
Pattern A5 All bytes in each frame set to 0xA5
Pattern 00 All bytes in each frame set to 0x00
Pattern FF All bytes in each frame set to 0xFF
Test Rate 131 Test generation rate in increments of 64 kbps
For example, set to match the N of the submodule.

Test Monitor 1 and 2

Setting Option Notes

Traffic Source The DPath, circuit, or test port to use as the source for PRBS error
monitor (see Figure 6.1). The source must be a 2047 bit PRBS pat-
tern.
Cumulative Error Count The total number of errors accumulated since the last counter reset
Errored Seconds Cumulative number of seconds in which errors occurred
Severely Errored Seconds
Error Rate Errors per second
Reset Statistics Reset the above values

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


6.10 Nx64F Submodule
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Table 6.4 lists some common issues and probable causes for these conditions.

Table 6.4 Troubleshooting the Nx64F Submodule

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Data IN LED is solid red ICON is not receiving a valid C37.94 opti- Check for proper optical receive level
cal signal from the IED
There is an optical input error, i.e., fram- Check for a possible N channel mis-
ing, parity, LOS match
Data IN LED is solid yellow The connected IED is not receiving a valid Check fiber to connected IED
IEEE C37.94 optical signal Check remote IED for alarms and
Far-end failure error being received from faults
connected IED
Data IN LED is solid green Good C37.94 signal is being received, but Check connected IED to ensure data is
received data is not changing being sent
Data IN LED is not yellow when the The connected device/IED is not compli- Ensure that the connected device/IED
OUT fiber removed ant with the IEEE C37.94 standard (e.g., complies with the IEEE C.37.94 stan-
some SEL relays) dard
Data OUT LED is solid red There are no good DPaths available from Debug all the configured ICON
the remote ICON node DPaths for proper connectivity
Data OUT LED is flashing red Bad DPath, but at least one path is still Debug all bad DPaths (may be incor-
good rectly configured)
Data OUT or Data IN LED is off Port is disabled Enable and configure port

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Section 7
Async Data Submodule
Part Number 8053-01

Introduction
The Async Data Submodule provides as many as six asynchronous electrical
circuits over two RJ45 connectors. This interface is electrically compatible
with EIA-232C, EIA-422, and the EIA-485 standards. In an application that
uses a single EIA-232 circuit per connector, wire the RJ45 connector on the
Async Submodule per the EIA-561 standard. Other applications will require
adaptor cables.

Operating Modes Each of the two connectors on the Async Data Submodule can operate in the
following modes:
One port EIA-232 with RTS, CTS, DSR, DTR, and DCD
support
Two ports EIA-232 with DSR, DTR, and DCD support
Three ports EIA-232 with DSR output
One port EIA-422
One port EIA-485 (2-wire or 4-wire)

For applications requiring time, an IRIG-B (DCLS) can be output on the


DCD, CTS, or DSR pins if a valid synchronized and consistent clock source is
available to the SEL Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON).
One port may be connected to multiple ports using as many as eight circuits in
a point to multipoint configuration. This multiple circuit connection is
intended for a single, common port that communicates with multiple remote
ports, though expects only one remote port to respond at a time. Data input at
the common port will be transmitted over the ICON to all remote ports. Data
input at remote ports will be logically ORed with all other multipoint ports.
Remote ports that are not transmitting data into the network will keep their
data input at a nonmark (idle) level.

Installation
The Async Data Submodule occupies one of the four submodule slots in the
Quattro Module. All modules in the ICON are hot swappable, meaning that
the modules can be removed and/or inserted while the system is powered and
in operation.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


7.2 Async Data Submodule
Installation

Module Replacement Should a submodule fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
submodule. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new submodule (in the
same Quattro Module slot) and transfer the existing settings onto the new
submodule. When the submodule is programmed and in service, the status
LED will turn from slow blinking blue to green.

LED Indicators The Async Data Submodule has five multicolor LED indicators. These
provide indication of the submodule status and data activity. Figure 7.1 shows
the location and function of these LEDs. Table 7.1 through Table 7.3 provide a
legend for the LEDs and what each color state indicates.

Status

Data IN

Data OUT

Data IN

Data OUT

Figure 7.1 Async LED Location and Function

Table 7.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED

Board LED Submodule


Precedence Description
Statusa Condition

0 Steady red Board dead The Server Module asserts this condi-
tion when the board is unresponsive
1 Flashing blue (4) Booting An image has been loaded and is
initializing the submodule
2 Alternating red/ FPGA load The selected FPGA image is
blue (4) error corrupted or missing
3 Flashing blue (1) Waiting Submodule is ready and waiting for
the Server Module
4 Double-flashing Disabled Server Module has set the operational
yellowb state to disabled
5 Flashing red (1) Alarm Voltage, current, or temperature out
of range
6 Flashing red (4) Backplane Backplane communications failure
alarm
7 Steady blue Test mode Test mode enabled by: port loopback,
port test mode, or DPath test data
8 Steady green Normal Enabled and no errors
a Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.
b Double-flash has two flashes per second at the 4-Hz rate.

Each of the upper and lower LEDs summarizes the state of as many as three
ports on each connector. For example, if Port 1 is receiving data and Port 2 is
in error, then the LED will show the error state.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Async Data Submodule 7.3
Installation

Table 7.2 Data IN LED

Precedence LED Status Description

0 Dark Port disabled


1 Steady red At least one port Data In has a framing or parity error
2 Flashing red (1) At least one port Data In has a PRBS error (only in
PRBS test mode)
3 Flashing green (4) Port enabled, at least one port Data In is receiving
data
4 Steady green Port enabled, no data received

Table 7.3 Data OUT LED

Precedence LED Statusa Description

0 Dark Port disabled


1 Steady red All DPaths on at least one data circuit are bad
2 Blinking redb, Bad DPath, but at least one path is still good, TX
flashing green (4)c bytes counted
3 Blinking red, Bad DPath, but at least one path is still good, TX
steady green data steady state
4 Steady yellow FEFI received on all DPaths
5 Blinking yellow, FEFI received, but at least one path is still good, TX
flashing green (4) bytes counted
6 Blinking yellow, FEFI received, but at least one path is still good, TX
steady green data steady state
7 Flashing green (4) Line active data present
8 Steady green Line okay, steady state data
a Not all states apply to all port types.
b Blinking cadence is 125 ms on, 875 ms off.
c Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


7.4 Async Data Submodule
Installation

Connections and
Cables for All
Operating Modes
EIA-232 Single Circuit Operating Mode
Use the following connections for a single EIA-232 circuit. The SEL-C616
cable is recommended. Figure 7.2 shows the connection diagram and the
signal flow directions for this application.

ASYNC Data DTE Device


RJ45 Male SEL-C616 DB-9 Male
Pin Pin
Func. Pin # Pin # Func.
DSR * 1 6 DSR*
DCD * 2 1 DCD*
DTR 3 4 DTR
Com 4 5 Com
RXD 5 2 RXD
TXD 6 3 TXD
CTS * 7 8 CTS*
RTS 8 7 RTS
Shield
Signal Flow
* User-selectable sources:
0 or 1
Local input RTS or DTR
Far-end input RTS or DTR
IRIG-B local or UTC time (if available)
PPS
Figure 7.2 SEL-C616 Cable for Data Plus Control Line Diagram

EIA-232 Dual Circuit Operating Mode


Use the following connections for two EIA-232 circuits. The SEL-C611 cable
is recommended. Figure 7.3 shows the connection diagram and the signal flow
directions for this application.

ASYNC Data DTE Device


RJ45 Male SEL-C611 DB-9 Female
Pin Pin
Func. Pin # Pin # Func.
Circuit 1
DSR * 1 3 TXD
DCD * 2 2 RXD
DTR 3 5 Com
Com 4
RXD 1 5 Circuit 2
TXD 1 6 5 Com
RXD2 7 3 TXD
TXD2 8 2 RXD
Shield
Signal Flow
* User-selectable sources:
0 or 1
Local input RTS or DTR
Far-end input RTS or DTR
IRIG-B local or UTC time
PPS
Figure 7.3 SEL-C611 Cable Diagram for Two Circuits Per Port

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Async Data Submodule 7.5
Installation

ASYNC Data
RJ45 Male
Pin
Func. Pin #
DSR * 1
DCD * 2
DTR 3
Com 4 User
RXD1 5 Connector(s)
TXD1 6
RXD2 7
TXD2 8
Shield
Signal Flow
* User-selectable sources:
0 or 1
Local input RTS or DTR
Far-end input RTS or DTR
IRIG-B local or UTC time (if available)
PPS
Figure 7.4 Dual Circuit Custom Cable

EIA-232 Triple Circuit Operating Mode


Use the following connections for three EIA-232 circuits.

ASYNC Data
RJ45 Male
Pin
Func. Pin #
DSR * 1
RXD3 2
TXD3 3
Com 4 User
RXD1 5 Connector(s)
TXD1 6
RXD2 7
TXD2 8
Shield
Signal Flow
* User-selectable sources:
0 or 1
Local input RTS or DTR
Far-end input RTS or DTR
IRIG-B local or UTC time
PPS
Figure 7.5 Triple Circuit Custom Cable

EIA-422 or EIA-485 (4W) Operating Mode


NOTE: For EIA-485 2-wire For applications that require longer distances and/or better than EIA-232
applications connect an external
jumper between Pins 5 and 6 and immunity to interference, the EIA-422 balanced signal format is often used.
between Pins 7 and 8. The EIA-485 adds tristate drivers for multidevice applications. The SEL-C607
cable is recommended for these applications. Figure 7.6 shows the connection
diagram and the signal flow directions for such an application.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


7.6 Async Data Submodule
Installation

ASYNC Data DTE Device


RJ45 Male SEL-C607 Tinned Wire
Pin Pin
Func. Pin # Func.
TXD+ 6 TXD+
TXD 8 TXD
Com 4 Com
RXD+ 5 RXD+
RXD 7 RXD
Shield Shield
Signal Flow
Figure 7.6 SEL-C607 Cable Diagram for EIA-422 or EIA-485 4-Wire

ASYNC Data
RJ45 Male
Pin
Func. Pin #
IRIG-B 1
IRIG-B+ 2
N/C 3
Comm 4 User
RXD+ 5 Connector(s)
TXD+ 6
RXD 7
TXD 8
Shield
Signal Flow
Figure 7.7 4W Custom Cable

EIA-485 (2W) Operating Mode


In this mode, the RXD+/ and TXD +/ must be connected together.

ASYNC Data
RJ45 Male
Pin
Func. Pin #
IRIG-B 1
IRIG-B+ 2
N/C 3
Comm 4 User
RXD+ 5 Connector(s)
TXD+ 6
2-Wire
RXD 7
TXD 8
Shield
Signal Flow
Figure 7.8 2W Custom Cable

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Async Data Submodule 7.7
Settings and Status

Settings and Status


To use the SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software to
access the details of this submodule, perform the following steps.
Step 1. Go to the device design page in the software.
The software will display a rendering of the node you have selected.
Step 2. On the node rendering, double-click on the Async Submodule
you want.
At the bottom left of the screen, Async Module will appear.
Step 3. Use the expansion button to the left of Async Module to view
the rest of the settings tree.
The next level will expose Physical Connector 1, Physical
Connector 2, and Backplane Slot Statistics. The following tables
explain the settings and data you can view starting from this point.

Physical Connectors

Setting Option Notes

Connection Mode Serial port operating mode


Single EIA-232 with Port is configured for one serial port with support for RTS, CTS, DSR, DTR, and
control DCD
Dual EIA-232 Port is configured for two EIA-232 serial ports with support for DSR, DTR, and
DCD
Triple EIA-232 Port is configured for three EIA-232 serial ports with support for DSR
EIA-422 4-Wire 1 EIA-422 serial port
EIA-485 4-Wire 1 full-duplex EIA-485 serial port
EIA-485 2-Wire 1 standard EIA-485 half-duplex serial port
CTS Source Only available when flow control is included in the selection mode
Logical 0 Results in a 0 on CTS
Logical 1 Results in a 1 on CTS
RTS Loops CTS from RTS
DTR Loops CTS from DTR
Far-End RTS The RTS input from the serial port at the other end of the circuit is available at the
local CTS output
Far-End DTR The DTR input from the serial port at the other end of the circuit is available at the
local CTS output
UTC IRIG-B Produce the IRIG-B signal with UTC time on the CTS pin (if available)
Local IRIG-B Produce the IRIG-B signal with local time on the CTS pin (if available)
PPS Timing Signal Produce the PPS timing signal on the CTS pin (if available)

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


7.8 Async Data Submodule
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

DSR Source Only available when flow control is included in the selection mode. Use for 4W
mode IRIG-B differential output.
Logical 0 Results in a 0 on DSR
Logical 1 Results in a 1 on DSR
RTS Loops DSR from RTS
DTR Loops DSR from DTR
Far-End RTS The RTS input from the serial port at the other end of the circuit is available at the
local DSR output
Far-End DTR The DTR input from the serial port at the other end of the circuit is available at the
local DSR output
UTC IRIG-B Produce the IRIG-B signal with UTC time on the DSR pin (if available)
Local IRIG-B Produce the IRIG-B signal with Local time on the DSR pin (if available)
PPS Timing Signal Produce the PPS timing signal on the DSR pin (if available)
DCD Source Only available when flow control is included in the selection mode
Logical 0 Results in a 1 on DCD
Logical 1 Results in a 0 on DCD
RTS Loops DCD from RTS
DTR Loops DCD from DTR
Far-End RTS The RTS input from the serial port at the other end of the circuit is available at the
local DCD output
Far-End DTR The DTR input from the serial port at the other end of the circuit is available at the
local DCD output
UTC IRIG-B Produce the IRIG-B signal with UTC time on the DCD pin (if available)
Local IRIG-B Produce the IRIG-B signal with Local time on the DCD pin (if available)
PPS Timing Signal Produce the PPS timing signal on the DCD pin (if available)
Event High Mask Creates an event log entry when DTR or RTS changes state from low to high
(Should only be used for troubleshooting the interface)
Event Low Mask Creates an event log entry when DTR or RTS changes state from high to low
(Should only be used for troubleshooting the interface)

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Async Data Submodule 7.9
Settings and Status

Data Formats

Setting Options Notes

Port Alias User-assigned name for serial port


Port Enabled
Up Port is enabled
Down Port is disabled
Data Rate Port speed setting
115.2 kbps
57.6 kbps
38.4 kbps
19.2 kbps
9600 bps
4800 bps
2400 bps
1200 bps
600 bps
300 bps
110 bps
Data Bits Number of data bits used
5
6
7
8
Stop Bits
1
1.5
2

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


7.10 Async Data Submodule
Settings and Status

Setting Options Notes

Hold Over N/A Delay of EIA-485 output transition from drive to tristate. Period is 0 to 63 bit
period / 16
Parity Data parity
None
Odd
Even
Test Mode Sends test pattern out to local port (per port)
Normal No test pattern generated
PBRS Transmit PRBS pattern (repetitive 2047 bits)
Pattern 00 Transmits all zeros
Pattern 11 Transmits all ones
Pattern 5A Transmits all 5A16 (ASCII Z)
Pattern A5 Transmit all A516
Pattern 61 Transmit all 6116 (ASCII a)
Pattern 37 Transmit all 3716 (ASCII 7)
Test Rate 17534289 UI Allows the user to adjust the rate of generation of test characters. This is useful
when using a terminal emulation program, such as ProComm or HyperTerminal,
to monitor the test. To calculate the character rate of the test divide the speed of the
port by the selected test rate. This gives the actual rate at which the characters are
sent, for example,
Port speed = 9600 bps
Test rate = 17
9600 / 17 = 564.7 characters per second
Loopback
Normal
Drop Port Loopback
Line Port Loopback
Both
Ingress PRBS Enable/Disable Enables and disables ingress PRBS counters
Counters
Circuit Check box field 18 Circuits to which the Async Data Port is assigned:
Connector 1, Port 1 connects to Circuit 1
Connector 1, Port 2 connects to Circuit 2
Connector 1, Port 3 connects to Circuit 3
Connector 2, Port 1 connects to Circuit 5
Connector 2, Port 2 connects to Circuit 6
Connector 2, Port 3 connects to Circuit 7
Each port has a dedicated circuit, as shown. For point-to-multipoint operation, addi-
tional circuits may be selected as long as those circuits are not used by another con-
figured port.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Async Data Submodule 7.11
Settings and Status

Circuits

Setting Option Notes

User Circuit Address 065535 User circuit address (UCAD) to be sent to the remote module
Expected User Circuit 065535 The expected UCAD to be received from the remote module
Address
Use Far End Failure Indi- True/False Use far-end failure indication (FEFI). Set for circuits requiring go and return
cator paths over the same equipment.
Revertive Time-Out Off, 025.4 seconds The recovery time of the DPath after network restoration
DPaths Checkbox field, DPaths assigned to the Async Submodule. A minimum of two must be assigned
DPath 1 through 16 to provide full protection for the channel.
for Left (Port A/C)
and Right (Port B/D)
Active DPath Indicates which direction the channel is currently using. 116 is going out SFP
A/C and SFP B/D.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


7.12 Async Data Submodule
Settings and Status

Left and Right DPath

Setting Option Notes

Priority 031 The priority of the DPath. The lower the number, the higher the priority.
The submodule will choose the DPath with the highest priority.
Network Path Address 065535 Network path address (NPAD) to send to the circuits far-end access
module
Expected Network Path Address 065535 NPAD that is expected from circuits far-end access module (read only)
Received Network Path Address 065535 NPAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module (read
only)
User Circuit Address Received 065535 UCAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
DPipe 041 DPipe assigned to the DPath
Ingress Latency s Latency of DPath from the far end
Egress Latency s Latency of DPath to the far end
Link Bad True/False False indicates that the link is good, True indicates the link is bad (read
only)
Test Data Source The number of the DPath or test generator to use as source data for the
test. The test generator type is selected under the Test Generator tab.
DS0 Used to select which one or two (for 115.2 kbps) DS0 Bytes on the
VT1.5 will be used
Errored Seconds
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Async Data Submodule 7.13
Monitor

Monitor
Port Statistics

Monitor Point Units Notes

Received Character Count Number The total number of characters received since the last reset (Data In)
Transmitted Character Number The total number of characters transmitted since the last reset (Data Out)
Count
Frame Cumulative Error Number The total number of framing errors since the last reset
Count
Frame Errored Seconds Seconds The total number of seconds with one or more framing errors since the last time
the counters were reset
Parity Cumulative Error Number The total number of parity errors since the last time the counters were reset
Count
Parity Errored Seconds Seconds The total number of seconds with one or more parity errors since the last time
the counters were reset
PRBS Cumulative Error Number The total number of PRBS errors since the last time the counters were reset
Count (assuming that the port is receiving a 2047 bit PRBS pattern)
PRBS Errored Seconds Seconds The total number of seconds with one or more PBRS errors since the last time
the counters were reset
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

Unit Status Environmental parameters read from the submodule itself.

Setting Option Notes

Module State
Offline Module has been disabled by the Server Module (8030-01)
Alarm Module has one or more active alarms
Active Backplane Module has an active backplane alarm
Alarm

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


7.14 Async Data Submodule
Monitor

Setting Option Notes

Test Module is in test mode


Good Module is running normally without any other conditions
Temperature Degrees C Module temperature in Celsius. The temperature can vary from 35.0 to
+95.0C, inclusive. The alarm will be set if the temperature goes out of this
range and will clear when it returns to range (30.0 to +90C).
5V Shelf Voltage V +5 V shelf voltage. If voltage exceeds 10% (< 4.5 V or > 5.5 V), an out-of-
range alarm will be set. This alarm clears if the voltage returns to 5% range.
3.3V Internal Voltage V +3.3 V internal voltage. If voltage exceeds 10% (< 3.00 V or > 3.60 V), an out-
of-range alarm will be set. This alarm clears if the voltage returns to 5% range.
1.2V Internal Voltage V +1.2 V internal voltage. If voltage exceeds 10% (< 1.08 V or > 1.32 V), an out-
of-range alarm will be set. This alarm clears if the voltage returns to 5% range.
Current mA Monitors the current draw of the submodule
LED Test Enabled/Disabled Enables or disables module LEDs

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in Megahertz of the clock on Port A/C
Port A/C DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port A/C Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last counter reset
Count
Port B/D Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in Megahertz of the clock on Port B/D
Port B/D DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Async Data Submodule 7.15
Testing

Setting Option Notes

Port B/D Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last counter reset
Count
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

Testing
Test Generator The Async Submodule includes a PRBS test generator and two PRBS pattern-
error monitors, for simultaneous testing of the end-to-end DPaths, and the
connection to the attached end device (the PRBS pattern is the common 2047-
bit (2e-11).
Note that the PRBS generator/monitors are independent of the DPath PRBS
generator/monitor which continually monitors all the DPaths integrity.
Though offered, the other patterns are not of use in normal maintenance
debugging.

Setting Option Notes

Test Mode Increment per Byte Each byte has a value one larger than the previous
PRBS Generator PRBS generator
Increment per Frame Each frame has a value one larger than the previous
Pattern F0 All bytes in each frame set to 0xF0
Pattern 5A All bytes in each frame set to 0x5A
Pattern A5 All bytes in each frame set to 0xA5
Pattern 00 All bytes in each frame set to 0x00
Pattern FF All bytes in each frame set to 0xFF
Test Rate 131 Test generation rate in increments of 64 kbps
For example, set to match the N of the submodule.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


7.16 Async Data Submodule
Troubleshooting

Test Monitor 1 and 2

Setting Option Notes

Traffic Source The DPath, circuit, or test port to use as the source for PRBS error
monitor
Cumulative Error Count The total number of errors accumulated since the last counter reset
Errored Seconds Cumulative number of seconds in which errors occurred
Severely Errored Seconds
Error Rate Errors per second
Reset Statistics Reset the above values

Troubleshooting
Table 7.4 lists some common issues and probable causes for these conditions.

Table 7.4 Troubleshooting the Async Submodule

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Data LEDs are off That physical port is not enabled Verify physical port through the soft-
ware
RX data light is solid green, and con- No data present on the circuit. Flashing Verify that connection is working and
nected device is not communicating green indicates presence of data. that cables are correct
RX data light is flashing green, and con- Possible faulty cable Check for incompatibilities in the data
nected device is not communicating rate settings and data configuration
settings
RX data light is yellow. Connected device The receive path to the remote device has Check the fiber-optic patch cable
may or may not be communicating. been interrupted (OUT direction) at the remote device
Communications working, but the output This indicates that one of the data paths Repair the primary data path
LED is flashing red through the system is no longer available
RX light is solid red and data are inter- All DPaths are unavailable Confirm that the channel is configured
rupted on the ICON network and that the net-
work is up

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Section 8
Transfer Trip Access Module
Part Number 8041-0x

Introduction
The Transfer Trip Access Module (TTM) provides four contact inputs and
four high-speed hybrid contact outputs. This interface is compatible with all
pilot protection schemes that require the transferring of a contact closure
between two ends of a protected power line segment. Applications include
direct transfer trip (DTT), all permissive transfer trip applications (POTT,
PUTT), and directional comparison blocking and unblocking schemes (DCB,
DCUB).
When connected in an Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON)
system, the application of battery voltage to an input results in the closing of
the corresponding contact output at the other end of the system. The transfer
of these contact data is bidirectional and independent.

Installation
The TTM occupies one access module slot in the ICON chassis. All modules
in the ICON are hot swappable, meaning that the modules can be removed
or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should a module fail while it is in service, it can be replaced with a like access
module. The ICON will recognize that a new module has been inserted and
transfer the existing settings to the new module. When the module is
programmed and in service, the status LED will turn from red to green.

Indicators The TTM has 10 multicolor LED indicators. These are used to provide
indication of the module status and input/output activity. Figure 8.1 shows the
location and function of these LEDs. Table 8.1 through Table 8.4 provide a
legend for the LEDs and what each color state indicates.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


8.2 Transfer Trip Access Module
Installation

Module Status
Circuit Status

Output A
Active

Output D
Active

Function 1
Sent

Function 4
Sent

Figure 8.1 Front View of the Transfer Trip Module (TTM) With LED Locations

Table 8.1 Module Status LED

LED Status Description

Steady green Enabled and no errors


Steady red Alarm
Flashing red Boot error
Steady blue Test mode enabled
Flashing blue Starting up
Flashing yellow Disabled (not accepted by Server Module)

Table 8.2 Circuit Status LED

Precedence LED Status Description

0 Dark Disabled
1 Steady red Data loss
2 Flashing green/red Path loss
3 Steady yellow FEFI (all DPaths)
4 Flashing yellow FEFI (at least one path is available)
5 Flashing green Path available and active data
6 Steady green Path available data not active

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Transfer Trip Access Module 8.3
Specifications

Table 8.3 Command Sent LED

LED Status Description

Dark Transmitted command is inactive (quiescent state)


Steady green Transmitted command is active

Table 8.4 Output Active LED

LED Status Description

Dark Transmitted command is inactive (quiescent state)


Steady green Transmitted command is active

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption <3W
Chassis Space Requirements 1 full access module slot
Operate Time 2 ms (back to back)
Connector Compression terminals
Dependability 99.99% @ 106 BER
Security 1 x 1022 @ 103 BER

Contact Inputs Nominal Rating Input Deassertion Input Assertion


Part Number
(Vdc) (Vdc) (Vdc)

8041-01 24 050 1530


8041-01 48 Level-sensitive 028.8 38.460
8041-04 125 Level-sensitive 075 105105
8041-04 250 Level-sensitive 0150 210300

Contact Outputs Make Rating 30 A make per IEEE C37.90 paragraph 6.7.2
(Fast Hybrid) Make 30 A @ 250 Vdc per IEEE C37.90
Continuous Carry Rating 6 A carry continuously at 70C
Rated Operational Current (Ie) 6 A at 70C
(Continuous Carry) 4 A at 85C
Interrupt Rating Break Capacity (10000 operations):
48 Vdc 10.0 A L/R = 40 ms
125 Vdc 10.0 A L/R = 40 ms
250 Vdc 10.0 A L/R = 20 ms
Cyclic Capacity (4 cycles/second, followed by 2
minutes idle for thermal dissipation):
48 Vdc 10.0 A L/R = 40 ms
125 Vdc 10.0 A L/R = 40 ms
250 Vdc 10.0 A L/R = 20 ms
Pickup Time 10 s (resistive load)
Dropout Time 8 ms (resistive load)

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


8.4 Transfer Trip Access Module
Settings and Status

Operating Mode The TTM is designed for point-to-point operation. There are several settings
that affect security and dependability. Table 8.5 provides setting suggestions
to demonstrate the relationship between these settings. It should be noted that
not all settings are included in the table; only those that have the greatest
effects on security and dependability are included.

Table 8.5 Operating Mode

Setting Most Dependable Typical Most Secure

Input filter 1 1 3
Command extend 100 1 1
Pre-trip delay 0 2 5
Output hold 100 0 0

Wiring Connections The TTM provides three sets of compression terminal block connectors.
These are logically grouped as output contacts, command inputs, and the
Alarm contact. The front view of the module with the connectors is shown in
Figure 8.1.

Settings and Status


To access the details of this access module using SEL-5051 Network
Management System (NMS) Software, use the following steps.
Step 1. Go to the device design page in the software.
The software will display a rendering of the node you have
selected.
Step 2. On the node rendering, double-click on the TTM of interest.
In the bottom left of the screen, TTM will appear.
Step 3. Use the expansion button to the left of TTM to move further
down the file tree.

Configuration
Global Settings

Setting Option Notes

Latency Alarm Threshold 215 The latency threshold in milliseconds at which the latency alarm will be activated
Function LEDs Normal/Sealed in In normal mode, the LEDs follow the inputs and outputs. Sealed-in mode con-
verts the LEDs into sealed-in targets which need to be manually reset. Reset is
found under TTM Status.
Input Voltage High/Low For the 8041-01: High = 48 Vdc, Low = 24 Vdc
For the 8041-04: High = 250 Vdc, Low = 125 Vdc

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Transfer Trip Access Module 8.5
Settings and Status

Command Configuration (14)

Setting Option Notes

Function Alias User-assigned name for the function


Input Filter 13 The input debounce delay setting in milliseconds
Input Polarity Normal/Invert Normal sends the commands when a voltage is applied to the input. Invert will
send commands on the removal of the input voltage.
Command Extend 1100 The additional time in milliseconds the command will continue to be sent after the
input is deasserted
Pre-Trip Delay 05 The qualifying time in milliseconds that a function needs to be received for before
the output is activated
Trip Hold 0100 The additional time in milliseconds that the contact output will stay closed after
the command deasserts
Output Polarity Normal/Invert Changes the output contact from closing when a command is received (Normal)
to closing when a command is deasserted (Invert)

Alarm

Setting Option Notes

Alarm Contact Delay 0, 100, 2000 This sets the time in milliseconds that an alarm condition needs to exist before the
alarm relay is de-asserted

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


8.6 Transfer Trip Access Module
Settings and Status

Test

Setting Option Notes

Contact Loopback Disable/Enable This is not a communications loopback. When this test mode is enabled and a
voltage is applied to a command input, the associated local command output is
asserted.

TTM Status

Setting Option Notes

Reset LEDs Reset When the function LEDs under the Global Settings tab is set for Sealed In, this
will reset (unlatch) the LEDs

Command Status

Setting Option Notes

Reset Statistics Resets all function counters

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Transfer Trip Access Module 8.7
Settings and Status

Function Status

Setting Option Notes

Command Sent Count 0 to 4294967295 Counter indicating the number of times the contact input has been asserted
Command Assert Count 0 to 4294967295 Counter indicating the number of times the contact output has been asserted
Contact In Asserted/Deas- Current status of the contact input
serted
Contact Out Asserted/Deas- Current status of the contact output
serted

Unit Status

Setting Option Notes

Temperature Degrees C Module temperature in Celsius. The temperature can vary from 35.0 to +95.0C,
inclusive. The alarm will be set if the temperature goes out of this range and will
clear when it returns to range (30.0 to +90C).
5V Shelf Voltage Volts +5 V Shelf voltage. If it exceeds 10% (< 4.5 V or > 5.5 V), the out-of-range alarm
will be set. It will clear when voltage returns to the 5% range.
3.3V Internal Voltage Volts +3.3 V Internal voltage. If it exceeds 10% (< 3.00 V or > 3.60 V), the out-of-
range alarm will be set. It will clear when voltage returns to the 5% range.
1.2V Internal Voltage Volts +1.2 V Internal voltage. If it exceeds 10% (< 1.08 V or > 1.32 V), the out-of-
range alarm will be set. It will clear when voltage returns to the 5% range.
Current Milliamps Monitors the current draw of the module
LED Test Enabled/Disabled Enables and disables the module LEDs

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


8.8 Transfer Trip Access Module
Settings and Status

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented by error
Seconds frame, received for every 125 s
Ports A/C Severely Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented by
Errored Seconds error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Clock Megahertz Frequency in Megahertz of the clock on Port A/C
Frequency
Port A/C DCM Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Frequency
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current BER
Port A/C Cumulative The total number of errors accumulated since that last time the counters were reset
Error Count
Port B/D Errored Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented by Error
Seconds Frame, received for every 125 s
Ports B/D Severely Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented by
Errored Seconds Error Frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Clock Megahertz Frequency in Megahertz of the clock on Port B/D
Frequency
Port B/D DCM Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Frequency
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current BER
Port B/D Cumulative The total number of errors accumulated since that last time the counters were reset
Error Count
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Transfer Trip Access Module 8.9
Settings and Status

Circuits

Setting Option Notes

User Circuit Address 065535 User circuit address (UCAD) to be sent to the remote module
Expected User Circuit 065535 The expected UCAD to be received from the remote module
Address
Use Far End Fault Indica- True/False Switch on Yellowthis setting is required to prevent channel asymmetries
tion
Revertive Time-Out Off, 025.4 seconds The recovery time of the DPath after network restoration
DPaths Check box field, DPaths assigned to the module. One must be assigned from left and right to pro-
DPath 1 through 16 vide full protection for the channel. Left is fiber ports A or C, Right is fiber ports
B or D.
Active DPath Right/Left Indicates which direction the channel is currently using, right or left
Test Data Source List of circuit and test generators to be used as test data sources

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


8.10 Transfer Trip Access Module
Settings and Status

Left and Right Port

Setting Option Notes

Priority 031 The priority of the DPath. The lower the number, the higher the priority. The mod-
ule will choose the DPath with the highest priority.
Network Path Address 065535 Network path address (NPAD) to send to the circuits far-end access module
Expected Network Path 065535 NPAD that is expected from the circuits far-end access module
Address
Received Network Path 065535 NPAD that is actually received from the circuits far-end access module (read only)
Address
User Circuit Address 0-65535 UCAD that is actually received from the circuits far-end access module
Received
DPipe 041 DPipe assigned to the DPath.
Ingress Latency Microseconds Latency of the DPath from the far end
Egress Latency Microseconds Latency of the DPath to the far end
Link Bad True/False False indicates that the link is good, True indicates the link is bad (read only)
Test Source Data The number of the DPath or test generator to use as source data for the test. The
test generator type is selected under the test generator tab.
DS0 Check two boxes Used to select which two DS0 bytes on the VT1.5 will be used
in the box field
124
Errored Seconds Seconds Total number of errored seconds detected during the test
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Transfer Trip Access Module 8.11
Testing

Testing
Test Generator 1

Setting Option Notes

Test Mode Increment Per Each byte has a value one larger than the previous
Byte
PRBS Generator PRBS generator
Increment Per Each frame has a value one larger than the previous
Frame
Pattern F0 All bytes in each frame set to 0xF0
Pattern 5A All bytes in each frame set to 0x5A
Pattern A5 All bytes in each frame set to 0xA5
Pattern 00 All bytes in each frame set to 0x00
Pattern FF All bytes in each frame set to 0xFF
Test Rate 131 Test generation rate in increments of 64 kbps.
For example, 1 represents 64 kbps, 2 represents 2 64 = 128 kbps, and so on. Sets
the number of payload bytes per 125 s VT1.5 frame. This must match the number
of DS0 bytes in the DPath.

Test Monitor 12

Setting Option Notes

Traffic Source The DPath, circuit, or test port to use as the source for PRBS error monitor
Cumulative Error Count The total number of errors accumulated since the last time the counters were reset.
Errored Seconds
Severely Errored
Seconds
Error Rate
Reset Statistics Reset the above counters

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


8.12 Transfer Trip Access Module
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Table 8.6 lists some common issues and possible causes for these conditions.

Table 8.6 Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause

Circuit status LED is red and connected Remote device is not connected or all Check that there is not a contributing
device is not communicating circuits between the two modules are system failure
unavailable.
The TTM is not communicating with the Verify that the TTM addresses are set
remote TTM. properly
Verify that the channel mapping is cor-
rect
Circuit status LED is yellow. Connected There is a far end failure on all receive Check that there is not a contributing
device may or may not be communicating. paths to the remote device. system failure

TTM Wiring Guide

Output A

Output D

Trip contact
Batt +

Batt -

Alarm Contact Normally open


Normally closed
Notes:
1. Apply station battery to an input to energize.
2. Output A,B,C,D are Normally open contacts
3. Voltage applied to input A results in output A
contact closure on the remote module.
4. Alarm contact is labeled per the De-energized
state. Alarms should be wired to the NC or
normally closed contact. This will result in a
contact closure for TTM failure conditions.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Section 9
4-Wire Submodule
Part Number 8065-01

Introduction
The Four-Wire (4W) Voice Frequency (VF) Submodule provides as many as
two four-wire electrical circuits with E&M signaling options for type 1, 2, 3,
and 5. Connections to each circuit are made using a standard RJ45 connector.

Operating Modes Each of the two connectors on the 4W VF Submodule can operate in the
following modes:
4W VF applications
4W VF with signaling

Installation
The 4W VF Submodule occupies one of the four submodule slots in the
Quattro Module. All modules in the SEL Integrated Communications Optical
Network (ICON) are hot swappable, meaning that the modules can be
removed and/or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should a submodule fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
submodule. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new submodule (in the
same Quattro Module slot) and transfer the existing settings onto the new
submodule. When the submodule is programmed and in service, the status
LED will turn from slow blinking blue to green.

Connector Pinout The 4W VF Submodule is interfaced through two RJ48 female connectors.
These connectors are compatible with RJ45 cable ends. Figure 9.1 shows the
connector pinout.
Note that for Type 3 signaling, the external SG-lead must connect directly to
the chassis ground (e.g., using RJ45, not to Pin 8).

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


9.2 4-Wire Submodule
Installation

1 M-Lead Signal Battery (SB)


2 M-Lead
3 Input Ring
4 Output Ring 1
5 Output Tip 1
6 Input Tip
7 E-Lead
8 E-Lead Signal Ground (SG)

Figure 9.1 RJ45 Connector Pinouts for a VF Circuit

Indicators
The 4W VF Submodule has five multicolor LED indicators. These provide
indication of the submodule status and data activity. Figure 9.2 shows the
location and function of these LEDs. Table 9.1 through Table 9.3 provide a
legend for the LEDs and what each color state indicates.

Status
VF In
VF Out

VF In
VF Out

Figure 9.2 4W LED Location and Function

Table 9.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED

Board LED Submodule


Precedence Description
Statusa Condition

0 Steady red Inoperative CPU nonresponsive. Server Module


has forced the LED to red.
1 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is
initializing the submodule
2 Alternating red/ FPGA load The selected FPGA image is
blue (4)b error corrupted or missing
3 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting Submodule is ready and waiting for
the Server Module
4 Double-flashing Disabled Server Module has set the operational
yellowc state to disabled
5 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, or temperature out
of range
6 Steady blue Test mode An interface is in a test mode
7 Steady green Normal Enabled and no errors
a Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.
c Double-flash has two flashes per second at the 4-Hz rate.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


4-Wire Submodule 9.3
Installation

Table 9.2 VF IN LED

Precedence LED Status Description

0 Dark No DPaths assigned


1 Steady red VF level outside level limits and check enabled
2 Flashing green VF present and within limits
3 Steady green VF below lower limit

Table 9.3 VF OUT LED

Precedence LED Statusa Description

0 Dark Port disabled


1 Steady red All DPaths on a data circuit are bad
2 Blinking redb, Bad DPath, but at least one path is still good, VF
Flashing green (4)c signal present
3 Blinking red, Bad DPath, but at least one path is still good, VF
steady green signal low
4 Steady yellow FEFI received on all DPaths
5 Blinking yellow, FEFI received, but at least one path is still good, VF
flashing green (4) signal present
6 Blinking yellow, FEFI received, but at least one path is still good, VF
steady green signal low
7 Flashing green (4) Line active, VF present
8 Steady green Line okay, VF signal level low
a Not all states apply to all port types.
b Blinking cadence is 125 ms on, 875 ms off.
c Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.

Connections and For applications that do not require signaling, it is recommended that the
orange and brown pairs of the cable be protected from accidental connections
Cables or be cut back to eliminate the exposed tinned end of the wire. The SEL-C607
cable is recommended for these applications. Figure 9.3 shows the connection
diagram and the signal flow directions for 4W applications.
Note that for Type 3 signaling, the external SG-lead must connect directly to
chassis ground (e.g., using RJ45, not to Pin 8).

RJ45 Male SEL-C607 Tinned Wires


Pin
Func. Pin #
orange/white
SB 1
orange
M 2
green/white
Ring (in) 3
blue
Ring 1 (out) 4
blue/white
Tip 1 (out) 5
green
Tip (in) 6
brown/white
E 7
brown
SG 8
shield
Shield
Signal Flow
Figure 9.3 SEL-C607 Cable 7Diagram for 4W VF Applications

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


9.4 4-Wire Submodule
Specifications

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption < 0.7 W
Chassis Space Requirements 1 Quattro submodule slot
Nominal Impedance 600

Voice Frequency Voice Frequency Output (VF RCV)

Output Transmission Level Point (TLP) 15 dBm to +10 dBm (nominal +7 dBm)
Return Loss 26 dB minimum measured at 1.0 kHz
21 dB minimum measured at any frequency
between 300 and 3000 Hz

Voice Frequency Input (VF XMT)

Input Transmission Level Point (TLP) 20 to +7 dBm (nominal 16 dBm)


Return Loss 30 dB minimum measured at 1.0 kHz
25 dB minimum measured at any frequency
between 300 and 3000 Hz

Voice Frequency Transmission (End to End)

Frequency Response 3003000 Hz: 0.5 dB


30003300 Hz: 1.5 dB
Tracking (gain deviation for a 1004 Hz +3 to 37 dBm0: 0.5 dB Max
input) 37 to 47 dBm0: 1.0 dB Max
47 to 54 dBm0: 3.0 dB Max

Voice Frequency Impairment (End to End)

Idle Noise Less than 23 dBrnco


Crosstalk Near-end (same-channel): 0 dBm0 tone at
2003400 Hz: > 65 dB (C-message)
Interchannel: 0 dBm0 tone at 2003400
Hz: > 65 dB (C-message)
Signal to total distortion ratio (1004 Hz 0 dBm0: > 33 dB
input) 0 to 30 dBm0: > 30 dB
40 dBm0: > 27 dB
45 dBm0: > 22 dB

E&M Signaling Input M-Lead Output E-Lead


Type
On-Hook (Idle) Off-Hook (Busy) On-Hook (Idle) Off-Hook (Busy)

1 Ground Battery Open Ground


2 Open Signal Battery (SB) Open Signal Ground (SG)
3 Signal Ground (SG) Signal Battery (SB) Open Ground
4 Not Supported
5 Open Ground Open Ground

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


4-Wire Submodule 9.5
Settings and Status

Settings and Status


To use the SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software to
access the details of this submodule, perform the following steps.
Step 1. Go to the device design page in the software.
The software will display a rendering of the node you have
selected.
Step 2. On the node rendering, double-click on the 4W Submodule you
want to configure.
At the bottom left of the screen, 4-Wire Module will appear.
Step 3. Use the expansion button to the left of 4-Wire Module to view
the rest of the settings tree.
The next level will expose Module Status, Port 1, Port 2, and
Backplane Slot Statistics. The following tables explain the
settings and data you can view starting from this point.

Port Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Port 1, Port 2
Port Alias User-assigned name for the VF port
Port Enabled
Up Port is enabled
Down Port is disabled
Transmit Level Transmit TLP (input level for a 0 dBm0 signal)
20 to +7 dBm Setting range is in tenths of a dBm (xx.x dBm)
Receive Level Receive TLP (output level for a 0 dBm0 signal)
15 to +10 dBm Setting range is in tenths of a dBm (xx.x dBm)
Signaling Enable/signaling type selection
None Transmission only (TO) no signaling
Type 1 E&M signaling type 1 selected
Type 2 E&M signaling type 2 selected
Type 3 E&M signaling type 3 selected
Type 5 E&M signaling type 5 selected

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


9.6 4-Wire Submodule
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

VF Line Test Enables the various line test modes


Normal Normal operation
Digital Loopback Loopback excluding CODEC to the far-end submodule
Analog Loopback Loopback including CODEC to the far-end submodule
Silence Transmits to the far-end the byte for zero signal level
Test Tone Transmits to the far-end a 1000 Hz 0 dBm0 test tone
VF Local Test Enables the various local test modes
Normal Normal operation
Digital Loopback Normal loopback to the local port
Serial Loopback Special loopback (CODEC only) to the local port
Silence Replaces the far-end data to the CODEC with the byte for zero signal level
Test Tone Outputs a 1000 Hz 0 dBm0 test tone to the local port
Signaling Line Test The line tests change the signaling sent to the far-end (instead of using the local M-
lead)
Normal Normal operation (uses local M-lead)
Loopback Loops back the signaling state
On Hook Emulates the M Lead open (on hook condition)
Off Hook Emulates the M Lead closed (off hook condition)
Test Pattern Emulates a 10 pps, 60 percent break condition
Signaling Local The local tests change the source for the local E-lead output (instead of using the
Test received signaling from the far end)
Normal Normal operation (uses signaling from far end)
Loopback Loops back the local M-lead state
On Hook Forces the E Lead open (on hook condition)
Off Hook Forces the E Lead closed (off hook condition)
Test Pattern Toggles the E Lead at 10 pps, 60 percent break
Low Transmit Input transmit low-level alert threshold. Alert clears when the power level returns to 2
(Input) Alert dB above the threshold value.
Threshold
35 to 50 dBm0 Setting range is in tenths of a dBm0 (xx.x dBm0)
High Transmit Input transmit high level alert threshold. Alert clears when the power level returns to 2
(Input) Alert dB below the threshold value.
Threshold
30 to 0 dBm0 Setting range is in tenths of a dBm0 (xx.x dBm0)
Power Level Check Enable/Disable When enabled, the receive and transmit power levels are checked against the power
alert threshold settings

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


4-Wire Submodule 9.7
Settings and Status

Circuit

Setting Option Notes

User Circuit Address 065535 User circuit address (UCAD) to be sent to the remote module
Expected User Circuit 065535 The expected UCAD to be received from the remote module
Address
Use Far End Failure True/False Switch on Yellowsetting is required to prevent channel asymmetries
Indicator
Revertive Time-Out Off, 025.4 seconds The recovery time of the DPath after network restoration
DPaths Check box field, DPaths assigned to the submodule. A minimum of two must be assigned to pro-
DPath 132 vide full protection for the channel. DPaths 1 through 16 are from SONET Port
A/C and 17 through 32 are from SONET Port B/D.
Active DPath Right/Left Indicates which DPath the channel is currently using. 116 is associated with
SFP A/C and 1732 are used for SFP B/D.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


9.8 4-Wire Submodule
Settings and Status

Left and Right Port


DPaths 116 are used for line ports A and C, and 1732 are used for line ports
B and D.

Setting Option Notes

Priority 031 The priority of the DPath. The lower the number, the higher the priority. The
submodule will choose the DPath with the highest priority.
Network Path Address 065535 Network path address (NPAD) to send to the circuits far-end access module
Expected Network Path 065535 NPAD that is expected from circuits far-end access module
Address
Received Network Path 065535 NPAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module (read only)
Address
User Circuit Address 065535 UCAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
Received
DPipe 014 DPipe assigned to the DPath
Ingress Latency s Latency of the DPath from the far end
Egress Latency s Latency of the DPath to the far end
Link Bad True/False Denotes whether the DPath is bad or not (read only)
DS0 Check box field Used to select which DS0s on the VT1.5 will be used. The user must select two
124 bytes for the 4W Submodule.
Test Data Source Not applicable to the submodule
Cumulative Error Count Integer Number of DPath errors detected since the last reset statistics
Errored Seconds
Severely Errored Seconds Integer Total number of DPath errored seconds since the last reset statistics
Bit Error Rate Errors per second Current value
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


4-Wire Submodule 9.9
Monitor

Monitor
Module Status
4W-Parameters

Monitor Point Units Notes

+5V Supply V Module +5 V supply (operational range 4.5 to 5.5)


5V Supply V Module 5 V supply (operational range 4.5 to 5.5)
48V Supply V Module 48 V supply (operational range 46 to 54)

Port Status

Monitor Point Units Notes

Average Transmit Level dBm0 The average transmit level for the last second
Minimum Transmit Level dBm0 The minimum transmit level for the last second
Maximum Transmit Level dBm0 The maximum transmit level for the last second
Average Receive Level dBm0 The average receive level for the last second
Minimum Receive Level dBm0 The minimum receive level for the last second
Maximum Receive Level dBm0 The maximum receive level for the last second
M-Lead Input State On-Hook Current state of the M-lead input
Off-Hook
Pulsing
M-Lead Input Rate PPS The rate at which the M-lead is pulsing
M-Lead Input Break Percent The percent of the pulse cycle which the M-lead is off
E-Lead Output State On-Hook Current state of the E-lead input
Off-Hook
Pulsing
E-Lead Output Rate PPS The rate at which the E-lead is pulsing
E-Lead Output Break Percent The percent of the pulse cycle which the E-lead is off

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


9.10 4-Wire Submodule
Testing

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on Port A/C
Port A/C DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port A/C Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last statistics reset
Count
Port B/D Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on Port B/D
Port B/D DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port B/D Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last counter reset
Count
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

Testing
Continuous Testing All DS0 submodules use a 511-bit PRBS data pattern to continuously monitor
the integrity of the data circuits to the far-end submodule; this is one of the
many services provided by the DPaths.
Any errors received in the pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) data are
reported as a bit error ratio (BER) and as increments to the errored-seconds.
In addition, the power levels of both the transmit and receive VF signals are
continuously monitored, with minimum, maximum, and average levels (per
second) reported in dBm0. If desired, alerts may be generated if a level
deviates from an acceptable range (user-configured).
Monitoring of both the M-lead and E-lead signaling interfaces is also
provided, with PPS and % Break values when pulsing.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


4-Wire Submodule 9.11
Troubleshooting

Out-of-Service For maintenance and troubleshooting, internal tone generators may be used to
provide 1000 Hz 0dBm0 tones to both the drop and line ports.
Testing
For signaling tests, both the local E-lead output, and the signaling bit to the far
end, may be forced to on-hook, to off-hook, or to 10PPS 60% Break pulsing.
Both the VF and the signaling channels can also be looped back; this includes
local, line, and both modes.

Troubleshooting
Table 9.4 lists some common issues and probable causes for these conditions.

Table 9.4 Troubleshooting the 4W VF Submodule

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Both port LEDs are off The port is not enabled Verify the port through the software
The VF-Out (lower) LED is off No DPath has been assigned Assign DPath(s)
The VF -In (upper) LED is solid green VF signal is not present (within the con- Verify that connected device is work-
figured power levels) ing and that cables are correct
Flashing green indicates normal level
The VF-Out (lower) LED is flashing Possible faulty cable, incorrect level Check for incompatibilities in the VF
green, but connected device is not func- threshold settings, or problem with con- level settings, cables, and connected
tioning nected device device
The VF-Out (lower) LED is yellow The DPath(s) to the remote submodule is Check the network status
faulty
The VF-Out (lower) LED is flashing red This indicates that one of the received Repair the failed DPath
DPaths through the system is faulty
The VF-Out (lower) LED is solid red All DPaths are faulty Confirm that the DPath is configured
correctly on the ICON network and
that the network is up

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Section 10
Crypto Module
Part Number 8029-01

Introduction
The Crypto Module provides strong encryption of the SONET channel
between adjacent nodes. It is capable of securing two SONET OC-48 line
channels simultaneously with the SEL SONET Encryption Protocol (SSEP).
This protocol uses strong AES encryption and is configurable to use 128-bit or
256-bit keys.

Installation
The Crypto Module is only supported on the 19 chassis version of the SEL
Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON). It is not supported for
use within the Cube chassis. The Crypto Module can be installed in any access
module slot aside from Slot 10 on the 19 chassis. In addition, at least three of
the seven access module slots (4 to 10) must remain empty. All modules in the
ICON are hot swappable, meaning that the modules can be removed and/
or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should a module fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
module. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new module and transfer
the existing settings onto the new module. For communication with adjacent
nodes to resume, the new modules Public Key will need to be transferred to
the adjacent nodes and a system rekey performed. When the module is
programmed and in service, the status LED will be green.

Indicators
The Crypto Module has multiple multicolor LED indicators. These provide
indication of the module status and input/output activity. Figure 10.1 shows
the location and function of these LEDs. Table 10.1 and Table 10.2 provide a
legend for the LEDs and what each color state indicates.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


10.2 Crypto Module
Installation

Module Status

Line Port A Status

Line Port EA Status

Line Port B Status

Line Port EB Status

Figure 10.1 Crypto Module LED Locations

Table 10.1 Module Status Indicator LED

Module
Precedence LED Status Description
Condition

0a Steady red Board failure The board is unresponsive


1 Flashing red (4)b Boot error The firmware is corrupted or invalid
2 Flashing blue (4)b Booting The firmware is being loaded and is
initializing the module
3 Alternating red/ Initialization An initialization step did not
blue (4)b error complete successfully
4 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting Module is ready and waiting for the
Server Module
5 Flashing yellow Disabled Server Module has set the operational
(4)b state to disabled
6 Flashing red (2)b Alarm An alarm condition exists on the
module (e.g., voltage, current, or
temperature out of range)
7 Steady blue Test mode An interface is in a test mode
8 Steady green Normal Enabled and no errors
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Crypto Module 10.3
Installation

Table 10.2 Line Port LED

Line Port
Precedence LED Status Description
Condition

0a Dark Off Port disabled


1 Alternating red/ SFP problem SFP type mismatch, invalid license,
green (2)b or no data from SFP
2 Steady red SONET line Line AIS (AIS-L), LOS, LOF, OOF,
problem or SFP missing
3 Steady yellow Far-end fail- Line RDI-L
ure
4 Steady green Normal
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.

Module Connection The local SFP ports (A and B) connect directly to a clear text SONET stream
(e.g. from the Line Module) and the encrypted version of those streams are
available on the remote SFP ports (EA and EB) for connection to adjacent
nodes. Various optical SFPs are available for the ports depending on the
distance requirements. Figure 10.2 shows the module connections in a ring
architecture.

Fiber-Optic
PubKey A = PubKey 3 Connection
PubKey B = PubKey 2 Between Modules Node 1
Port A
Port A
Port EA
Port B
Port B
Port EB

Line Crypto
Module Module

Fiber-Optic PubKey A = PubKey 1


Connection PubKey B = PubKey 3
PubKey A = PubKey 2
Between Modules PubKey B = PubKey 1
Node 2
Port A
Port A Fiber-Optic
Connection
Port EA Between Modules Node 3
Port B Port B
Port EB Port A Port A
Port B
Port EA
Line Crypto Port B
Module Module Port EB

Line Crypto
Module Module
Figure 10.2 Ring Architecture

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


10.4 Crypto Module
Settings and Status

In this scenario, each node is communicating with two remote nodes; one on
Line A and one on Line B. Each line must be programmed with the public key
of the remote module it is communicating with on that channel. So, Node 1
must be programmed with the Node 3 public key on Line A and the Node 2
public key on Line B. With this connectivity and programming in place,
secure communications can be established between all the nodes.

Settings and Status


General Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Generate New DSA Creates a new private/public DSA key pair for the module. The modules Public DSA
Key Key must be shared with the remote device in order for the devices to be able to create
sessions.
Key Length The AES key length in bits
128
256
Public Key The public key generated when a Generate New DSA Key operation is performed. This
key must be shared with the remote device in order for the devices to be able to create
sessions.
Enable Verbose Enables extensive logging of module-to-module communication
Logging
Enabled
Disabled

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Crypto Module 10.5
Settings and Status

Line Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Line Enabled Enable or disable the line


Up
Down
OOB Byte The module will use this overhead byte to communicate with the remote crypto
module
e1
f1
dcc1
dcc2
dcc3
dcc4
dcc5
dcc6
dcc7
dcc8
dcc9
dcc10
dcc11
dcc12
e2
e1 The operation to perform on the e1 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


10.6 Crypto Module
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

f1 The operation to perform on the f1 byte


Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc1 The operation to perform on the dcc1 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc2 The operation to perform on the dcc2 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc3 The operation to perform on the dcc3 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc4 The operation to perform on the dcc4 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc5 The operation to perform on the dcc5 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc6 The operation to perform on the dcc6 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc7 The operation to perform on the dcc7 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc8 The operation to perform on the dcc8 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc9 The operation to perform on the dcc9 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Crypto Module 10.7
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

dcc10 The operation to perform on the dcc10 byte


Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc11 The operation to perform on the dcc11 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
dcc12 The operation to perform on the dcc12 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
s1 The operation to perform on the s1 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
e2 The operation to perform on the e2 byte
Pass
Zeroize
Encrypt
Key Exchange Rate 110,000 The number of hours between automatic channel rekeys with the remote device
Remote DSA Public Key The remote modules public DSA key. This key must match the remote-ends
DSA public key for the devices to successfully perform a system rekey.
System Rekey Forces a system rekey with the remote device
Channel Rekey Forces a channel rekey with the remote device

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


10.8 Crypto Module
Monitor

Monitor
Unit Information

Monitor Point Units Notes

Module Temperature Degrees C Module temperature in Celsius. If the temperature exceeds 110C, an alarm will
be set. The alarm will clear when it drops below that value.
3.3 V Voltage V +3.3 V Internal voltage. If it exceeds 10% (< 2.97 V or > 3.63 V), an alarm
will be set. The alarm will clear when it returns to the specified range.
2.5 V Voltage V +2.5 V Internal voltage. If it exceeds 5% (< 2.38 V or > 2.625 V), an alarm
will be set. The alarm will clear when it returns to the specified range.
1.8 V Voltage V +1.8 V Internal voltage. If it exceeds 5% (< 1.71 V or > 1.89 V), an alarm will
be set. The alarm will clear when it returns to the specified range.
1.3 V Voltage V +1.3 V Internal voltage. If it exceeds 5% (< 1.24 V or > 1.365 V), an alarm
will be set. The alarm will clear when it returns to the specified range.
1.2 V Voltage V +1.2 V Internal voltage. If it exceeds 5% (< 1.14 V or > 1.26 V), an alarm will
be set. The alarm will clear when it returns to the specified range.
1.0 V Voltage V +0.9 V Internal voltage. If it exceeds 3% (< 0.873 V or > 0.93 V), an alarm
will be set. The alarm will clear when it returns to the specified range.
Current A Module current draw in Amps. If the current draw exceeds 2.2 A, an alarm will
be set. The alarm will clear when it drops below that value.

Line Crypto Status

Monitor Point Units Notes

Encryption Session ID The ID of the encryption session status. An ID of zero indicates no encryption
session exists with the remote end.
Decryption Session ID The ID of the decryption session status. An ID of zero indicates no decryption
session exists with the remote end.
CtrSync Accepted Messages The number of CtrSync messages accepted from the remote end. A non-zero
number indicates the modules are communicating with each other and have a
valid session.
CtrSync Rejected Messages The number of CtrSync messages rejected from the remote end. A non-zero
number indicates the modules are communicating but are not synchronized.
Clear Status Clears the status points.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Crypto Module 10.9
Monitor

Port SFP Status

Setting Option Notes

Temperature Degrees C Current temperature of the SFP


Calibration Unknown
Internal
External
Transmit Power dBm SFP transmitted laser power
Receiver Power dBm SFP received power
Transmit Laser Current mA SFP transmitted current
Voltage mV SFP voltage

Performance The Crypto Module provides extensive performance monitoring statistics. The
Crypto Modules performance monitoring operation and data is similar to the
Monitoring monitoring feature provided in the Line Module. As such, please refer to
Section 3: Line Module for details.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


10.10 Crypto Module
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
If abnormal conditions exist or the module is not functioning as expected,
evaluate any alarms and events, the modules status indicators, and the
modules LED indicators to help identify the cause. Table 10.3 lists some
potential issues and probable causes for these conditions.

Table 10.3 Troubleshooting the Crypto Module

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Module is not communicating with the Remote device is not connected or con- Check device-to-device cable connec-
connected device. nected incorrectly. tions.
The configuration of both devices are not Verify the Remote Public Key in the
synchronized. Line port configuration of the local
module matches the Public Key of the
remote device.
Verify the OOB Byte setting is identi-
cal in the local and remote module.
Verify the Key Length setting is iden-
tical in the local and remote module.
Verify the devices have performed a
system rekey. If unknown, consult the
logs or perform a new system rekey
and verify that it succeeds.
Crypto Module is communicating prop- The TOH byte selected as the OOB Byte Verify the TOH byte selected for the
erly, but alarms or undesired symptoms is in use by another module in the system OOB Byte is not assigned in the Line
exist in other modules in the device. (e.g., Line Module). Modules TOH bytes Configuration
section.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Section 11
FXS VF Submodule
Part Number 8066-01

Introduction
The FXS Voice Frequency (VF) Submodule provides a two-wire Foreign
Exchange Station end (FXS) interface to a standard telephone in the same
location. The FXS Submodule can work with a Foreign Exchange Office end
(FXO) Submodule to provide an off-premise extension (OPX).
Alternately, the FXS Submodule can work with another FXS Submodule to
provide a private line automatic ringdown (PLAR) circuit between two
locations. The FXS Submodule contains an internal ring generator and talk
battery. Connections to each circuit are made using a standard RJ11 connector.

Operating Modes The FXS VF Submodule can operate in the following modes:
OPXoff-premise extension
PLARprivate line automatic ringdown

Installation
The FXS VF Submodule occupies one of the four submodule slots in the
Quattro Module. All modules in the SEL Integrated Communications Optical
Network (ICON) are hot swappable, meaning that the modules can be
removed and/or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should a submodule fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
submodule. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new submodule (in the
same Quattro Module slot) and transfer the existing settings onto the new
submodule. When the submodule is programmed and in service, the status
LED will turn from slow blinking blue to green.

Connector Pinout The FXS VF Submodule is interfaced through an RJ11 female connector. This
connector is compatible with RJ11 cable ends. Figure 11.1 shows the
connector pinout.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


11.2 FXS VF Submodule
Installation

1
2
3 Ring
4 Tip
5
6

Figure 11.1 RJ11 Connector Pinouts for a 2-Wire FXS Circuit

Indicators
The FXS VF Submodule has three multicolor LED indicators. These provide
indication of the submodule status and data activity. Figure 11.2 shows the
location and function of these LEDs. Table 11.1Table 11.3 provide a legend
for the LEDs and what each color state indicates.

Status

Input
Output

Figure 11.2 FXS LED Location and Function

Table 11.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED

Board LED Submodule


Precedence Description
Statusa Condition

0 Steady red Inoperative CPU nonresponsive. Server Module


has forced the LED to red.
1 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is
initializing the submodule
2 Alternating red/ FPGA load The selected FPGA image is
blue (4)b error corrupted or missing
3 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting Submodule is ready and waiting for
the Server Module
4 Double-flashing Disabled Server Module has set the operational
yellowc state to disabled
5 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, or temperature out
of range
6 Steady blue Test mode An interface is in a test mode
7 Steady green Normal Enabled and no errors
a Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.
c Double-flash has two flashes per second at the 4-Hz rate.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXS VF Submodule 11.3
Specifications

Table 11.2 Port Input LED

Precedence LED Status Description

0 Dark Port disabled


1 Steady red Loop fault (2-wire shorted)
2 Flashing green Loop active (local phone off hook)
3 Steady green Loop idle (local phone on hook or disconnected)

Table 11.3 Port Output LED

Precedence LED Statusa Description

1 Dark Port disabled


2 Steady red All DPaths bad
3 Steady red, No path good, FEFI received on at least one path
blinking yellowb
4 Blinking redb, Bad DPath, but at least one path is still good, VF
flashing green (4)c signal present
5 Steady yellow FEFI received on all DPaths
6 Blinking yellow, FEFI received, but at least one path is still good, VF
flashing green (4)c signal present
7 Flashing green (4)c Ringing, module is ringing the local phone
8 Steady green Normal on hook or off hook
a Not all states apply to all port types.
b Blinking cadence is 125 ms on, 875 ms off.
c Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.

Connections and For all applications, use a cable with a 6P2C, 6P4C, or 6P6C connector
attached to the module end of the cable. Figure 11.3 shows the connection
Cables diagram for the FXS VF Submodule to a typical telephone (which normally
has a similar RJ11 connector.) Note that SEL does not manufacture this cable.

FXS Module Telephone


RJ11 Male RJ11 Male
Pin Pin
Func. Pin # Pin # Func.
1 1
2 2
red
Ring 3 3 Ring
green
Tip 4 4 Tip
5 5
6 6
Figure 11.3 Cable Diagram for FXS VF Applications

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption < 0.7 W
Chassis Space Requirements 1 Quattro submodule slot
Nominal Impedance 600

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


11.4 FXS VF Submodule
Specifications

Voice Frequency Voice Frequency Output (VF RCV)

Output Transmission Level Point (TLP) 12 dBm to +1 dBm (nominal 0 dBm)


Return Loss 28 dB for 600 measured at 1.0 kHz
22 dB minimum measured at any frequency
between 300 and 3000 Hz

Voice Frequency Input (VF XMT)

Input Transmission Level Point (TLP) 9.5 to +3 dBm (nominal 0 dBm)


Return Loss 28 dB for 600 measured at 1.0 kHz
22 dB minimum measured at any frequency
between 300 and 3000 Hz

Voice Frequency Transmission (End to End)

Frequency Response 60 Hz: < 20 dB


200 Hz: +0.6 to 5.0 dB
3003000 Hz: 0.6 dB
30003300 Hz: +0.6 to 2.0 dB
4000 Hz: < 28 dB
Tracking (gain deviation for a 1004 Hz +3 to 37 dBm0: 0.5 dB Max
input) 37 to 50 dBm0: 1.0 dB Max
50 to 54 dBm0: 3.0 dB Max

Voice Frequency Impairment (End to End)

Idle Noise Less than 23 dBrnco


Transhybrid Loss Transmit to receive loss measured at the far
end 4-wire VF unit:
25 dB Minimum measured at 1 kHz
20 dB Minimum measured at any fre-
quency between 300 and 3000 Hz
Signal to total distortion ratio (1004 Hz 0 dBm0: > 33 dB
input) 0 to 30 dBm0: > 30 dB
40 dBm0: > 27 dB
45 dBm0: > 22 dB

Signaling
L

Loop Characteristics (2-wire VF loop to telephone)

Signaling Loop start (no ground start option)


Ringing > 40 Vrms (differential Tip to Ring)
Frequency 20 Hz 15%
Waveform sinusoidal
Load tolerance Max: 2 REN
Loop Feed On hook battery voltage: 48 Vdc 15%
Off hook loop current: 20 mA 15%
Loop resistance tolerance: up to 200
Loop voltage tolerance: Up to 12 Volts
Return Loss 28 dB for 600 at 1.0 kHz
22 dB minimum measured at any frequency
between 300 and 3000 Hz
Circuit Loss Alert(Fast busy Loss of all DPaths to far-end ICON node module
tone to local phone) for either con- Far end FXO Submodule with faulty 2-wire inter-
dition face connection

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXS VF Submodule 11.5
Settings and Status

Settings and Status


To use the SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software to
access the details of this submodule, perform the following steps.
Step 1. Go to the device design page in the software.
The software will display a rendering of the node you have
selected.
Step 2. On the node rendering, double-click on the FXS Submodule
you want to configure.
At the bottom left of the screen, FXS Module will appear.
Step 3. Use the expansion button to the left of FXS Module to view the
rest of the settings tree.
The next level will expose Port Configuration, Circuits, Port
Status, and Backplane Slot Statistics. The following tables
explain the settings and data you can view starting from this
point.

Port Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Port Alias User-assigned name for the VF port


Port Enabled
Up Port is enabled
Down Port is disabled
Port Mode
OPX Off-premise extension (FXO Submodule at far end)
PLAR Private line automatic ringdown (FXS Submodule at far end)
Transmit Level Transmitter output level
9.5 to +3 dBm Setting range is in tenths of a dBm (xx.x dBm)
Receive Level Expected receiver input level
12 to +1 dBm Setting range is in tenths of a dBm (xx.x dBm)

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


11.6 FXS VF Submodule
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Impedance Set telephone impedance


600 Default setting
900
270 + (750 , 150 nF)
220 + (820 , 120 nF) Australia, New Zealand
220 + (820 , 115 nF) Slovakia, Slovenia, South Africa
200 + (680 , 100 nF) China
VF Line Test Enables the various line test modes
Normal operation No test mode
Digital loopback Loopback at the FPGAs Line interface
Serial loopback in SLIC Loopback at the FPGAs SLIC interface
Silence Transmission muted
Test Tone Enables the transmission of the 1000 Hz 0 dBm0 test tone
VF Local Test Enables the various local test modes
Normal operation No test mode
Digital loopback Loopback including SLIC to the local port
Serial loopback in FPGA Loopback at the FPGAs PCM interface
Silence Transmission muted
Test Tone Enables the transmission of the 1000 Hz 0 dBm0 test tone
Signaling Line Test The line tests change the signaling sent to the far end (from the local
telephone's on-hook/off-hook status)
Normal operation Normal operation
On Hook Forces an on-hook condition
Off Hook Forces an off-hook condition
Signaling Local The local tests change the source for the local ringing output (from
Test the signaling received from the far end)
Normal operation No test mode
One long ring per 6s period One long ring every six seconds
Two short rings per 6s period Two short rings every six seconds
One short and one long ring per 6s One short and one long ring every six seconds
period
Alarm Mask Short Check the box associated with each event when it is desirable to
Overload monitor these conditions in the event report. Normally keep
checked.
Ring Cadence for Sets the ring cadence when PLAR mode is active
PLAR Mode
One long ring per 6s period One long ring every six seconds
Two short rings per 6s period Two short rings every six seconds
One short and one long ring per 6s One short and one long ring every six seconds
period
Phone Ring Time- Off to 10 seconds Sets how long the local phone of a PLAR circuit will ring if unan-
out in PLAR Mode swered

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXS VF Submodule 11.7
Settings and Status

Circuits

Setting Option Notes

User Circuit Address 065535 User circuit address (UCAD) to be sent to the remote module
Expected User Circuit 065535 The expected UCAD to be received from the remote module
Address
Use Far End Failure True/False Switch on Yellow (True) This setting is required to prevent channel asymme-
Indicator tries
Revertive Time-Out Off, 025.4 seconds The recovery time of the DPath after network restoration. When set to OFF, the
channel is non-revertive.
DPaths Check box field, DPaths assigned to the submodule. One must be assigned from left and right to
DPath 116 provide full protection for the channel. Left is fiber ports A or C, right is fiber
ports B or D.
Active DPath Right/Left Indicates which direction the channel is currently using, right or left

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


11.8 FXS VF Submodule
Settings and Status

Left and Right Port

Setting Option Notes

Priority 031 The priority of the DPath. The lower the number, the higher the priority. The
submodule will choose the DPath with the highest priority.
Network Path Address 065535 Network path address (NPAD) to send to the circuits far-end access module
Expected Network Path 065535 NPAD that is expected from circuits far-end access module
Address
Received Network Path 065535 NPAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module (read only)
Address
User Circuit Address 065535 UCAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
Received
DPipe 014 DPipe assigned to the DPath
Ingress Latency s Latency of the DPath from the far end
Egress Latency s Latency of the DPath to the far end
Link Bad True/False False indicates that the link is good, True indicates the link is bad (read only)
DS0 Check two boxes in Use to select which two DS0 bytes on the VT1.5 will be used
the box field 124
Cumulative Error Count Integer Number of errors detected during the test
Errored Seconds Milliseconds Total number of errored seconds detected during the test
Severely Errored Seconds Milliseconds Total number of severely errored seconds detected during the test
Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate of the DPath
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXS VF Submodule 11.9
Monitor

Monitor
Module Status

Monitor Point Units Notes

Temperature Degrees C Module temperature (operational range is 30 to +90C)


5V Shelf Voltage V +5 Volt shelf supply voltage (operational range 4.5 to 5.5)
3.3V Internal Voltage V Module 3.3 Volt supply (operational range 3.0 to 3.6)
1.2V Internal Voltage V Module 1.2 Volt supply (operational range 1.08 to 1.32)
Current mA Module current draw
LED Test Enabled/Disabled Sequences through all of the LED states

Port Status

Monitor Point Units Notes

Average Transmit Level dBm0 The average transmit level for the last second
Minimum Transmit Level dBm0 The minimum transmit level for the last second
Maximum Transmit Level dBm0 The maximum transmit level for the last second
Average Receive Level dBm0 The average receive level for the last second
Minimum Receive Level dBm0 The minimum receive level for the last second
Maximum Receive Level dBm0 The maximum receive level for the last second
SLIC Revision Rev #
Local Signaling State On-Hook Current signaling state
Off-Hook
Ringing
Far End Signaling State Current State Current state and mode
Loop Current mA Measured loop current

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


11.10 FXS VF Submodule
Monitor

Monitor Point Units Notes

Loop Voltage V Current measured loop voltage


Tip to Ground Voltage V Current measured tip to ground voltage
Ring to Ground Voltage V Current measured ring to ground voltage

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on port A/C count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on port A/C count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on the A/C ports
Port A/C DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port A/C Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last counter reset
Count
Port B/D Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on port B/D count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on port B/D count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on the B/D ports
Port B/D DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current BER
Port B/D Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last counter reset
Count
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXS VF Submodule 11.11
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Using the LEDs Table 11.4 lists some common issues and probable causes for these
conditions.

Table 11.4 Troubleshooting the FXS VF Submodule

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Port input and output LEDs are off The port is not enabled Verify the port through the software
Port output LED (only) is off No DPaths have been assigned Assign DPaths
Port input LED is solid green and local Solid green indicates on-hook condition Check connections to the local tele-
telephone is off hook phone
Port output LED is flashing green and Flashing green indicates local telephone Check connections to the local tele-
local telephone is not ringing should be ringing phone
Port output LED is yellow. Connected The DPath to the remote device has been Check the network status
device might or might not be communicat- interrupted
ing
Port output LED is flashing red This indicates that one of the DPaths Repair the path
through the system is no longer available
Port output LED is solid red All DPaths are unavailable Confirm that the channel is configured
correctly on the ICON network and
that the network is up

Using the Local Tests With the local telephone on-hook, the Signaling Local Test can be used to
check that the FXS Submodule can ring the telephone.
With the local telephone off-hook, the VF Local Test can be used to check
that the FXS Submodule can send an audible 1000 Hz tone to the telephone.
With the local telephone off-hook, the VF Local Test can also be used to
check that the FXS Submodule can loopback the voice (this will be much
louder than the normal telephone's sidetone).

Using the Line Tests The VF Line Test can be used to send a 1000 Hz test tone to the far-end
access module.
The VF Line Test can also be used to loopback the VF from the far end (to
the far end).
The Signaling Line Test can be used to emulate an on-hook or off-hook
telephone (in cases where no telephone is available yet).

Use the Level Meters For both the above special VF test modes, and during normal operations, the
VF level meters can be very useful.
For both the transmit and receive signal directions, there are three readings for
the minimum, average, and maximum levels during the previous one second.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Section 12
FXO VF Submodule
Part Number 8067-01

Introduction
The FXO Voice Frequency (VF) Submodule provides a two-wire Foreign
Exchange Office (FXO) interface to a private branch exchange (PBX)
telephone system in the same location. The FXO Submodule works with up to
two Foreign Exchange Station end (FXS) Submodules located at other SEL
Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON) sites.
The FXO Submodule connections to each circuit are made using a standard
RJ11 connector.

Operating Modes The FXO VF Submodule can operate in the following mode:
OPXoff-premise extension

Installation
The FXO VF Submodule occupies one of the four submodule slots in the
Quattro Module. All modules in the ICON are hot swappable, meaning that
the modules can be removed and/or inserted while the system is powered and
in operation.

Module Replacement Should a submodule fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
submodule. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new submodule (in the
same Quattro Module slot) and transfer the existing settings onto the new
submodule. When the submodule is programmed and in service, the status
LED will turn from slow blinking blue to green.

Connector Pinout The FXO VF Submodule is interfaced through an RJ11 female connector.
This connector is compatible with RJ11 cable ends. Figure 12.1 shows the
connector pinout.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


12.2 FXO VF Submodule
Installation

1
2
3 Ring
4 Tip
5
6

Figure 12.1 RJ11 Connector Pinouts for a 2-Wire FXO Circuit

Indicators
The FXO VF Submodule has five multicolor LED indicators. These provide
indication of the submodule status and data activity. Figure 12.2 shows the
location and function of these LEDs. Table 12.1Table 12.3 provide a legend
for the LEDs and what each color state indicates.

Status
Input
Output

Input
Output

Figure 12.2 FXS LED Location and Function

Table 12.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED

Board LED Submodule


Precedence Description
Statusa Condition

0 Steady red Inoperative CPU nonresponsive. Server Module


has forced the LED to red.
1 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is
initializing the submodule.
2 Alternating red/ FPGA load The selected FPGA image is
blue (4)b error corrupted or missing.
3 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting Submodule is ready and waiting for
the Server Module.
4 Double-flashing Disabled Server Module has set the operational
yellowc state to disabled.
5 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, or temperature out
of range.
6 Steady blue Test mode An interface is in a test mode.
7 Steady green Normal Enabled and no errors.
a Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.
c Double-flash has two flashes per second at the 4-Hz rate.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXO VF Submodule 12.3
Installation

Table 12.2 Port Input LED

Precedence LED Status Description

1 Dark Port disabled


2 Steady red No battery or ringing voltages (loop open circuit or
overcurrent trip off)
3 Flashing green Loop ringing (ringing voltage detected)
4 Steady green Loop idle (battery and no ringing)

Table 12.3 Port Output LED

Precedence LED Statusa Description

1 Dark No paths assigned


2 Steady red All DPaths bad
3 Steady red, No path good, FEFI received on at least one path
blinking yellowb
4 Blinking redb, Bad DPath, but at least one path is still good, VF
flashing green (4)c signal present
5 Steady yellow FEFI received on all DPaths
6 Blinking yellow, FEFI received, but at least one path is still good
flashing green (4)c
7 Flashing green (4)c Off hook, module emulates off-hook telephone
8 Steady green On hook, module emulates on-hook telephone (for
line idle)
a Not all states apply to all port types.
b Blinking cadence is 125 ms on, 875 ms off.
c Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.

Connections and For all applications, use a cable with a 6P2C, 6P4C, or 6P6C connector
attached to the module end of the cable. Figure 12.3 shows the connection
Cables diagram for the FXO VF Submodule to a typical PBX with a similar RJ11
connector. Note that SEL does not manufacture this cable.

FXO Module PBX


RJ11 Male RJ11 Male
Pin Pin
Func. Pin # Pin # Func.
1 1
2 2
red
Ring 3 3 Ring
green
Tip 4 4 Tip
5 5
6 6
Figure 12.3 Cable Diagram for FXO VF Applications

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


12.4 FXO VF Submodule
Specifications

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption < 0.7 W
Chassis Space Requirements 1 Quattro submodule slot
Nominal Off-Hook AC Imped- 600
ance 900
600 + 2.1 F
900 + 2.1 F
ANSI/EIA/TIA 464
Global Complex Z

Voice Frequency Voice Frequency Output (VF RCV)

Output Transmission Level Point (TLP) 12 dBm to 0 dBm (nominal 0 dBm)


Return Loss 28 dB for 600 or 900 at 1.0 kHz
26 dB for 600 or 900 + 2.1 F at 1.0 kHz
22 dB minimum measured at any frequency
between 300 and 3000 Hz

Voice Frequency Input (VF XMT)

Input Transmission Level Point (TLP) 8 to +3 dBm (nominal 0 dBm)


Return Loss 28 dB for 600 or 900 at 1.0 kHz
26 dB for 600 or 900 + 2.1 F at 1.0 kHz
22 dB minimum measured at any frequency
between 300 and 3000 Hz

Voice Frequency Transmission (End to End)

Frequency Response 60 Hz: < 20 dB


200 Hz: +0.6 to 5.0 dB
3003000 Hz: 0.6 dB
30003400 Hz: +0.6 to 2.0 dB
4000 Hz: < 28 dB
Tracking (gain deviation for a 1004 Hz +3 to 37 dBm0: 0.5 dB Max
input) 37 to 50 dBm0: 1.0 dB Max
50 to 54 dBm0: 3.0 dB Max

Voice Frequency Impairment (End to End)

Idle Noise (for TLP set to 0 dBm) Less than 23 dBrnco


Transhybrid Loss Transmit to receive loss measured at the far
end 4-wire VF unit.
25 dB Minimum measured at 1 kHz
20 dB Minimum measured at any frequency
between 300 and 3000 Hz
Signal to total distortion ratio (1004 Hz 0 dBm0: > 33 dB
input) 0 to 30 dBm0: > 30 dB
40 dBm0: > 27 dB
45 dBm0: > 22 dB

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXO VF Submodule 12.5
Settings and Status

Settings and Status


To use the SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software to
access the details of this submodule, perform the following steps.
Step 1. Go to the device design page in the software.
The software will display a rendering of the node you have
selected.
Step 2. On the node rendering, double-click on the FXO Submodule
you want to configure.
At the bottom left of the screen, FXO Module will appear.
Step 3. Use the expansion button to the left of FXO Module to view
the rest of the settings tree.
The next level will expose Port 1, Port 2, and Backplane Slot
Statistics. The following tables explain the settings and data
you can view starting from this point.

Port Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Port 1, Port 2
Port Alias User-assigned name for the VF port
Port Enabled
Up Port is enabled
Down Port is disabled
Transmit Level Port Input TLP level (VF xmt)
8 to +3 dBm Setting range is in tenths of a dBm (xx.x dBm)
Receive Level Port Output TLP level (VF rcv)
12 to 0 dBm Setting range is in tenths of a dBm (xx.x dBm)
Impedance Port impedance level
600 Default setting
900
600 + 2.16 F
900 + 2.16 F
ANSI/EIA/TIA 464 Specifies a complex impedance for trunks
Global Complex Z Meets the requirements of every country whose PTT specifies a
complex impedance

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


12.6 FXO VF Submodule
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

VF Line Test Enables the various line test modes


Normal operation No test mode
Digital loopback Loopback excluding CODEC to the far-end submodule
Analog loopback Loopback including CODEC to the far-end submodule
Silence Transmission muted
Test Tone Enables the transmission of the 1000 Hz 0 dBm0 test tone
VF Local Test Enables the various local test modes
Normal operation No test mode
Digital loopback Loopback at the FPGAs Line interface
Serial loopback in FPGA Loopback at the FPGAs DAA interface
Silence Transmission muted
Test Tone Enables the transmission of the 1000 Hz 0 dBm0 test tone
Serial loopback in DAA Loopback at the DAAs FPGA interface
Signaling Line Test The line tests change the source for the signaling sent to the far end
(from the PBXs on-hook/off-hook status) to something else
Normal operation Normal operation
One long ring per 6s period Emulates this cadence from the FXO
Two short rings per 6s period Emulates this cadence from the FXO
One short and one long ring per 6s Emulates this cadence from the FXO
period
Emulated local open loop Emulates no line voltage present
Signaling Local The Local tests change the status of the local connection to the PBX
Test (from using the status of the far ends telephone)
Normal operation Normal operation
On Hook Forces an on-hook condition
Off Hook Forces an off-hook condition
Alarm Mask Open Loop Check the box associated with each event when it is desirable to
Over Current monitor these conditions in the event report.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXO VF Submodule 12.7
Settings and Status

Circuits

Setting Option Notes

User Circuit Address 065535 User circuit address (UCAD) to be sent to the remote module
Expected User Circuit 065535 The expected UCAD to be received from the remote module
Address
Use Far End Failure True/False Switch on Yellow (True) This setting is required to prevent channel asymme-
Indicator tries
Revertive Time-Out Off, 025.4 seconds The recovery time of the DPath after network restoration. When set to OFF, the
channel is non-revertive.
DPaths Check box field, DPaths assigned to the submodule. One must be assigned from left and right to
DPath 116 provide full protection for the channel. Left is fiber ports A or C, right is fiber
ports B or D.
Active DPath Right/Left Indicates which direction the channel is currently using, right or left

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


12.8 FXO VF Submodule
Settings and Status

Left and Right Port

Setting Option Notes

Priority 031 The priority of the DPath. The lower the number, the higher the priority. The
submodule will choose the DPath with the highest priority.
Network Path Address 065535 Network path address (NPAD) to send to the circuits far-end access module
Expected Network Path 065535 NPAD that is expected from circuits far-end access module
Address
Received Network Path 065535 NPAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module (read only)
Address
User Circuit Address 065535 UCAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
Received
DPipe 014 DPipe assigned to the DPath
Ingress Latency s Latency of the DPath from the far end
Egress Latency s Latency of the DPath to the far end
Link Bad True/False False indicates that the link is good, true indicates the link is bad (read only)
DS0 Check two boxes in Use to select which two DS0 bytes on the VT1.5 will be used
the box field 124
Cumulative Error Count Integer Number of errors detected during the test
Errored Seconds Milliseconds Total number of errored seconds detected during the test
Severely Errored Seconds Milliseconds Total number of severely errored seconds detected during the test
Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate of the DPath
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXO VF Submodule 12.9
Monitor

Monitor
Module Status

Monitor Point Units Notes

Temperature Degrees C Module temperature (operational range is 30 to +90C)


5V Shelf Voltage V +5 Volt shelf supply voltage (operational range 4.5 to 5.5)
3.3V Internal Voltage V Module 3.3 Volt supply (operational range 3.0 to 3.6)
1.2V Internal Voltage V Module 1.2 Volt supply (operational range 1.08 to 1.32)
Current mA Module current draw
LED Test Enabled/Disabled Sequences through all of the LED states

Port Status

Monitor Point Units Notes

Average Transmit Level dBm0 The average transmit level for the last second
Minimum Transmit Level dBm0 The minimum transmit level for the last second
Maximum Transmit Level dBm0 The maximum transmit level for the last second
Average Receive Level dBm0 The average receive level for the last second
Minimum Receive Level dBm0 The minimum receive level for the last second
Maximum Receive Level dBm0 The maximum receive level for the last second
Local Signaling State Status of local signaling input
Far End Signaling State Status of the far-end FXS signaling input
Loop Voltage V 060 V
Loop Current mA 0150 mA

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


12.10 FXO VF Submodule
Monitor

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on port A/C count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on port A/C count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on the A/C ports
Port A/C DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port A/C Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last statistics reset
Count
Port B/D Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on port B/D count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on port B/D count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on the B/D ports
Port B/D DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port B/D Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last counter reset
Count
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


FXO VF Submodule 12.11
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Using the LEDs Table 12.4 lists some common issues and probable causes for these
conditions.

Table 12.4 Troubleshooting the FXO VF Submodule

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Port input and output LEDs are off The port is not enabled Verify the port through the software
Port output LED (only) is off No DPaths have been assigned Assign DPaths
Port input LED is solid red Solid red indicates no dc or ac (ringing) Check connection to the PBX
voltage, or an overcurrent has tripped the If a port overcurrent is reported, check
connection off that the PBX port delivers < 70 mA
Port output LED is yellow. Connected The DPath to the remote device has been Check the network status
device might or might not be communicat- interrupted
ing
Port output LED is flashing red This indicates that one of the DPaths Repair the path
through the system is no longer available
Port output LED is solid red All DPaths are unavailable Confirm that the channel is configured
correctly on the ICON network and
that the network is up

Using the Local Tests The Signaling Local Test can be used to emulate an off-hook condition of
the far-end telephone. This would answer a call (ringing) from the PBX, or
initiate a call to the PBX.
The VF Local Test can be used to check that the FXO Submodule can send
an audible 1000 Hz tone to the PBX. It can also be used to check that the FXO
Submodule can loopback the voice to the PBX.

Using the Line Tests The VF Line Test can be used to send a 1000 Hz test tone to the far-end
access module.
The VF Line Test can also be used to loopback the VF from the far end (to
the far end).
The Signaling Line Test can be used to emulate a ringing input from the
local PBX.

Use the Level Meters For both the above special VF test modes, and during normal operations, the
VF level meters can be very useful.
For both the transmit and receive signal directions, there are three readings for
the minimum, average, and maximum levels during the previous one second.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Section 13
DS1 Async Submodule
Part Number 8057-01

Introduction
The DS1 Async Submodule provides four DS1 interfaces that can be
individually mapped to other DS1 ports on DS1 Async Submodules located at
other SEL Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON) sites. The
DS1 Async Submodule connections are made using one standard RJ48C
connector per circuit.

Operating Modes The DS1 Async dual-submodule can operate in the following modes:
AMI line code
B8ZS line code

Installation
The DS1 Async Submodule occupies two of the four submodule slots in the
Quattro Module. All modules in the ICON are hot swappable, meaning that
the modules can be removed and/or inserted while the system is powered and
in operation.

Module Replacement Should a submodule fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
submodule. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new submodule (in the
same Quattro Module slots) and transfer the existing settings onto the new
submodule. When the submodule is programmed and in service, the status
LED will turn from slow blinking blue to green.

Connector Pinout The DS1 Async Submodule is interfaced through four RJ48C female
connectors. These connectors are compatible with RJ48C cable ends.
Figure 13.1 shows the connector pinout.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


13.2 DS1 Async Submodule
Installation

1 RX (In) Ring
2 RX (In) Tip
3 N/C
4 TX (Out) Ring
5 TX (Out) Tip
6 N/C
7 N/C
8 N/C

Figure 13.1 RJ48C Connector Pinouts for a DS1 Circuit

Indicators
The DS1 Async Submodule has nine multicolor LED indicators. These
provide indication of the submodule status and data activity. Figure 13.2
shows the location and function of these LEDs. Table 13.1Table 13.3 provide
a legend for the LEDs and what each color state indicates.

Status

Port In
Port Out

Figure 13.2 DS1 Async LED Location and Function

Table 13.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED

Board LED Submodule


Precedence Description
Statusa Condition

0 Steady red Inoperative CPU nonresponsive. Server Module


has forced the LED to red.
1 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is
initializing the submodule.
2 Alternating red/ FPGA load The selected FPGA image is
blue (4)b error corrupted or missing.
3 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting Submodule is ready and waiting for
the Server Module.
4 Double-flashing Disabled Server Module has set the operational
yellowc state to disabled.
5 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, or temperature out
of range.
6 Steady blue Test mode An interface is in a test mode.
7 Steady green Normal Enabled and no errors.
a Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.
c Double-flash has two flashes per second at the 4 Hz rate.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Async Submodule 13.3
Specifications

Table 13.2 Port Input LED

Precedence LED Status Description

1 Dark Port disabled


2 Steady Red Line input error (AIS, LOS, BPV)
3 Steady Green Data received, DS1 okay

Table 13.3 Port Output LED

Precedence LED Statusa Description

1 Dark No paths assigned


2 Steady red All DPaths bad
3 Blinking redb, One or more DPaths are bad but at least one is good
steady green (4)c
4 Steady yellow FEFI received on all DPaths
5 Blinking yellow, REI, RDI received, but at least one path is still good
steady green (4)
6 Steady green Line is good
a Not all states apply to all port types.
b Blinking cadence is 125 ms on, 875 ms off.
c Numbers in parentheses denote rate, IPS, 50% duty cycle.

Connections and For all applications, use the SEL-C622 cable or equivalent. Figure 13.3 shows
the connection diagram. Note that this is a standard RJ48C to RJ48C
Cables crossover cable.

RJ48 SEL-C622 RJ48


Pin Pin
Func. Pin # Pin # Func.
Orange/White
RX Ring 1 4 TX Ring
Orange
RX Tip 2 Green/White 5 TX Tip
3 Blue
TX Ring 4 Blue/White 1 RX Ring
TX Tip 5 Green 2 RX Tip
6
Brown/White
7
Brown
8
Shield Shield
Figure 13.3 Cable Diagram for DS1 Async Applications

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption < 1.5 W
Chassis Space Requirements 2 Quattro submodule slots
Nominal Impedance 100

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


13.4 DS1 Async Submodule
Settings and Status

DS1 Line Coding B8Zs or AMI


Frame Format ESF or SF
Interface conforms to ANSI T1.403

Settings and Status


To use the SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software to
access the details of this submodule, perform the following steps.
Step 1. Go to the device design page in the software.
The software will display a rendering of the node you have
selected.
Step 2. On the node rendering, double-click on the DS1 Async
Submodule you want to configure.
At the bottom left of the screen, DS1 Async will appear.
Step 3. Use the expansion button to the left of DS1 Async to view the
rest of the settings tree.
The next level will expose Port 1, Port 2, Port 3, Port 4, and
Backplane Slot Statistics. The following tables explain the
settings and data you can view starting from this point.

Port Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Port 1, Port 2
Port Alias User-assigned name for the DS1 port
Port Enabled
Up Port is enabled
Down Port is disabled
Line Encoding Selects between Binary 8 Zero Substitution and Alternate Mark
Inversion line coding
B8ZS
AMI
Line Build Out Line Build Out (LBO) setting to match the cable length between the
DS1 Async Submodule and the terminating equipment
0133 ft
134266 ft
267399 ft
400533 ft
534655 ft

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Async Submodule 13.5
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Drop Port Loop- Enables the various loopback test modes


back
Normal (no loopback) No test mode
Digital loopback for local Loops the signal back at the VT level to the connected device
Digital loopback for line Loops the signal back at the VT level to the remote connected
device
Digital loopback for local and line Loops the signal back at the VT level to the local and remote con-
nected devices
Analog loopback for line Loops the analog signal from the connected device back on itself
Test Mode Enables the various local test modes
Normal (no test) No test mode
Drop PRBS Data leaving the port are 2x15-1 test pattern
Line PRBS Adds 2x15-1 test pattern to the remote device
Drop AIS Outputs an all 1s pattern to the local device
Drop BPV Forces a single BiPolar Violation
Port Mirroring This setting is available on Port 4 only
None Port is available to carry DS1 traffic
Local Port 1 The port mirrors the data entering Port 1
Remote Port 1 The port mirrors the data leaving Port 1
Local Port 2 The port mirrors the data entering Port 2
Remote Port 2 The port mirrors the data leaving Port 2
Local Port 3 The port mirrors the data entering Port 3
Remote Port 3 The port mirrors the data leaving Port 3

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


13.6 DS1 Async Submodule
Settings and Status

Circuits

Setting Option Notes

User Circuit Address 065535 User circuit address (UCAD) to be sent to the remote module
Expected User Circuit 065535 The expected UCAD to be received from the remote module
Address
Use Far End Failure True/False Switch on Yellow This setting is required to prevent channel asymmetries
Indicator
Revertive Time-Out Off, 025.4 seconds The recovery time of the DPath after network restoration
DPaths Check box field, DPaths assigned to the submodule. One must be assigned from left and right to
DPath 116 provide full protection for the channel. Left is fiber ports A or C, right is fiber
ports B or D.
Active DPath Right/Left Indicates which direction the channel is currently using, right or left

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Async Submodule 13.7
Monitor

Left and Right Port


When configuring the DPipe on the Line Module for use with a DS1 circuit,
you must set the VT structure to BULK.

Setting Option Notes

Priority 031 The priority of the DPath. The lower the number, the higher the priority. The
submodule will choose the DPath with the highest priority.
Network Path Address 065535 Network path address (NPAD) to send to the circuits far-end access module
Expected Network Path 065535 NPAD that is expected from circuits far-end access module
Address
Received Network Path 065535 NPAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module (read only)
Address
User Circuit Address 065535 UCAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
Received
DPipe 014 DPipe assigned to the DPath
Ingress Latency s Latency of the DPath from the far end
Egress Latency s Latency of the DPath to the far end
Link Bad True/False False indicates that the link is good, True indicates the link is bad (read only)
Serial Support Enable/Disable Enable sets serial support on J2 byte for interoperability (normally required)
Transporting Interface Slot/Port/STS/VT Provides information about which Line Module slot, line port, STS, and VT the
circuit is using

Monitor
Module Status

Monitor Point Units Notes

Temperature Degrees C Module temperature (operational range is 30 to +90C)


5V Shelf Voltage V +5 Volt shelf supply voltage (operational range 4.5 to 5.5)
3.3V Internal Voltage V Module 3.3 Volt supply (operational range 3.0 to 3.6)

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


13.8 DS1 Async Submodule
Monitor

Monitor Point Units Notes

1.2V Internal Voltage V Module 1.2 Volt supply (operational range 1.08 to 1.32)
Current mA Module current draw
LED Test Enabled/Disabled Sequences through all of the LED states

Port Statistics

Monitor Point Units Notes

Bipolar Violation Errors Count The number of bipolar violations since last reset
Excessive Zero Errors Count The number of excessive zero events since last reset
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

VT Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Bandwidth
Defect Status
Bit Error Rate Threshold
Signal Label
Interval Timer 15 min, 30 min, Sets the measurement interval for the interval statistics
1 hr, 2 hr, 6 hr,
12 hr, 1 day
Errored Seconds in Current Count Current count of errored seconds in the present interval
Interval
Errored Seconds Today Count Current count of errored seconds today

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Async Submodule 13.9
Monitor

Setting Option Notes

Errored Seconds Yesterday Count Total errored seconds for yesterday


Severely Errored Seconds Count Current count of severely errored seconds in the present interval
in Current Interval
Severely Errored Seconds Count Current count of severely errored seconds today
Today
Severely Errored Seconds Count Total severely errored seconds for yesterday
Yesterday
Coding Violations in Cur- Count Current count of coding violations in the present interval
rent Interval
Coding Violations Today Count Current count of coding violations today
Coding Violations Yester- Count Total coding violations for yesterday
day
Far End Coding Violations Count Current count of far-end coding violations in the present interval
in Current Interval
Far End Coding Violations Count Current count of far-end coding violations today
Today
Far End Coding Violations Count Total far-end coding violations for yesterday
Yesterday
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

VT Interval Statistics

Monitor Point Units Notes

Interval Errored Seconds Count The average transmit level for the last second
Interval Severely Errored Count The minimum transmit level for the last second
Seconds
Interval Coding Violations Count The maximum transmit level for the last second
Interval Valid Data True/False The average receive level for the last second
Far End Coding Violations Count The minimum receive level for the last second
Far End Interval Valid Data True/False

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


13.10 DS1 Async Submodule
Monitor

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on Port A/C
Port A/C DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port A/C Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last counter reset
Count
Port B/D Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on Port B/D
Port B/D DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER)
Port B/D Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated since last counter reset
Count
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Async Submodule 13.11
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Table 13.4 lists some common issues and probable causes for these
conditions.

Table 13.4 Troubleshooting the DS1 Async Submodule

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Port input and output LEDs are off The port is not enabled Verify the port through the software
Port output LED (only) is off No DPaths have been assigned Assign DPaths
Port output LED is flashing red This indicates that one of the DPaths Repair the path
through the system is no longer available
Port output LED is solid red All DPaths are unavailable Confirm that the channel is configured cor-
rectly on the ICON network and that the net-
work is up

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Section 14
DS1 Sync Submodule
Part Number 8057-02

Introduction
The DS1 Sync Submodule provides four DS1 interfaces that each support
SONET byte synchronous mapping of the DS1 payload. The DS1 Sync
Submodule connections are made using one standard RJ48C connector per
DS1.
The DS1 Sync Submodule, in conjunction with the Protected Line Module
(8021-01), supports the ability to groom network traffic at the DS0 level from
multiple locations into a single virtual tributary (VT1.5). The DS1 Sync
Submodule will allow the transport of circuits from 2-wire FXS/FXO, 4-wire
VF, and Nx64F submodules across the synchronous DS1 interface. Grooming
data from multiple drop interfaces into a single DS1 also increases the
efficiency of the VT bandwidth being used in the network.
DS1 equipment connected to the DS1 Sync Submodule must time from the
DS1 Sync Submodule to avoid data slips.

Line Modes The DS1 Sync Submodule supports the following line coding and framing
formats.
AMI line code
B8ZS line code
Superframe
Extended superframe

Installation
The DS1 Sync Submodule occupies two of the four submodule slots in the
Quattro Module. All modules in the SEL Integrated Communications Optical
Network (ICON) are hot swappable, meaning that the modules can be
removed and/or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should a submodule fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
submodule. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new submodule (in the
same Quattro Module slots) and transfer the existing settings onto the new
submodule. When the submodule is programmed and in service, the status
LED will turn from slow blinking blue to green.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


14.2 DS1 Sync Submodule
Installation

Connector Pinout The DS1 Sync Submodule is interfaced through four RJ48C female
connectors. These connectors are compatible with RJ48C cable ends.
Figure 14.1 shows the connector pinout.

1 RX (In) Ring
2 RX (In) Tip
3 N/C
4 TX (Out) Ring
5 TX (Out) Tip
6 N/C
7 N/C
8 N/C

Figure 14.1 RJ48C Connector Pinouts for a DS1 Circuit

Indicators
The DS1 Sync Submodule has nine multicolor LED indicators. These provide
indication of the submodule status and data activity. Figure 14.2 shows the
location and function of these LEDs. Table 14.1Table 14.3 provide a legend
for the LEDs and what each color state indicates.

Submodule
Status
Port 1

Port 2

Port Input Port 3


Port Output

Port 4

Figure 14.2 DS1 Sync LED Location and Function

Table 14.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED (Sheet 1 of 2)

Board LED Submodule


Precedence Description
Status Condition

0 Steady red Inoperative CPU nonresponsive. Server Module


has forced the LED to red.
1 Flashing blue (4)a Booting An image has been loaded and is
initializing the submodule.
2 Alternating red/ FPGA load The selected FPGA image is
blue (4)a error corrupted or missing.
3 Flashing blue (1)a Waiting Submodule is ready and waiting for
the Server Module.
4 Double-flashing Disabled Server Module has set the operational
yellowb state to disabled.
5 Flashing red (1)a Alarm Voltage, current, or temperature out
of range.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Sync Submodule 14.3
Installation

Table 14.1 Submodule Status Indicator LED (Sheet 2 of 2)

Board LED Submodule


Precedence Description
Status Condition

6 Flashing red (4)a Backplane Backplane communications failure.


alarm
7 Steady blue Test mode Test mode enabled. Test mode condi-
tion will be initiated when any of the
following modes are enabled: Port
Loopback, Port Test Mode, Port Mir-
roring, or Circuit Test Mode.
8 Steady green Normal Enabled and no errors.
a The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate per second.
b Double-flash has two flashes per second at the 4 Hz rate.

Table 14.2 Port Input LED

Precedence LED Status Description

1 Dark Port disabled


2 Steady Red DS1 input error (AIS, LOS, LOF)
3 Steady Green DS1 signal is good

Table 14.3 Port Output LED

Precedence LED Status Description

1 Dark DS1 port disabled or no DPaths assigned


2 Steady red All DPaths bad on all circuits
3 Blinking reda, One or more DPaths are bad but at least one is good
steady green on one circuit
4 Steady yellow FEFI received on all DPaths
5 Blinking yellowa, FEFI received, but at least one DPath is still good
steady green
6 Steady green All DPaths are good
a Blinking cadence is 125 ms on, 875 ms off.

Connections and Use the SEL-C622 cable or equivalent to connect line equipment to DS1 Sync
data ports. Figure 14.3 shows the connection diagram. Note that this is a
Cables standard RJ48C to RJ48C crossover cable.

RJ48 SEL-C622 RJ48


Pin Pin
Func. Pin # Pin # Func.
Orange/White
RX Ring 1 4 TX Ring
Orange
RX Tip 2 Green/White 5 TX Tip
3 Blue
TX Ring 4 Blue/White 1 RX Ring
TX Tip 5 Green 2 RX Tip
6
Brown/White
7
Brown
8
Shield Shield
Figure 14.3 Cable Diagram for DS1 Sync Applications

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


14.4 DS1 Sync Submodule
Specifications

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption < 1.5 W
Chassis Space Requirements 2 Quattro submodule slots

DS1 Line Coding B8ZS or AMI


Frame Format ESF or SF
Nominal Impedance 100
DPath Switching Time (in event of fiber 5 ms
break)
Interface conforms to ANSI T1.403

Refer to Specifications on page 1.19 for more information on DS1 Sync


Submodule specifications.

Settings and Status


To use the SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software to
access the details of this submodule, perform the following steps.
Step 1. Go to the Device View tab in the software.
The software will display a rendering of the node you have
selected.
Step 2. On the node rendering, double-click on the DS1 Sync
Submodule you want to configure or monitor.
At the bottom left of the screen, DS1 Sync will appear.
Step 3. Use the expansion button to the left of DS1 Sync to view the
rest of the settings tree.
The next level will expose Port 1, Port 2, Port 3, Port 4, and
Backplane Slot Statistics. The following tables explain the
settings and data you can view starting from this point.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Sync Submodule 14.5
Settings and Status

Port Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Port 1, Port 2, Port 3, Port 4


Port Alias User-assigned name for the DS1 port (maximum 16 characters)
Port Enabled
Up DS1 port is enabled
Down DS1 port is disabled
Line Encoding Select line coding format
B8ZS Binary 8 Zero Substitution
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
Framing Select DS1 framing mode
Superframe SF
Extended Superframe ESF
Line Build Out Select the range that matches the cable length between the DS1
Sync Submodule and the terminating equipment
0133 ft (040.5 m)
134266 ft (40.881.1 m)
267399 ft (81.4121.6 m)
400533 ft (122162.5 m)
534655 ft (162.8198.7 m)
Loopback Enables the various loopback test modes. Figure 14.4 shows a dia-
gram of the DS1 Sync Submodule port test modes.
Disabled No loopback mode
Digital Loopback for Local Loops the signal back at the DS1 level to the local connected device
Digital Loopback for Line Loops the signal back at the DS1 level to the remote connected
device
Digital Loopback for Local and Line Loops the signal back at the DS1 level to the local and remote con-
nected devices
Analog Loopback for Line Loops the analog signal from the SONET line side back on itself
Test Mode Enables the various local test modes
Disabled No port test mode
Drop PRBS Outputs an unframed 215 1 test pattern
Drop All Ones Outputs an unframed all 1s test pattern
Drop BPV Outputs a BiPolar Violation once every second
Drop All Zeros Outputs an unframed all 0s test pattern
PRBS Locked True/False Only available when Drop PRBS is selected in Test Mode. Indicates
when PRBS analyzer is locked to PRBS test generator sequence.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


14.6 DS1 Sync Submodule
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Port Mirroring This setting is available on Port 4 only


Disabled
Local Port 1 Port 4 outputs the data entering Port 1
Remote Port 1 Port 4 outputs the data leaving Port 1
Local Port 2 Port 4 outputs the data entering Port 2
Remote Port 2 Port 4 outputs the data leaving Port 2
Local Port 3 Port 4 outputs the data entering Port 3
Remote Port 3 Port 4 outputs the data leaving Port 3

Line Force Drop Line DS1


All Ones, T1 Frame Drop
Module Generator Driver
Drop All Zeros Tx

Generator
Line Local Line
Drop Digital Digital Analog
PRBS Loopback Loopback Loopback
Detector

Line DS1
Module T1 Frame Receiver Drop
Add Processor Rx

Figure 14.4 DS1 Sync Submodule Port Test Modes

Circuits

Setting Option Notes

Circuit Type
VF Circuit can carry one channel of VF from an ICON VF module. User must
assign two DS0 bytes for a single VF channel.
N DS0 Channels Circuit can carry between 1 and 23 channels of Nx64 data. The 8051-01 Nx64F
module can provide a maximum of 12 channels User must assign N + 1 DS0
bytes for every N Nx64 data channel.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Sync Submodule 14.7
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Signaling Mode
Clear Channel There is no signaling information embedded in the frame, each frame uses the
full eight bits to carry data. Used for 4-Wire Submodule (8065-01).
Robbed Bit Signal- The least significant bit of every 6th frame is used to carry signaling informa-
ing tion (used for VF signaling)
Signaling Mapping Only applicable if Robbed Bit Signaling is selected
A/B Signaling Signaling is carried in the circuit data. Used when not dropping into ICON FXO
or FXS submodules.
ICON FXS Signal- Channel signaling is translated to ICON FXS signaling compatible with the
ing 8066-01 FXS module
ICON FXO Signal- Channel signaling is translated to ICON FXO signaling compatible with the
ing 8067-01 FXO module
Hairpin Port Sets a hairpin connection between two channels. The channels can be on differ-
ent ports on one DS1 Sync Submodule. The same channel can be used for both
ends of the hairpin to create a non-test mode channel loopback.
Each circuit must be in VF or single-channel Nx64 (N = 1) mode so there is a
direct association between a circuit and a channel. The destination hairpin port
and channel must be specified from the circuit at each end of the hairpin. For
example, if Port 1 Channel 2 is hairpinned to Port 3 Channel 4, then Port 3
Channel 4 must be hairpinned to Port 1 Channel 2.
The signaling must be set to Clear Channel or to A/B Signaling at both ends of
the hairpin. No DPath settings should be configured for either end of the hair-
pin.
The hairpin is removed by changing the hairpin port setting to Disable at each
end of the hairpin. When an Nx64 circuit is configured, all of the channels in
the group must have the far end of any hairpins removed.
Disabled
Port 1 There is a hairpin connection to a channel in Port 1
Port 2 There is a hairpin connection to a channel in Port 2
Port 3 There is a hairpin connection to a channel in Port 3
Port 4 There is a hairpin connection to a channel in Port 4
Hairpin Channel 124 This is the channel number (124) in the selected DS1 port
User Circuit Address 065535 User circuit address (UCAD) to be sent to the remote module
Expected User Circuit 065535 The expected UCAD to be received from the remote module
Address
Use Far End Failure True/False Switch on Yellow This setting is required to prevent channel asymmetries
Indicator
Revertive Time-Out Off, 025.4 seconds The recovery time of the DPath after network restoration
DPaths Left (Port A/C) 1 For a single ring, at least one DPath must be assigned from both left and right to
Left (Port A/C) 2 provide protection for the channel. For multiple rings and quad homing, it is
Right (Port B/D) 1 recommended that two DPaths be assigned from both left and right. Left is line
Right (Port B/D) 2 ports A or C, right is line ports B or D.
Active DPath None, Indicates which DPath the channel is currently using
Left (Port A/C) 1
Left (Port A/C) 2
Right (Port B/D) 1
Right (Port B/D) 2

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


14.8 DS1 Sync Submodule
Settings and Status

Setting Option Notes

Test Mode
Disabled No test mode engaged
Forced Signaling Signaling bits sent to drop channel are replaced by the test signaling bits
Pattern 00 to DS1 Data sent to the DS1 drop channel is replaced by pattern 00
Drop
Pattern 5A to DS1 Data sent to the DS1 drop channel is replaced by pattern 5A
Drop
Pattern A5 to DS1 Data sent to the DS1 drop channel is replaced by pattern A5
Drop
Pattern F0 to DS1 Data sent to the DS1 drop channel is replaced by pattern F0
Drop
Pattern FF to DS1 Data sent to the DS1 drop channel is replaced by pattern FF
Drop
Pattern 00 to Line Data sent to the remote channel is replaced by pattern 00
Module
Pattern 5A to Line Data sent to the remote channel is replaced by pattern 5A
Module
Pattern A5 to Line Data sent to the remote channel is replaced by pattern A5
Module
Pattern F0 to Line Data sent to the remote channel is replaced by pattern F0
Module
Pattern FF to Line Data sent to the remote channel is replaced by pattern FF
Module
Test Signaling Bits If Test Mode Forced Signaling is selected, the Test Signaling Bits are used to
replace the normal signaling bits. The A/B bits are used differently depending
on what type of module is at the far end and whether the signaling bits are com-
ing into the DS1 Sync Module or being transmitted from the DS1 Module.
Bit A Enable or disable Signaling Bit A
Bit B Enable or disable Signaling Bit B

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Sync Submodule 14.9
Settings and Status

Left and Right Port

Setting Option Notes

Priority 031 The priority of the DPath. The lower the number, the higher the priority. The
submodule will choose the DPath with the highest priority. The priority should
be unique for each circuit.
Network Path Address 065535 Network path address (NPAD) to send to the circuits far-end access module
Expected Network Path 065535 NPAD that is expected from circuits far-end access module
Address
Received Network Path 065535 NPAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
Address
User Circuit Address 065535 UCAD that is actually received from circuits far-end access module
Received
DPipe 031 DPipe assigned to the DPath
Ingress Latency (s) Latency of the DPath from the far end
Egress Latency (s) Latency of the DPath to the far end
Link Bad True/False False indicates that the link is good, True indicates the link is bad
DS0 124 Used to select which DS0 Bytes on the DPipe will be used. The number of DS0
Bytes is determined by the circuit type.
Errored Seconds Total number of errored seconds detected since last reset
Reset Statistics Resets the Errored Seconds counter above

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


14.10 DS1 Sync Submodule
Monitor

Monitor
Module Status

Monitor Point Units/Status Notes

Module State
Offline Module has been disabled by the Server Module (8030-01)
Alarm Module has one or more active alarms
Backplane Alarm Module has an active backplane alarm
Test Module is in test mode
Good Module is running normally without any other conditions
Temperature Degrees C Module temperature (operational range is 30 to +90)
5V Shelf Voltage V +5 Volt shelf supply voltage (operational range 4.5 to 5.5)
3.3V Internal Voltage V Module 3.3 Volt supply (operational range 3.0 to 3.6)
1.2V Internal Voltage V Module 1.2 Volt supply (operational range 1.08 to 1.32)
Current mA Module current draw
LED Test Enabled/Disabled Sequences through all of the LED states

Port Statistics

Monitor Point Units Notes

Bipolar Violation Errors Count The number of bipolar violations since last reset
Excessive Zero Errors Count The number of excessive zero events since last reset
Reset Statistics Resets the counters for this port

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


DS1 Sync Submodule 14.11
Monitor

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Units Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port A/C count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port A/C Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on Port A/C
Port A/C DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency for Port A/C
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER) for Port A/C
Port A/C Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated on Port A/C since last counter reset
Count
Port B/D Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented by error
frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Severely Errored Seconds Number of severely errored seconds on Port B/D count that will be incremented
Seconds by error frame, received for every 125 s
Port B/D Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in megahertz of the clock on Port B/D
Port B/D DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency for Port B/D
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Percentage Percentage based on the current bit error rate (BER) for Port B/D
Port B/D Cumulative Error The total number of errors accumulated on Port B/D since last counter reset
Count
Reset Statistics Resets all of the counters above

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


14.12 DS1 Sync Submodule
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Table 14.4 lists some common issues and probable causes for these
conditions.

Table 14.4 Troubleshooting the DS1 Sync Submodule

Problem Possible Cause Solution

Port input and output LEDs are off The port is not enabled Enable the port
Port output LED is off No DPaths have been assigned Assign DPaths
Port output LED is flashing red This indicates that one or more of the Repair the DPath(s)
DPaths through the system is no longer
available
Port output LED is solid red All DPaths on this port are bad on all cir- Confirm that the DPaths are configured cor-
cuits rectly on the ICON network and that the net-
work is up

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Section 15
Ethernet Access Module
Part Number 8035-01

Introduction
General The Ethernet Access Module (EAM) provides eight 10/100 Ethernet ports on
a full height access module. Four of the eight ports can supply power over
Ethernet (PoE). PoE allows the SEL Integrated Communications Optical
Network (ICON) system, through the Ethernet cables, to power remote
devices such as IP phones or cameras. The EAM is compatible with access
module slots 4 and 5 of the ICON. The EAM is currently only supported by
the Protected Line Module (PLM).

LAN Ports
On the drop side, the PLM has an integrated switch capable of supporting as
many as two EAM modules. The switch can provide time distribution to IEDs
via IEEE C37.238 (1588 v2 Power Profile). This is not supported in the
current release.
Features supported on copper Ethernet ports include the following:
Auto-negotiation (bit rate)
Auto-MDIX (crossover cables not required)
Port enabling and disabling
PoE (as many as four ports)802.3af compliant

Ethernet Features
For security purposes, interruption of a ports LINK status is monitored and an
alarm notification to the NMS is issued. The switch supports eight priority
queues, and VLAN filtering per port. MAC address table functions include the
following:
Content-addressable RAM
Aging Field
Learn and Ageuser-configurable aging time-out
Learn and Lockuser-configurable learn time-out
No Learnuser-entered MAC addresses

The switch supports the following VLAN capabilities:


802.1Q VLANs
Nested VLANs (802.1Q VLANs in PVLANs)

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


15.2 Ethernet Access Module
Installation

The switch supports the following standards:

802.1d Ethernet bridge


802.1Q VLAN tagging, priority queues
802.3i 10BASE-T (RJ45 Cu)
802.3af Power over Ethernet (PoE)
802.3u 100BASE-TX (RJ45 Cu)
802.3z 1000BASE-LX/ZX/BX
DSCP DiffServe to 802.1Q priority mapping

Installation
The EAM can only be installed in chassis slots 4 and 5. All modules in the
ICON are hot swappable, which means that the modules can be removed
and/or inserted while the system is powered and in operation.

Module Replacement Should the EAM fail while it is in service, you can replace it with a like
module. The ICON will recognize the insertion of a new module and transfer
the existing settings onto the new EAM Module. When the EAM is
programmed and in service, the status LED will turn from slow blinking blue
to green.

Indicators
Module Status LED

Port Status LED

PoE Status LED

Figure 15.1 EAM LED Location and Function

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Ethernet Access Module 15.3
Specifications

Table 15.1 Module Status Indicator LED

Module
Precedence Status LED Details
Condition

0a Steady red Board dead Server Module asserts this condition when board is unresponsive
1 Flashing blue (4)b Booting An image has been loaded and is initializing the module
2 Alternating red/blue (4)b FPGA load error The selected FPGA image is corrupted or missing
3 Flashing blue (1)b Waiting The module is ready and waiting for the Server Module
4 Double flashing yellow Disabled The Server Module has set the operational state to disabled
5 Flashing red (1)b Alarm Voltage, current, temperature out of range, or Ethernet PHY hard-
ware failure
6 Flashing red (4)b Lost communica- Backplane communications failure
tions to Line
Module
7 Steady green Normal The module is enabled and okay
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate-per-second.

Table 15.2 PoE LED

Precedence PoE LED State PoE Status Details

0a Dark No PoE being supplied Link down, no connection, or device not using PoE
1 Double-flashing red PoE detect, but PoE disabled PoE device detected, but PoE disabled on port
2 Red PoE problem Port cannot supply PoE (mismatch, overload)
3 Green PoE okay Link up, port supplying PoE
a Precedence level 0 is highest.

Table 15.3 Ethernet Port LED

Precedence Ethernet Port LED State Ethernet Port Condition Details

0a Dark Link down


1 Double-flashing red Link up, but port is disabled
2 Steady red Security violation Incorrect port group in egressing
frame or PQM duplication or learn
and lock violation
3 Flashing red (1)b Ethernet problem CRC, framing errors
4 Flashing green (4)b Link up, line active Data in/out
5 Steady green Link up, line idle No activity
a Precedence level 0 is highest.
b The number in parentheses represents the LED flash rate-per-second.

Specifications
Hardware Operating Temperature 20 to +65C
Humidity 0 to 95% noncondensing
Power Consumption < 3W
Chassis Space Requirements Module slots 4 and 5 only
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface RJ45

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


15.4 Ethernet Access Module
Settings

Settings
! CAUTION
The left and right PLM Modules also
contain settings pertinent to EAM port
settings. See Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) on page 4.10.

DSCP Configuration

Setting Option Notes

DSCP Value n 07 (Priority) Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)


When the DSCP mapping setting is set to enable, the QoS setting in the DSCP bits of the IP
packet entering the switch is used to set the QoS of that message. The DSCP value setting is
used to map the DSCP values to the eight QoS priority settings of the ICON. When an EAM
Module is reset, the DSCP values are set to default values. (DSCP 07 set to priority 0,
DSCP 815 to priority 1, etc.) Priority 7 is the highest.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Ethernet Access Module 15.5
Settings

Port Configuration

Setting Option Notes

Ports 18

Port Alias User-assigned name for the port (16-character limit)


Port State Port status as indicated by Ethernet Port LED. See Table 15.3.
Link Down Link down
Disabled Port Link up, but port is disabled
Link Attempt
Alarm Security violation
Ethernet CRC Ethernet problem
Errors
Port Active Link up, line active
Port Idle Link up, line idle
Port Enabled Turning the port on or off
Up On
Down Off
Link Status Status up or down
MDI/MDIX Crossover
Forward
Reverse
Auto Detect

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


15.6 Ethernet Access Module
Settings

Setting Option Notes

MDI/MDIX Crossover Status Status of MDI/MDIX


Auto Negotiate Enable/Disable Auto negotiate for speed and duplex
Speed Hard set the port for 10 or 100 Mbps
10
100
Speed Status Status of the speed of the port
Duplex Status Full Always full duplex
PoE Mode Power over Ethernet configuration
Disabled PoE is disabled
Class 1 Class 1 range of power, 4000 mW
Class 2 Class 2 range of power, 7000 mW
Class 3 Class 3 range of power, 15400 mW
PoE Class Power class of device connected to port based on power being sourced
No Power No power being sourced from port
Class 1 Class 1 range of power being sourced, up to 4000 mW
(4000 mW)
Class 2 Class 2 range of power being sourced, 40007000 mW
(7000 mW)
Class 3 Class 3 range of power being sourced, 700015400 mW
(15400 mW)
Unknown Power class of device cannot be determined
PoE Power milliwatts Displays power in mW being sourced from port to device
PoE State Idle No PoE device connected
Disabled PoE disabled from port and PoE device connected
Fault Fault detected in PoE connection
Powered PoE device connected and being powered by port
Port Group The port group to which the port is assigned. The default is Port Group 1.
Ingress VLAN Filtering This will enable block or allow of the VLANs listed in the Member VID table
Disable Disable VLAN filtering
Enabled-Block Block listed VLANs
Enabled-Allow Enable listed VLANs
Force Ingress Priority True/False If enabled, use the value specified by Forced Priority for all ingressing
packetsreference 802.1p
Forced Priority 07 If Force Ingress Priority is true, use this value for all ingressing packets. Higher
values indicate higher priorities.
Force Ingress VID True/False If enabled, use the value specified by Forced VID for all ingressing packets.
Existing VLAN address values will be overwritten. Reference 802.1Q.
Forced VID 14094 If Force Ingress VID is true, use this value for all ingressing packets. Existing
VLAN addresses will be overwritten.
Ingress DSCP Mapping Enables differentiated services for QoS management of Ethernet traffic
Disabled DSCP disabled
Enabled DSCP enabled
Egress QTAG Stripping Supports removal of 802.1Q VLAN tags from Ethernet frames on egress from
switch
Disabled VLAN tags are left untouched

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Ethernet Access Module 15.7
Monitor

Setting Option Notes

Auto Enable VLAN tags are removed if added by ICON on ingress


Always VLAN tags are removed on egress
Enabled

Member VID

Setting Option Notes

Cells 132 04095 Enter the VLAN number(s) to be blocked or allowed. System forces VLAN numbers to be
unique. Enter a zero (0) to remove a VLAN entry.

Statistics Counts of ingress and egress Ethernet frames. Reset clears Ethernet frame and
Diffserv statistics.

DSCP Counters Counts of frames mapped from a Diffserv code point (063) to a switch
priority (07).

Monitor
Module Status

Monitor Point Units Notes

Module State Module state as displayed in module LED


Offline Module has been disabled by Server Module
Alarm Module has one or more active alarms
Backplane Alarm Module has an active backplane alarm
Test Module is in test mode
Good Module is running normally without any other conditions

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


15.8 Ethernet Access Module
Monitor

Monitor Point Units Notes

Temperature C Module temperature (operational range is 30 to +90C)


+5 Volt Supply V +5 Volt shelf supply voltage (operational range 4.55.8)
3.3 Volt Supply V Module 3.3 Volt supply (operational range 3.03.6)
1.2 Volt Supply V Module 1.2 Volt supply (operational range 1.071.31)
Current mA Module current draw
LED Test Enable /Disable Sequences through all of the LED states
1.2 Volt Supply V Module 1.2 Volt supply (operational range 1.081.31)
1.5 Volt Supply V Module 1.5 Volt supply (operational range 1.341.65)
2.5 Volt Supply V Module 2.5 Volt supply (operational range 2.252.75)

Backplane Slot
Statistics

Setting Option Notes

Port A/C Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port A/C with a bad clock or at least one
CRC error
Port A/C Severely Errored Seconds Seconds Number of seconds on Port A/C with a bad clock or more than eight CRC
errors
Port A/C Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in Megahertz of the clock on Port A/C
Port A/C DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port A/C Bit Error Rate Number of CRC errors in the preceding second
Port A/C Cumulative Error Count The total number of CRC errors accumulated since last counter reset
Port B/D Errored Seconds Seconds Number of errored seconds on Port B/D with a bad clock or at least one
CRC error
Port B/D Severely Errored Seconds Seconds Number of seconds on Port B/D with a bad clock or more than eight CRC
errors
Port B/D Clock Frequency Megahertz Frequency in Megahertz of the clock on Port B/D
Port B/D DCM Frequency Megahertz Digital clock manager frequency
Port B/D Bit Error Rate Number of CRC errors in the preceding second

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Ethernet Access Module 15.9
Monitor

Setting Option Notes

Port B/D Cumulative Error Count The total number of CRC errors accumulated since last counter reset
Ingress Data Valid Displays if left (A/C) or right (B/D) backplane communications are valid
Ingress Data Alarm Enable Set by user to enable alarm if left or right side Line Module is missing
Egress Channel Displays if left (A/C) or right (B/D) backplane communication is active
Left Ingress Frame Errors Counts number of CRC errors on Left (A/C) backplane communication
Right Ingress Frame Errors Counts number of CRC errors on Right (B/D) backplane communication
Reset Statistics Resets the counters above

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Appendix A
Firmware and Manual Versions

Firmware
Table A.1 through Table A.14 list the firmware versions, a description of
modifications, and the quick-start guide date code that corresponds to
firmware versions. The most recent firmware version is listed first. Table A.15
lists the SEL-5051 Network Management System Software version, a
description of modifications, and the quick-start guide date code that
corresponds to software versions.

Table A.1 Line Module Firmware Revision History (Sheet 1 of 2)

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8020-01-R109-V0-Z006001-D20140814 IRIG-B outputs X and Y now do not provide timing outputs unless 20140815
a synchronized and consistent clock timing source is present.
Resolved an issue where an Ethernet PoE port showed to be in a
powered state even though no power was being provided to the
connected device.
SEL-8020-01-R108-V0-Z006001-D20140207 Added support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPs. 20140228
Added multiple egress frame size counters for each Ethernet port.
Added optional mapping for Layer 3 Differentiated Services
Code Points (DSCP) to Layer 2 priorities (QoS) for each Ethernet
port.
Added optional stripping of the QTAG on egress for each Ether-
net port.
Oversubscribing bandwidth speeds on drop ports will now not
result in CRC errors in the data stream.
The cross-connect mapping for both even and odd STS destina-
tions now works correctly for STS-1 and STS-3c.
Reliable Ethernet communication with the NMS Ethernet port is
now available regardless of the modules traffic load.
Dual Homing now works correctly for STS-1, STS-3c, and
STS-12c.
The Line Modules IRIG-B local-time outputs DST flag no lon-
ger remains set if this mode is disabled while DST is in effect.
The Line Modules IRIG-B local-time outputs parity bit is now
correct while DST is in effect.
STS Generate PRBS mode is now correctly cleared.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


A.2 Firmware and Manual Versions
Firmware

Table A.1 Line Module Firmware Revision History (Sheet 2 of 2)

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8020-01-R107-V0-Z005001-D20121217 All higher-level alarms are now displayed if there are more than 20130125
200 lower-level alarms being displayed.
Changed default SFP low power alert to 15 dBm and low power
alarm to 18 dBm.
IRIG-B output time is now correctly adjusted when DST ends.
Fixed problem with reserving VTs in STS 1,1 through STS 4,3
causing problems with making changes to STS settings in the 5,1
to 12,1 range.
If there are reserved VTs in STS 1,2 or 1,3 you are now prevented
from setting STS 1,1 to STS 3c.
SEL-8020-01-R106-V0-Z004001-D20120416 Added support for DS1 Async Submodule. 20120416
SEL-8020-01-R105-V0-Z003001-D20110920 Added single-fiber SFP support. 20111011
Line Module now correctly clears the last alarm time stamp after
a loss-of-link alarm is cleared.
Frequency accuracy of synchronization sources are now qualified
for accuracy instead of assuming that the SSM (synchronization
status messaging) value correctly reflects the quality of the
source.
QVID filtering of Ethernet frames no longer generates a module
alarm.
Creating VCATs on STSs 9,3 10,3 ... 16,3 no longer causes GFP
framing errors.
Issue with Ethernet switch dropping Ethernet frames as a conse-
quence of losing MAC table information has been resolved.
MAC table is now flushed when EPipe mappings change.
EPipe link monitor now only alarms at broken node.
Receive level threshold alarm now triggers SONET path switch.
Loss of GPS occasionally caused a Bad Backplane alarm. This
has been resolved and no longer occurs.
SEL-8020-01-R104-V0-Z002001-D20110719 Line Module Ethernet ports are now correctly set to disabled by 20110711
default.
Link monitor statistics can now be reset.
Alarm is now correctly generated for invalid QVID.
Issue related to alarm indications not clearing when the alarm
condition has been removed has been resolved.
Configuration of TOH bytes is now correctly maintained through
the reboot process.
SEL-8020-01-R102-V0-Z001001-D20101213 Initial version. 20110215

Table A.2 Protected Line Module Firmware Revision History (Sheet 1 of 2)

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8021-01-R106-V0-Z003001-D20140814 IRIG-B outputs X and Y now do not provide timing outputs unless 20140815
a synchronized and consistent clock timing source is present.
SEL-8021-01-R105-V0-Z003001-D20130730 Added support for 8057-02, which provides the ability to provide 20130730
four channelized synchronous DS1 ports.
Added the ability to cross connect and groom network traffic at
the DS0 level from multiple locations into a single VT1.5.
The drop VT1.5 AIS insert operation now operates correctly.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware and Manual Versions A.3
Firmware

Table A.2 Protected Line Module Firmware Revision History (Sheet 2 of 2)

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8021-01-R103-V0-Z002001-D20130108 Fixed issue that restricted Ethernet Port Groups ranges that could 20130125
be used with EAM.
All higher-level alarms are now displayed if there are greater than
200 lower-level alarms being displayed.
Changed default SFP low power alert to 15 dBm and low power
alarm to 18 dBm.
Fixed problem with reserving VTs in STS 1,1 through STS 4,3
causing problems with making changes to STS settings in the 5,1
to 12,1 range.
If there are reserved VTs in STS 1,2 or 1,3 you are now prevented
from setting STS 1,1 to STS 3c.
SEL-8021-01-R101-V0-Z001001-D20120810 Initial version. 20120813

Table A.3 Server Module Firmware Revision History (Sheet 1 of 2)

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8030-01-R112-V0-Z008004-D20140604 Server module no longer stops connecting through TCP after a 20140623
number of failed attempts.
SEL-8030-01-R111-V0-Z007004-D20140228 Resolved issue that prevented some processes from running after 20140228
497 days of continuous operation.
SEL-8030-01-R110-V0-Z007004-D20140224 Resolved issue that in previous firmware caused internal systems n/a
that rely on timers (e.g., Inventory Monitoring) to stop working
after 497 days.
Note: Firmware version R110 did not production release.
SEL-8030-01-R109-V0-Z007004-D20140205 Added support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPs. n/a
Note: Firmware version R109 did not production release.
SEL-8030-01-R108-V0-Z006004-D20130730 Added support for DS1 Sync submodule SEL 8057-02. 20130730
Added support for DS0 grooming through SEL 8057-02.
Created new alarm to indicate when Server Module is running
from factory-loaded firmware image.
Server Module status LED will now display as yellow during the
firmware upgrade reboot process.
SEL-8030-01-R106-V0-Z005004-D20130321 Added ability to set the maximum message size for SNMP mes- 20130321
sages.
Fixed issue that prevented nodes containing Crypto Modules
from having settings backed up.
Fixed issue that required the Server Module (8030-01) to be
rebooted after performing a node restore to ensure GPS configu-
ration settings were correctly initialized.
SEL-8030-01-R105-V0-Z005003-D20120808 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813
Added support for Ethernet Access Module.
Module temperature is now reported in C.
If IRIG-B is used for timing, the IRIG-B input parity must be
changed after upgrading to R104 firmware.
GPS signal is now properly reacquired after a firmware upgrade.
SEL-8030-01-R103-V0-Z004003-D20120314 Added support for FXO and FXS Submodules. 20120316
Added support for DS1 Async Submodule.
Added backup and restore of node settings.
Issue with intermittent rebooting of Server Module has been
resolved.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


A.4 Firmware and Manual Versions
Firmware

Table A.3 Server Module Firmware Revision History (Sheet 2 of 2)

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8030-01-R102-V0-Z003003-D20110920 Added support for single-fiber SFPs. 20111011


Added support for 4-Wire VF Module.
Added support for Crypto Module.
Spurious Server Module RTS event was generated each time
module rebooted. This no longer occurs.
Server Module now correctly sets the status LED of an unrespon-
sive or dead access module/submodule to steady red.
Server Module NMS port does not support 10 Mb Ethernet. User
will no longer get network connectivity indication if a 10 Mb con-
nection is made.
SEL-8030-01-R101-V0-Z002002-D20110705 Added support for Transfer Trip Module. 20110711
Implemented AES cryptography for SNMP to improve security
over DES algorithm.
GPS Lock alarm is now cleared after port is disabled.
GPS used to report loss of lock once per day, this has been
resolved.
Updating GPS input settings no longer causes a Server Module
Alarm condition.
Alarm now correctly generated if IRIG-B input is enabled and no
signal is present.
Node no longer reports an alarm condition after a module gener-
ating an alarm has been removed.
SEL-8030-01-R100-V0-Z001001-D20101103 Initial version. 20110215

Table A.4 Nx64F Submodule Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8051-01-R105-V0-Z003001-D20120827 Resolved an issue that caused the Nx64 link to display as Bad if 20140827
test data source was set to anything other than No Source.
Resolved an issue that caused an incorrect test pattern from the
test generator to be inserted into the path.
Resolved an issue that caused the Test Monitor to sometimes
reports errors when the pattern was good.
Enhanced alarm reporting by flashing the module LED at 4 Hz
red if NIF-7 backplane occurs on the side with an active DPipe.
Enhanced Reset Module operation so that it will clear Test Mode
as well as all other defaults.
Resolved an issue that caused the Nx64 Module to sometimes
send FEFI (far-end fault indication) on an incorrect path when
using quad homing.
Resolved an issue where the Nx64F module did not alarm prop-
erly when an optical signal was below thresholds.
Resolved an issue where an SSM (synchronization status messag-
ing) status change would cause BER (bit error ratio) errors on the
data stream that went unreported.
SEL-8051-01-R104-V0-Z003001-D20120810 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813
Nx64F Port now disabled by default.
Module temperature is now reported in C.
SEL-8051-01-R102-V0-Z002001-D20110708 UCAD alarm is now cleared when the DPath is removed from the 20110711
circuit.
Setting command to disable Nx64 port now correctly disables the
port.
SEL-8051-01-R101-V0-Z001001-D20101129 Initial version. 20110215

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware and Manual Versions A.5
Firmware

Table A.5 Async Submodule Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8053-01-R106-V0-Z004001-D20140814 IRIG-B output on DCD, CTS, or DSR pins, if enabled, now does 20140815
not provide IRIG-B information unless a synchronized and con-
sistent clock timing source is present.
SEL-8053-01-R105-V0-Z004001-D20140620 Module now allows dPipe assignments from 041. 20140623
Reset of module via SEL-5051 now clears test modes.
Default data rate is now 9,600 baud (was 19,200).
Module will flash LED if backplane data errors occur.
New alarm generated if more than 10 parity errors per second
occur.
Alarm precedence now suppresses unimportant alarms.
Single alarm is now generated for any voltage problem.
The correct IRIG-B UTC output is present on lower connector.
SEL-8053-01-R104-V0-Z003001-D20120810 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813
Module temperature is now reported in C.
SEL-8053-01-R102-V0-Z002001-D20110708 UCAD alarm is now cleared when the DPath is removed from the 20110711
circuit.
Async loopback modes now work correctly.
Async circuits 24 can now be used.
SEL-8053-01-R101-V0-Z001001-D20101129 Initial version. 20110215

Table A.6 Transfer Trip Module 24/48 V Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8041-01-R103-V0-Z002001-D20140822 Resolved issue where if an SSM (synchronization status messag- 20140825


ing) timing switch occurs, the module sometimes experiences
data corruption without raising any alarms.
SEL-8041-01-R102-V0-Z002001-D20120810 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813
Module temperature is now reported in C.
SEL-8041-01-R100-V0-Z001001-D20110708 Initial version. 20110711

Table A.7 Transfer Trip Module 125/250 V Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8041-04-R103-V0-Z002001-D20140822 Resolved issue where if an SSM (synchronization status messag- 20140825


ing) timing switch occurs, the module sometimes experiences
data corruption without raising any alarms.
SEL-8041-04-R102-V0-Z002001-D20120810 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813
Module temperature is now reported in C.
SEL-8041-04-R100-V0-Z001001-D20110708 Initial version. 20110711

Table A.8 4-Wire VF Submodule Firmware Revision History (Sheet 1 of 2)

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8065-01-R103-V0-Z002001-D20140822 Resolved issue where if an SSM (synchronization status messag- 20140825


ing) timing switch occurs, the module sometimes experiences
data corruption without raising any alarms.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


A.6 Firmware and Manual Versions
Firmware

Table A.8 4-Wire VF Submodule Firmware Revision History (Sheet 2 of 2)

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8065-01-R102-V0-Z002001-D20120810 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813


Module temperature is now reported in C.
SEL-8065-01-R100-V0-Z001001-D20111011 Initial version. 20111011

Table A.9 Crypto Module Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8029-01-R101-V0-Z001001-D20131105 Corrected issue that caused intermittent LOS and LOF alarms. 20131113
SEL-8029-01-R100-V0-Z001001-D20120305 Initial version. 20120316

Table A.10 FXS Submodule Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8066-01-R103-V0-Z001001-D20140822 Resolved issue where if an SSM (synchronization status messag- 20140825


ing) timing switch occurs, the module sometimes experiences
data corruption without raising any alarms.
SEL-8066-01-R102-V0-Z001001-D20120810 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813
Module temperature is now reported in C.
SEL-8066-01-R100-V0-Z001001-D20120315 Initial version. 20120316

Table A.11 FXO Submodule Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8067-01-R103-V0-Z001001-D20140822 Resolved issue where if an SSM (synchronization status messag- 20140825


ing) timing switch occurs, the module sometimes experiences
data corruption without raising any alarms.
SEL-8067-01-R102-V0-Z001001-D20120810 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813
Module temperature is now reported in C.
SEL-8067-01-R100-V0-Z001001-D20120315 Initial version. 20120316

Table A.12 DS1 Async Submodule Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8057-01-R101-V0-Z001001-D20120810 Added support for Protected Line Module. 20120813


Module temperature is now reported in C.
SEL-8057-01-R100-V0-Z001001-D20120416 Initial version. 20120416

Table A.13 DS1 Sync Submodule Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8057-02-R101-V0-Z001001-D20131003 Fixed issue that could cause serial number to be overwritten. 20131003
SEL-8057-02-R100-V0-Z001001-D20130730 Initial version. 20130730

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware and Manual Versions A.7
Firmware

Table A.14 Ethernet Access Module Firmware Revision History

Manual
Firmware Identification (FID) Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

SEL-8035-01-R103-V0-Z001001-D20140814 Resolved an issue where an Ethernet PoE port showed to be in a 20140815


powered state even though no power was being provided to the
connected device.
SEL-8035-01-R102-V0-Z001001-D20120813 Initial version. 20120813

Table A.15 SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software Revision History (Sheet 1 of 4)

Manual
Software Version Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

1.15.0.0 The Events Selection window is now resizable. 20140623


Scheduled upgrades are removed from Current Schedules table
before status is reported to user.
Firmware upgrade for Crypto Module no longer has error state-
ment Fw will not upload.
Scheduled FW Upgrade will update a current schedule upgrade
even if it states Another session is active.
Several SEL-5051 Offline Mode enhancements added.
NMS now allows more than one window per node for restore.
Modules are no longer marked as unavailable in Firmware
Upgrade after a Server Module replacement.
Overview screen enhanced to make it easier to find nodes.
Added notification to user of Caps Lock for settings backup/
restore passwords.
The device view now makes the Tab key move to the next field
and highlight all text in the field.
Configuring DS0s at the same time as setting VT to
DS0-groomed now operates properly.
Changing panes in the device view always displays the top of the
new pane.
Added the ability to accept inventory from the Overview screen.
NMS now properly displays Publisher information in Programs
and Features of the Windows Control Panel.
Added Bandwidth Manager context menu and tooltip improve-
ments.
When the Search option window is adjusted to minimum
(dragged to the top), you can now adjust the window size.
Added ability for user configure TCP port to use for file transfers.
1.14.0.0 Added support for Gigabit Ethernet SFPs. 20140228
SEL-5051 crashed on first execution after a new installation if run
by non-administrator user. This was because administrator rights
are required to create the new database. SEL-5051 now creates
the database as part of the install process, when administrator
mode is guaranteed.
Ethernet counters will be reported in Frames instead of Pack-
ets.
Removed the Source Ring ID values from Device View, since
they are not used in Line Module release R108 and above.
Added access to the VT Test modes.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


A.8 Firmware and Manual Versions
Firmware

Table A.15 SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software Revision History (Sheet 2 of 4)

Manual
Software Version Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

Added Module, SONET Port, and Ethernet Port state values to


Device View. Each value corresponds to a displayed LED state on
the front of the module.
1.13.0.0 SEL-5051 performance degradation issue caused by long term 20131003
operation of SEL-5051 with ICON network has been fixed.
Added Connect to Network option on Login screen to allow
SEL-5051 to be run in offline mode. This enables users to change
SEL-5051 passwords without generating password mismatch
alarms.
SFP part number and serial number information is now included
in Inventory Reports.
SEL-8053-01 Async Data submodule test generator and test mon-
itor settings are now shown in Device View.
Refresh button added to Bandwidth Manager.
Scheduled firmware upgrades are now displayed in Current
Schedules tab.
Scheduled firmware upgrades now correctly run on local time
instead of TAI time.
Node restore now correctly changes IP address of node if the
restore data includes different IP address information.
Login screen and Security tab now include a Caps Lock is on
warning to help prevent password mismatch errors.
Minor alarms are now reported for modules in test mode.
Improved Bandwidth Manager response time when displaying
previously acquired data.
Faster ICON network discovery and display in the Overview tab.
1.12.0.0 Improved DS0 handling in Circuit Wizard and Device View. 20130830
Improved memory handling in Device View.
1.11.0.0 Added support for DS1 Sync submodules. 20130730
Added support for DS0 Grooming.
Added ability to find assets by serial number.
Bandwidth Manager now shows DS0 cross connects and DS0
groomed circuits.
1.10.0.0 Added support for network entities with mixed line rates in Band- 20130508
width Manager and Circuit Wizard.
1.9.0.0 Added ability to change the maximum SNMP packet size that is 20130321
sent between ICON and the SEL-5051 NMS.
Added ability to enable and disable the automatic expansion of
the Module Information field in Device View screen.
1.8.0.1 Added ability to backup and restore all the settings on each ICON 20130125
node in a network.
Users can choose time preference to be TAI, UTC or local time.
Added method to ingest IERS Bulletin C updates to enable leap
second events to be applied accordingly.
Added method to allow user to create a virtual link in Overview
screen to show network topology connection through non-ICON
nodes.
Presence of a Crypto Module is now indicated in Overview
screen by displaying padlock graphic on ICON node.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware and Manual Versions A.9
Firmware

Table A.15 SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software Revision History (Sheet 3 of 4)

Manual
Software Version Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

Added ability to open a second window to display the view of


ICON node in Device View screen using Pop Out selection.
Added support for Ethernet DRI options for Linear Spur and Sub-
tended Ring topologies.
Added User and Administrator security modes to prevent non-
Administrator users from being able to update Authentication and
Privacy passwords on the ICON network hardware.
SFP Port tooltip on the Overview screen now correctly updates
Rx Power value when fiber is disconnected.
1.7.0.0 Added ability to automatically provision TDM and Ethernet cir- 20131109
cuits using Circuit Wizard utility.
Cross-connects are now shown in Bandwidth Manager tab.
SEL-8053 Async module shows Triple EIA-232 option in Con-
nection Mode drop-down.
1.6.0.0 Added support for PLM, EAM, OC-3, OC-12, and bulk firmware 20130813
upgrades with scheduling.
Software now prompts user to improve password complexity if
existing password does not meet complexity requirements.
Resolved issue with failed authentication preventing future log on
via USB.
1.5.0.2 Added support for FXO, FXS, and DS-1 submodules. 20120316
Added ability to generate hardware inventory report for complete
ICON network.
Added presets for common SSM (synchronization status messag-
ing) settings.
VT statistics are now shown for VT structured STS.
Resolved issue with node status becoming stuck at disconnected
after repeatedly connecting and disconnecting USB.
Added ability to generate security report to help with NERC/CIP
reporting requirements.
Added ability to back-up and restore node settings.
Simplification made to sub-module Test Generators and Test
Monitors.
Simplified visual relationship between ports, circuits, and DPaths
for Access Modules.
Changed tab name of Device Design to Device View.
1.4.0.0 On Overview tab, optical links now show information on port to 20111216
which fiber is connected, SFP details including optical transmit
and receive power levels, and line bandwidth.
Enhanced Overview tab view zoom, pan, and animation controls.
On Overview tab, an ICON node with a Disconnected status can
be deleted even when it displays optical link(s) to adjacent icons.
Acquisition of events from ICON event logs is performed in
inverse-chronological order (i.e., latest events acquired first).
Events Table on Reports tab consolidates and replaces both
Recent Events table on System Monitoring tab and Alarm History
table on Reports tab.
Events Table provides Event Search Criteria that enable user to
specify events of interest to display in Events Table.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


A.10 Firmware and Manual Versions
Firmware

Table A.15 SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software Revision History (Sheet 4 of 4)

Manual
Software Version Number Summary of Revisions
Date Code

Event Search Criteria provides user the ability to optionally


search and display events from event archives.
Event archive files managed by application in a hidden directory.
User prompted for direction to move or delete oldest archives
when maximum allowed archive storage is filled.
On Device Design tab, available Line Module STS and VT Cross
Connect Source settings now displayed in correct X,Y notation.
On Device Design tab, Line Module Cross Connect Dual Homing
options made available when Cross Connect Source is chosen and
Target changes to Terminate.
On System Monitoring tab, Active Alarm Details correctly dis-
plays the selected alarms type.
Resolved issue with SEL-5051 losing connectivity over USB
after repeated insertion and removal of USB connector has been.
1.3.0.0 Added support for 4-Wire VF Access Module and Crypto Module. 20111011
Added support for Single Fiber SFPs.
Added support for linear networks.
Added Enable/Disable setting for each Sync Source in Line Mod-
ule SSM Status settings.
Removed timestamp 2 setting in Line Module TOH bytes config-
uration.
Added new alarm to indicate detection of duplicate PQM frames
ingressing on ports other than the original on Ethernet Switch.
Revertive Time setting now has an off option.
Updated format of STS number in alarms reports to be consistent
with STS format used elsewhere in SEL-5051.
When configuring Ethernet DRI, you can now configure Tie
Nodes before both rings are joined.
1.2.0.0 Added support for Transfer Trip Module. 20110711
Added Severity and State to Alarm History and Active Alarms.
Added Link Monitor to Line Module Ports in Device Design.
Added Ethernet DRI Configuration to Line Module in Device
Design.
Added Node Count to Link Monitor.
Added a tie-node monitor indication field on a per-port basis.
Added Inventory Manager to Device Design.
Log in User Name is now case sensitive.
Added support for alarm when connecting to disabled Ethernet
port.
Enhanced keyboard navigation in Device Design.
Added reset button for Ethernet Port statistics.
1.1.0.0 Updated USB Drivers. 20110215
Improved Windows 7 compliance.
1.0.0.0 Initial release. 20110215

Each row in Table A.16 details the module firmware revision numbers that are
required for compatibility across modules.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware and Manual Versions A.11
Firmware

Table A.16 Module Firmware Compatibility

Module Firmware Compatibilitya

Server R103 R103 R105 R105 R106 R108 R108 R111 R112 R112
Line R102, R106 R106 R107 R107 R107 R107 R108 R108 R109
R104,
R105
Protected Line N/A N/A R101 R103 R103 R105 R105 R105 R105 R106
Nx64F R101, R101, R104 R104 R104 R104 R104 R104 R104 R104,
R102 R102 R105
Async R101, R101, R104 R104 R104 R104 R104 R104 R105 R106
R102 R102
TTM 24/48 R100 R100 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102,
R103
TTM 125/250 R100 R100 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102,
R103
4-Wire VF R100 R100 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102,
R103
Crypto R100 R100 R100 R100 R100 R100 R100, R101 R101 R101
R101
FXS R100 R100 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102,
R103
FXO R100 R100 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102,
R103
DS1 Async N/A R100 R101 R101 R101 R101 R101 R101 R101 R101
DS1 Sync N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A R100 R101 R101 R101 R101
EAM N/A N/A R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R102 R103
SEL-5051 Soft- 1.3.0.0 1.5.0.2 1.6.0.0, 1.8.0.1 1.9.0.0, 1.11.0.0 1.13.0.0 1.14.0.0 1.15.0.0 1.15.0.0
ware Version 1.5.0.2 1.7.0.0 1.10.0.0 1.12.0.0
a Compatibility information for earlier firmware releases can be found at www.selinc.com/ICON/ under the Latest Firmware Version tab.

To ensure access to new access modules, feature enhancements, and defect


fixes, SEL recommends upgrading all modules to the latest firmware release,
indicated in Table A.17.

Table A.17 Recommended Latest Firmware Release (Sheet 1 of 2)

Recommended Latest Firmware Release


Server R112
Line R109
Protected Line R106
Nx64F R105
Async R106
TTM 24/48 R103
TTM 125/250 R103
4-Wire VF R103
Crypto R101
FXS R103
FXO R103
DS1 Async R101

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


A.12 Firmware and Manual Versions
Instruction Manual

Table A.17 Recommended Latest Firmware Release (Sheet 2 of 2)

Recommended Latest Firmware Release


DS1 Sync R101
EAM R103
SEL-5051 Software Version 1.15.0.0

Instruction Manual
The date code at the bottom of each page of this manual reflects the creation
or revision date.
Table A.18 lists the quick-start guide release dates and a description of
modifications. The most recent instruction manual revisions are listed at the
top.

Table A.18 Manual Revision History (Sheet 1 of 6)

Revision
Summary of Revisions
Date

20140827 Section 6
Made clarifications and updates throughout the section.
Added Figure 6.1: Nx64F PRBS Test Generator, Monitors, and Loopbacks.
Updated Table 6.4: Troubleshooting the Nx64F Submodule.
Appendix A
Updated for Nx64F Submodule firmware R105.
Updated Table A.16: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.17: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
20140825 Appendix A
Updated for TTM Module firmware R103, 4-Wire Submodule firmware R103, FXS Submodule firmware R103,
and FXO Submodule firmware R103.
Updated Table A.16: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.17: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
20140815 Section 3
Added information on IRIG-B output behavior with and without a valid clock source.
Section 4
Added information on IRIG-B output behavior with and without a valid clock source.
Section 7
Added information on IRIG-B output behavior with and without a valid clock source.
Appendix A
Updated for Line Module firmware R109, Protected Line Module firmware R106, Async Module firmware
R106, and Ethernet Access Module firmware R103.
Updated Table A.16: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.17: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
20140623 Changed name of document from ICON Quick-Start Guide to ICON Instruction Manual.
Section 1
Added information on ICON Cube chassis option.
Updated Figure 1.9: SEL-5051 Network Management System Network and Topology (Overview Tab).
Updated Table 1.7: Standard Multimode Gigabit Ethernet SFP
Section 2
Added new Section 2: Physical Platforms.
Section 3
Updated screenshots and associated tables.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware and Manual Versions A.13
Instruction Manual

Table A.18 Manual Revision History (Sheet 2 of 6)

Revision
Summary of Revisions
Date

Section 4
Updated screenshots and associated tables.
Section 6
Updated screenshots and associated tables.
Section 7
Updated cabling diagrams.
Updated screenshots and associated tables.
Section 8
Updated screenshots and associated tables.
Section 9
Updated screenshots and associated tables.
Appendix A
Updated for Server Module firmware R112, Async Module firmware R105, and software version 1.15.0.0.
Updated Table A.16: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.17: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
Appendix D
Updated Setting Maximum SNMP Packet Size and TCP Port Number subsection.
Appendix J
Updated Table J.4: Alarms and Events, Access Submodules.
20140228 Section 1
Updated Figure 1.9: SEL-5051 Network Management System Network and Topology (Overview Tab) and
Figure 1.10: SEL-5051 Device Design (For Configuring and Monitoring Modules).
Added Table 1.6: Standard Single-Mode Gigabit Ethernet SFP and Table 1.7: Standard Multimode Gigabit
Ethernet SFP.
Updated Specifications to include Gigabit Ethernet SFPs.
Section 2
Updated LAN Ports subsection for Gigabit Ethernet SFPs.
Updated Ethernet Features subsection.
Updated Table 2.1: Module Status Indicator LED through Table 2.5: IRIG OUT LED.
Updated screen shots and tables in Settings and Status and Monitor subsections.
Added SONET Performance Monitoring subsection, replacing History, 15-Minute Cells, 1-Day Cells, and User-
Configurable History.
Added Firmware Upgrade subsection.
Added Module Replacement subsection.
Section 3
Updated screen shots in Monitor subsection.
Added SONET Performance Monitoring subsection, replacing History, 15-Minute Cells, and 1-Day Cells.
Section 4
Updated Figure 4.1: Server Module Connections and LED Indicators and Figure 4.4: Server Module Alarm
Wiring Guide.
Updated tables and screen shots in GPS Time Distribution, IRIG-B Time Distribution, and Node subsections.
Section 7
Updated Figure 7.1: Front View of the Transfer Trip Module (TTM) With LED Locations.
Section 14
Updated screen shots and tables in Settings and Monitor subsections.
Appendix A
Updated for Line Module firmware R108, Server Module firmware R111, and software version 1.14.0.0.
Added Table A.15: SEL-5051 Network Management System Software Revision History.
Updated Table A.16: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.17: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


A.14 Firmware and Manual Versions
Instruction Manual

Table A.18 Manual Revision History (Sheet 3 of 6)

Revision
Summary of Revisions
Date

Appendix F
Added Table F.3: Effective Ethernet Throughput for 1000BASE-FX.
20131113 Section 2
Added explanation of DPipe ranges on individual access modules in Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) sub-
section.
Section 3
Added explanation of DPipe ranges on individual access modules in Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) sub-
section.
Section 5
Updated DPipe option information in Left and Right Port subsection.
Section 6
Updated DPipe option information in Left and Right Port subsection.
Section 8
Updated DPipe option information in Left and Right Port subsection.
Section 10
Updated DPipe option information in Left and Right Port subsection.
Section 11
Updated DPipe option information in Left and Right Port subsection.
Section 12
Updated DPipe option information in Left and Right Port subsection.
Appendix A
Updated for Crypto firmware R101.
20131003 Appendix A
Updated for DS1 Sync firmware R101.
Updated for SEL-5051 software version 1.13.0.0.
Updated Table A.15: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.16: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
Appendix D
Updated Initial NMS Installation subsection.
Added Managing Password Changes Without Creating System Alarms subsection.
Added Managing Access to Multiple Networks subsection.
Appendix G
Renamed appendix to Microsoft Windows OS Workarounds.
Added Enabling Desktop Composition in Windows 7 subsection.
20130830 Appendix A
Updated for SEL-5051 software version 1.12.0.0.
20130730 Section 1
Added specifications for DS1 Sync Module to Specifications.
Section 2
Removed Protected Line Module (PLM) information.
Section 3
Added new Section 3: Protected Line Module.
Added information and settings for SEL-8057-02 DS1 Sync Module.
Added DS0 Grooming subsection.
Section 13
Added new Section 13: DS1 Sync Submodule.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware and Manual Versions A.15
Instruction Manual

Table A.18 Manual Revision History (Sheet 4 of 6)

Revision
Summary of Revisions
Date

Appendix A
Updated for Protected Line Module firmware R105.
Updated for Server Module firmware R108.
Added Table A.13: DS1 Sync Module Firmware Revision History.
Updated Table A.15: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.16: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
Appendix J
Added new Appendix J: Alarms and Events.
20130508 Appendix A
Updated for SEL-5051 software version 1.10.0.0.
20130321 Appendix A
Updated for Server Module firmware R106.
Updated Table A.14: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.15: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
Appendix D
Added Setting Maximum SNMP Packet Size subsection.
20130125 Section 2
Added new Table 2.10: IRIG OUT LED.
Section 3
Added note to Dry Contact Inputs subsection.
Appendix A
Updated for Line Module firmware R107.
Updated for Protected Line Module firmware R103.
Updated Table A.14: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.15: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
Appendix B
Added Process for Resetting Modules subsection.
Appendix D
Updated Figure D.4: Change Passwords.
Added Changing Administration Password on ICON Network subsection.
Appendix I
Added new Appendix I: Reporting of Time in SEL ICON and SEL-5051 Network Management System Software.
20121109 Appendix A
Updated for SEL-5051 software version 1.7.0.0.
Appendix H
Added new Appendix H: SEL-5051 Network Management Circuit Wizard.
20120813 Section 2
Added Protected Line Module information.
Section 12
Added new Section 12: Ethernet Access Module.
Appendix A
Updated for Server Module firmware R105.
Updated for Nx64F Submodule firmware R104.
Updated for Async Module firmware R104.
Updated for Transfer Trip Module firmware R102.
Updated for 4-Wire Submodule firmware R102.
Updated for FXS Submodule firmware R102.
Updated for FXO Submodule firmware R102.
Updated for DS1 Async Submodule firmware R101.
Added Table A.2: Protected Line Module Revision History.
Added Table A.13: Ethernet Access Module Revision History.
Updated Table A.14: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.15: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


A.16 Firmware and Manual Versions
Instruction Manual

Table A.18 Manual Revision History (Sheet 5 of 6)

Revision
Summary of Revisions
Date

Appendix F
Added new Appendix F: Effective Ethernet Throughput.
Appendix G
Added new Appendix G: Overriding Automatic Metrics in Microsoft Windows 7.
20120416 Appendix A
Updated for Server Module firmware R103.
Added Table A.11: DS1 Async Submodule Revision History.
Updated Table A.12: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.13: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
20120316 Section 2
Updated screenshots to reflect SEL-5051 software version 1.5.0.2.
Section 3
Updated screenshots to reflect SEL-5051 software version 1.5.0.2.
Section 4
Updated screenshots to reflect SEL-5051 software version 1.5.0.2.
Section 5
Updated screenshots to reflect SEL-5051 software version 1.5.0.2.
Section 6
Updated screenshots to reflect SEL-5051 software version 1.5.0.2.
Section 7
Updated screenshots to reflect SEL-5051 software version 1.5.0.2.
Section 8
Added new Section 8: Crypto Module.
Section 9
Added new Section 9: FXS VF Submodule.
Section 10
Added new Section 10: FXO VF Submodule.
Section 11
Added new Section 11: DS1 Async Submodule.
Appendix A
Updated for Server Module firmware R103.
Added Table A.8: Crypto Module Revision History, Table A.9: FXS Submodule Revision History, and
Table A.10: FXO Submodule Revision History.
Updated Table A.11: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.12: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
Appendix B
Updated screenshots to reflect SEL-5051 software version 1.5.0.2.
Appendix C
Moved Configuration Process from Section 8 to Appendix C.
Reordered subsections and updated configuration diagrams.
Appendix E
Added new Appendix E: SEL-5051 Network Management System Software Report Filter.
20111216 Section 1
Updated Figure 1.7: SEL-5051 Network Management Software Network and Topology.
Updated Figure 1.8: SEL-5051 Device Design.
Section 4
Updated screen shot in Drop Port Configuration.
Appendix A
Updated Table A.8: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.9: Recommended Latest Firmware Release for
software version 1.4.0.0.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware and Manual Versions A.17
Instruction Manual

Table A.18 Manual Revision History (Sheet 6 of 6)

Revision
Summary of Revisions
Date

20111011 Section 1
Removed references to 10 Mb Ethernet on Server Module.
Section 3
Removed references to 10 Mb Ethernet on Server Module.
Section 7
Added Section 7: 4-Wire Submodule.
Appendix A
Updated Table A.1: Line Module Firmware Revision History and Table A.2: Server Module Firmware Revision
History for firmware version information.
Added Table A.7: 4-Wire VF Module Firmware Revision History.
Updated Table A.8: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.9: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
20110711 Section 6
Added Section 6: Transfer Trip Access Module.
Appendix A
Updated Table A.1: Line Module Firmware Revision History, Table A.2: Server Module Firmware Revision His-
tory, Table A.3: Nx64 Submodule Firmware Revision History, and Table A.4: Async Submodule Firmware Revi-
sion History for firmware version information.
Added Table A.5: Transfer Trip Module 24/48 V Firmware Revision History and Table A.6: Transfer Trip Mod-
ule 125/250 V Firmware Revision History.
Added Table A.7: Module Firmware Compatibility and Table A.8: Recommended Latest Firmware Release.
20110215 Initial version.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


This page intentionally left blank
Appendix B
Firmware Upgrade Instructions
This procedure details the steps required to upgrade the various modules in the
SEL Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON).

Procedure
Step 1. Log into the SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS)
Software.
Step 2. Select the Firmware Upgrade tab at the top of the SEL-5051
NMS screen shown in Figure B.1.

Figure B.1 Firmware Upgrade Tab

Step 3. Select the Add Uploads button on the ribbon.


Step 4. Select the module type to be upgraded (Figure B.2).
When doing multiple uploads that include the Server Module,
always upgrade the Server Module first.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


B.2 Firmware Upgrade Instructions
Procedure

Figure B.2 Add Uploads Selection

Step 5. Click Open and locate the new firmware upgrade file. When
the file has been selected, the firmware file and other
information about the file will appear in the firmware window
(Figure B.3).

Figure B.3 Firmware Selected and Immediate Upload Selected

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware Upgrade Instructions B.3
Procedure

Step 6. Firmware upgrades can be scheduled for a specific time and


date or be performed immediately. Make the appropriate
selections depending on upgrade requirements.
The ability to schedule firmware upgrades is a feature that was
introduced in the firmware versions listed in Table B.1. Earlier
firmware versions do not support this feature, and the
SEL-5051 NMS software will indicate if the module does or
does not support this capability. Performing an immediate
firmware upgrade is possible with all firmware versions for
every module.

Table B.1 Firmware Versions That Support Scheduled Upgrades

Scheduled Firmware Upgrades Supported in


Following Releases and Later
Server R105
Line R106
Protected Line R101
Nx64F R104
Async R104
TTM 24/48 R102
TTM 125/250 R102
4-Wire VF R102
Crypto Unsupported
FXS R102
FXO R102
DS1 Async R101
DS1 Sync R100
EAM R102
SEL-5051 Software Version 1.6.0.0

Step 7. Click Add Uploads in the ribbon.


All specified firmware upgrades will be shown in the Firmware
Upgrade screen, as shown in Figure B.4. Additional upgrades
can be added by clicking Add Uploads in the ribbon. The
upgrade queue can be managed using the Remove and
Optimize menu selections. Remove provides the ability to
remove all currently queued upgrades or remove completed
upgrades. To remove a single upgrade, click on the row to be
deleted and press the Delete key.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


B.4 Firmware Upgrade Instructions
Procedure

Figure B.4 Selected Firmware Upgrades Added to the Queue

Step 8. Click Start All to start firmware upgrades. This will start
immediate upgrades and place scheduled upgrades in the
calendar. Clicking Current Schedules will show all scheduled
firmware upgrades. Status bars indicate the progress of each
upgrade (Figure B.5).

Figure B.5 Firmware Upgrade Status Bars

As the uploads complete and the modules successfully reboot


with the new firmware, each status bar will indicate that the
upgrade was successful (Figure B.6).

Figure B.6 Upgrade Complete

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Firmware Upgrade Instructions B.5
Process for Resetting Modules

The status indicators will remain on the screen when the process is completed.
Click the Remove button to clear the screen.

Process for Resetting Modules


SEL-5051 Network Management System (NMS) Software provides a method
to reset any module back to its default factory settings.
Step 1. In Device View, hover over the module to be reset and press the
right mouse button.
The pop-up window shown in Figure B.7 will appear.

Figure B.7 Reset Module

Step 2. Select Reset Module.


IMPORTANT: This action will erase A window will appear asking for confirmation that you want to
all channel settings. The module will
need to be reprogrammed after this reset the module back to factory defaults.
function is performed.

Figure B.8 Confirm Module Reset

NOTE: If the module being reset is Step 3. Select Yes to perform the reset operation. The module will now
the Crypto Module, the user will need
to perform a rekey on the reset be reset to factory defaults.
module and also on the adjacent
Crypto Modules in the network to Step 4. Repeat Step 1Step 3 for any other modules in the system.
restore network connectivity.

IMPORTANT: If a new release


(Rxxx) of an access module
implements an increase in size of its
settings database, and then if the
module firmware is subsequently
downgraded to an earlier version, the
settings will be reset to defaults. This
is true for all access modules.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


B.6 Firmware Upgrade Instructions
Factory Assistance

Factory Assistance
We appreciate your interest in SEL products and services. If you have
questions or comments, please contact us at:
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Inc.
2350 NE Hopkins Court
Pullman, WA 99163-5603 U.S.A.
Tel: +1.509.332.1890
Fax: +1.509.332.7990
Internet: www.selinc.com
E-mail: info@selinc.com

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Appendix C
Configuration Process

Introduction
The configuration processes show the steps necessary to configure channels
on the SEL Integrated Communications Optical Network (ICON) network.
They also show the relationship between the access modules and the line side
and how the data flow from one side to another. You can use these as a
references while configuring or changing a channel.

Line Module Configuration


Provisioning
Double-Click on
Bandwidth for a Line Module
Point-to-Point Circuit
Select Select
Port A or C Port B or D

Select STS Select STS


Needed Needed

Set Structure to Set Structure to


VT Structure VT Structure

Select Desired VT Select Desired VT


Enter DPipe Value Enter DPipe Value

Select VT Select VT
Structure DS0 Structure DS0
Channels or Bulk Channels or Bulk
(for DS1 Circuits) (for DS1 Circuits)

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


C.2 Configuration Process
Submodule or Access Module Provisioning Overview

Submodule or Access Module Provisioning Overview


Provisioning Double-Click on
Bandwidth at the the Submodule
or Access Module
Terminating
Submodule or Access
Select Circuit
Module (Except DS1) Under the Desired
Port or Connector

Set Desired Left


and Right DPaths
(116) and Set
UCAD Values

Select Left Select Right


Port (A/C) Port (B/D)

Set Priority, Set Priority,


NPADs, DPipe, NPADs, DPipe,
and DS0s and DS0s

DS1 Async Provisioning Overview


Provisioning Double-Click on
Bandwidth at the the DS1 Submodule

Terminating DS1
Async Submodule Select Circuit
Under the
Desired Port

Set Desired Left


and Right DPaths
(116) and Set
UCAD Values

Select Left Select Right


Port (A/C) Port (B/D)

Set Priority, Set Priority,


NPADs, and NPADs, and
DPipe DPipe

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Appendix D
Connecting SEL-5051 Network
Management System Software to the
ICON Network
There are two methods of connecting the SEL-5051 Network Management
System (NMS) Software to the SEL Integrated Communications Optical
Network (ICON) network: USB and Ethernet.

Initial NMS Installation


If this is the first time you are running NMS, you will need to log on to the
software with default passwords prior to connecting the computer to the ICON
network.
Step 1. Start NMS on the computer.
Step 2. Accept the terms and conditions, as shown in Figure D.1.

Figure D.1 NMS Terms and Conditions

Step 3. Log into NMS with the default username and password, as
shown in Figure D.2. Deselect the Connect to Network on
Login checkbox.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


D.2 Connecting SEL-5051 Network Management System Software to the ICON Network
Initial NMS Installation

Figure D.2 Log Into the Network Management System Software

If Caps Lock is enabled on the keyboard, the login screen


displays a warning to help prevent login errors. See Figure D.3.

Figure D.3 Caps Lock Warning

NOTE: The user and password The factory default username and passwords are:
information is case sensitive.

Username: icon
Authentication Password: SEL-8000
Privacy Password: SEL-8000

This step is only required to log onto the initial installation of


NMS. NMS should now be running on your computer.
The dialog box in Figure D.4 will be displayed. This message
explains how to establish a connection to the ICON network
after the correct passwords are entered into NMS.

Figure D.4 Disconnected From Network

Step 4. Click OK in the Disconnected from Network dialog box. The


passwords should now be changed to match those of the ICON
network. Select the Security tab in the NMS application and
you will see the screen shown in Figure D.5.

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Connecting SEL-5051 Network Management System Software to the ICON Network D.3
Initial NMS Installation

Figure D.5 Change Passwords

Enter the Authentication and Privacy password information to


match the passwords on the ICON network. Click Set
Passwords.
Step 5. To establish a network connection between NMS and the ICON
network, select Network Entry Points from the Overview
screen as shown in Figure D.6.

Figure D.6 Network Entry Points

Step 6. Add the Network Name alias and IP address of any node in the
ICON network, then select Add Entry Point, as shown in
Figure D.7.

Figure D.7 Add Entry Points

Step 7. Select OK. NMS will connect to the ICON network.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


D.4 Connecting SEL-5051 Network Management System Software to the ICON Network
Changing Administration Password on ICON Network

Once the passwords have been changed, all future logon sessions can be made
with the Connect to Network on Logon field selected in Figure D.2. Using
this function, the user will connect directly to the ICON network once the
correct username and passwords have been entered.

Changing Administration Password on ICON Network


When the user logs on to NMS using the steps outlined in Initial NMS
Installation, they are logged on in User Security Mode. In User Security
Mode, they only have permissions to change the passwords on NMS. They do
not have permissions to change the corresponding passwords on the ICON
hardware. In order to successfully log onto the network, the passwords used to
logon to NMS must match those on the ICON hardware.
To change the passwords stored on the ICON hardware the user must log on in
Administration Mode. The following steps show how to log on in
Administration Mode.
Step 1. From the Windows Start Menu, find the SEL-5051 program
icon and right click on it. The window shown in Figure D.8
should open.

Figure D.8 SEL-5051 NMS Properties

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Connecting SEL-5051 Network Management System Software to the ICON Network D.5
Changing Administration Password on ICON Network

Step 2. Select Properties from the menu. The window show in


Figure D.9 should open.

Figure D.9 SEL-5051 NMS Properties Window

Step 3. Type the administration password at the end of the text string
shown in the Target field, as shown in Figure D.10.

Figure D.10 Adding Password Text to Target Field

Step 4. Select Apply and click OK.


Step 5. Launch NMS.
Step 6. Accept terms and conditions and enter the Username, the
Authentication password, and the Privacy Password in the
SEL-5051 Login screen as shown in Figure D.11.

Date Code 20140827 Instruction Manual SEL ICON


D.6 Connecting SEL-5051 Network Management System Software to the ICON Network
Changing Administration Password on ICON Network

Figure D.11 SEL-5051 NMS Login Screen

The user is now logged on in Administration Security Mode.


Step 7. Select the Security tab. The screen shown in Figure D.12 is
displayed. The red text in the Security screen validates that the
user is in Administration security mode. NMS is now running
in Administration Security Mode. Changing passwords using
this screen will now change the passwords on both NMS and
the ICON hardware.
Because changing passwords while in Administration Security
Mode alters passwords for both the NMS and the ICON
hardware, it is important that you chose a strong password with
a length of at least eight characters. Passwords must include at
least one of each of the following: lower-case letter, upper-case
letter, number, and special character such as !, @, &, etc.
If your new password does not meet minimum requirements, an
alert will be generated recommending a stronger password be
used.
If you are changing passwords while in User Security Mode, no
check is done on the password strength because the ICON
hardware password is not being changed.
Any changes made to the passwords will mean that all users
who have access to the network will no longer have passwords
that match the ICON hardware passwords and will not be able
to log on to the network until they change their passwords to
match the new Administration passwords.

Figure D.12 Security Screen

SEL ICON Instruction Manual Date Code 20140827


Connecting SEL-5051 Network Management System Software to the ICON Network D.7
Managing Password Changes Without Creating System Alarms

Managing Password Changes Without Creating


System Alarms
The previous section describes how to change the ICON hardware passwords
while in Administration Mode. All users who do not have Administrator
access privileges will be required to change their passwords to correspond to
the new ICON hardware passwords to be able to login to the network.